Handleiding Subaru Outback 2015 (pagina 7 van 580) (Engels)

624204

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/580

Pagina verder

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read

this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and

its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact

the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or

the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifi cations and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY

INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The

next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

1) Legacy

2) Outback

Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A.

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru

of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in the United

States come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranties

. Federal Emission Control Systems

Warranties

. California Emissions Control Systems

Warranties

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”. Please read these warranties

carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru

Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Please read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

& Using your Owner’s Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter conta ins the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS

airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and

how to use the instruments and other

switches.

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate

your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem, such as a flat tire or

engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep you r SUBARU running

properly.

– CONTINUED –

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about the dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Tire

information, Uniform tire quality grading

standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

& Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understand-

ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle

safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation list

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

A/C Air conditioner

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

ABS Anti-lock brake system

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD Blind spot detection

CVT

Continuously variable trans-

mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD

Electronic brake force distri-

bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

FWD Front-wheel drive

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

HID High intensity discharge

Abbreviation Meaning

INT Intermittent

LATCH

Lower anchors and tethers for

children

LCA Lane change assist

LED Light emitting diode

LSD Limited slip differential

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl

MT Manual transmission

OBD On-board diagnostics

RON Research octane number

RCTA Rear cross traffic alert

SRF

Steering responsive fog lights

system

SRS

Supplemental restraint sys-

tem

SRVD

SUBARU Rear Vehicle De-

tection

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” F21.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions care-

fully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuric

acid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

Safety precautions when

driving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fast en their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers in the

vehicle should always wear seat-

belts when the vehicle is moving.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System) airbag does not do away

with the need to fasten seatbelts.

In combination with the seat-

belts, it offers the best combined

protection in case of a serious

accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

– CONTINUED –

. The SRS a irbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always

sit upright and well back in the

seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” F1-16.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)” F1-41.

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, in-

fants and small children should

always be placed in the REAR

seat in an infant or child restraint

system which is appropriate for

the child’s age, height and

weight. If a child is too big for a

child restraint system, the child

should sit in the REAR seat and

be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seat-

ing positions. Never allow a child

to stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Put children in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in

a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always turn the child safety locks

to the “LOCK” position whenever

a child rides in the rear seat.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opened the

door and fell out. Refer to “Child

safety locks” F2-32.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to “Windows” F2-32.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through

inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

the temperature in a closed ve-

hicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or pos-

sibly fatal injuries.

. Help prevent children, adults or

animals from locking themselves

in the trunk. On hot or sunny

days, the temperature in the

trunk could quickly become high

enough to cause death or serious

heat-related injuries including

brain damage to anyone locked

inside, particularly for small chil-

dren.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

Also make certain that the trunk

is closed.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” F1-16.

. For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child restraint systems” F1-27.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)” F1-41.

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a long time while the

engine i s running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate

closed while driving to prevent

exhaust gas from entering the

vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and

impairs your perception, judgment

and attentiveness. If you drive after

drinking – even if you drink just a

little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

– CONTINUED –

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken dr iving is one of the mo st

frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-

hol affects all people differently, you may

have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your

blood is below the legal limit. The safest

thing you can do is never drink and drive.

However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-

tely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some d rugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or

fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can

make you drowsy or otherwise affect your

ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

you have a medical condition that requires

you to take drugs, please consult with

your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your

passengers’ and other persons’

chances of being involved in a

serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but

instead find a safe place to rest if you

are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you

should make periodic rest stops to refresh

yourself before continuing on your journey.

When possible, you should share the

driving with others.

& Car phone/cell phone and

driving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phone

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and can lead

to an accident. If you use a car

phone/cell phone, pull off the road

and p ark in a safe place before

using your phone. In some States/

Provinces, only hands-free phones

may legally be used while driving.

& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling

harness which can be secured to the rear

seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier

which can be secured to the rear seat by

routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s

handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers

in the front passenger’s seat. For further

information, consult your veterinarian,

local animal protection society or pet

shop.

& Tire pressures

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could l ead to an

accident.

Check and, if n ecessary, adjus t the

pressure of each tire (including the spare)

at least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire placard. For detailed information, refer

to “Tires and wheels” F11-24.

General information

& California proposition 65

warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-

tuents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

& California Perchlorate Advi-

sory

Certain vehicle components such as air-

bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and

keyless entry transmitter batteries may

contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

– CONTINUED –

& Noise from under the vehicle

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the engine is turned off. However,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

This noise is caused by the operation

of the fuel evaporation leakage check-

ing system and the operation is normal.

The noise will stop after approximately

15 minutes.

& Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or

near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,

data that will assist in understanding how

a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for

a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. Howfar(ifatall)thedriverwas

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understandin g of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the informa-

tion if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR.

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Engine hood (page 11-7)

2) Headlight switch (page 3-42)

3) Bulb replacement (page 11-39)

4) Wiper switch (page 3-50)

5) Moonroof (page 2-46)

6) Roof rail with integrated crossbars and

rope hook (page 8-14)

7) Door locks (page 2-6)

8) Tire pressure (page 11-26)

9) Flat tires (page 9-5)

10) Fog light switch (page 3-47)

11) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)

12) Towing hook (Outback) (page 9-14)

1) Rear window defogger switch

(page 3-52)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)

3) Child safety locks (page 2-32)

4) Towing hook (page 9-14)

5) Trunk lid (page 2-37)

6) Rear wiper switch (page 3-51)

7) Rear gate (page 2-39)

8) Bulb replacement (page 11-42)

9) Tie-down holes (page 9-14)

– CONTINUED –

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Lower anchorages for chil d restraint

system (page 1-35)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-16)

3) Center console (page 6-6)

4) Front seat (page 1-2)

5) Rear seat (page 1-11)

1) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-23)/Select lever

(CVT) (page 7-26)

2) Climate control (page 4-1)

3) Audio (page 5-1)/Navigation system (Re-

fer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for

the navigation system)

4) Glove box (page 6-6)

5) Accessory power outlet (page 6-9)

6) Cup holder (page 6-7)

7) Electronic parking brake switch

(page 7-42)

8) X-mode switch (page 7-39)

9) Hill Holder switch (page 7-45)

– CONTINUED –

& Instrument panel

1) Power windows (page 2-32)

2) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-66)

3) Combination meter (page 3-7)

4) Audio (page 5-1/Navigation system (Re-

fer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for

the navigation system)

5) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-7)

6) Seat heater switch (page 1-9)

7) Climate control (page 4-1)

8) Memory switch (page 2-44)

9) Illumination brightness control dial

(page 3-46)

10) Power rear gate switch (page 2-40)

11) SRVD OFF switch (page 7-58)

12) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 7-37)

13) Steering responsive fog light off switch

(page 3-47)

A: Models without EyeSight system

B: Models with EyeSight system

NOTE

For models with EyeSight system:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

& Steering wheel

1) Audio control buttons (page 5-18)

2) Cruise control (page 7-49)

3) Shift paddle (page 7-29)

4) Hands-free switches (page 5-84)

5) Multi information display control switches

(page 3-33)

6) SRS airbag (page 1-41)

7) Horn (page 3-67)

– CONTINUED –

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches

1) Windshield wiper (page 3-49)

2) Mist (page 3-50)

3) Windshield washer (page 3-51)

4) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-51)

5) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 3-50)

6) Wiper control lever (page 3-50)

7) Light control switch (page 3-42)

8) Front fog light switch (page 3-47)

9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-42)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-44)

11) Turn signal lever (page 3-46)

& Combination meter

! U.S. spec. models (type A)

1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

2) ECO gauge (page 3-11)

3) Speedometer (page 3-8)

4) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)

5) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-29)

6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)

7) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

– CONTINUED –

! U.S. spec. models (type B)

1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

2) ECO gauge (page 3-11)

3) Speedometer (page 3-8)

4) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)

5) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-29)

6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)

7) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

! Except U.S. spec. models (type A)

1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

2) ECO gauge (page 3-11)

3) Speedometer (page 3-8)

4) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)

5) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-29)

6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)

7) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

– CONTINUED –

! Except U.S. spec. models (type B)

1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

2) ECO gauge (page 3-11)

3) Speedometer (page 3-8)

4) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)

5) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-29)

6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)

7) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

& Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-12

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light

3-12

SRS airbag system

warning light

3-14

CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator light

3-15

Charge warning light 3-15

Oil pressure warning

light

3-16

Engine low oil level

warning indicator

3-16

AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

3-16

/ ABS warning light 3-18

Brake system warning

light

3-19

Mark Name Page

Hill Holder indicator

light

3-21

Door open indicator 3-21

Low fuel warning light 3-21

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light (CVT models)

3-21

Power steering warning

light

3-22

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light

3-22

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol OFF indicator light

3-23

Access key warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

3-24

Security indicator light 3-28

Turn signal indicator

lights

3-29

High beam indicator

light

3-29

Mark Name Page

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light (if equipped)

3-29

Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

3-30

Cruise control indicator 3-29

Cruise control set indi-

cator

3-29

X-mode indicator (if

equipped)

3-30

Hill descent control in-

dicator (if equipped)

3-30

Headlight indicator light 3-30

Low tire pressure

warning light (U.S.

spec. models)

3-17

Front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag ON indicator

light

3-14

Front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag OFF indicator

light

3-14

Windshield washer fluid

warning indicator

3-21

– CONTINUED –

Mark Name Page

Steering responsive fog

lights OFF indicator (if

equipped)

3-30

SUBARU Rear Vehicle

Detection warning indi-

cator (if equipped)/

SUBARU Rear Vehicle

Detection OFF indicator

(if equipped)

3-30

Icy road surface warn-

ing screen

3-30

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation

Monitoring start delay time (after closing

doors)

0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Impact sensor operation (only models with

shock sensors (dealer option))

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

Map light/Dome light/Cargo area light illu-

mination

ON/OFF OFF

Keyless access with push-but-

ton start system

Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal

Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Door unlock selection (driver’s door unlock) Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only

Door unlock selection (rear gate unlock) Rear gate/trunk only/All doors Rear gate/trunk only

Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Defogger and deicer system Rear window defogger, outside mirror de-

fogger and windshield wiper deicer

Operation for 15 minutes/Contin-

uous operation

Operation for 15 minutes

Map light/Dome light/Cargo

area light

Operation of map light/dome light/cargo area

light OFF delay timer

OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long

Battery drainage prevention

function

Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation

– CONTINUED –

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Auto on/off headlights Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/off

headlights

Min/Low/Mid/Max Mid

Auto dimmer cancel Sensitivity of the operation of the auto

dimmer cancel

OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

Welcome lighting function Welcome lighting function (when approach-

ing)

OFF/30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds

30 seconds

Welcome lighting function (when exiting) OFF/30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds

30 seconds

Reverse gear interlocked rear

wiper

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper opera-

tion

Operation/Non-operation Canada-spec. models: Operation

Other models: Non-operation

One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane changer Operation/Non-operation Operation

*1: If equipped

*2: This setting also works as the ON/OFF setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation. However, you cannot change the warning buzzer

setting for a detecting jam, etc.

Front seats........................................................... 1-2

Manual seat (if equipped) .................................... 1-4

Power seat (if equipped)...................................... 1-5

Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-9

Front seat heater (if equipped) ............................ 1-10

Rear seat heater (if equipped) ............................. 1-10

Rear seats........................................................... 1-11

Reclining the seatback (Outback)........................ 1-11

Folding down the rear seatback .......................... 1-12

Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-14

Armrest ............................................................. 1-15

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-16

Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-16

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-17

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) ......................................... 1-17

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-17

Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-17

Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-24

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-24

System monitors ................................................ 1-26

System servicing................................................ 1-26

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-27

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-27

Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-28

Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-30

Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR

seatbelt ........................................................... 1-30

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-34

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-35

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-38

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)................................................ 1-41

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system ............................................................ 1-41

Components...................................................... 1-48

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system, SRS

seat cushion airbag, SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag .................................................. 1-51

System operation............................................... 1-56

SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-68

SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-69

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-70

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

Front seats

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-

trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers or cargo are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. After adjusting the seat, push it

slightly to make sure it is se-

curely locked. If the seat is not

securely locked, it may move or

the seatbelt may not operate

properly.

. Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with

front seat locking and cause an

accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the fr ont seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy wit h

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not in the

proper position when the SRS

airbag deploys could suffer very

serious inj uries. B ecause the

SRS airbag needs enough space

for deployment, the driver should

always sit upright and well back

in the seat as far from the steer-

ing wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

Put children in the rear seat properly

restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because c hildren are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. Consequently, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child seats

and those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all times

in a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

1-2

for the child’s age, heigh t a nd

weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward facing

child seats) in the REAR seats at

all times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-

CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” F1-27.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the

seatback. If you do so, the risk of

sliding under the lap belt and of the

lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may lead to

improper operation of the following

systems and could result in serious

injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. SRS seat cushion airbag

. Front seat heater (if equipped)

. Power seat (if equipped)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

– CONTINUED –

1-3

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

& Manual seat (if equipped)

! Forward and backward adjustment

1. Sit in the seat to adjust.

2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to

the desired position, and then release the

lever.

3. Try to move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked into

place.

! Reclining the seatback

1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the

seatback to the desired position, and then

release the lever.

2. Make sure the seatback is securely

locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

pulling up the lever. While operating the

lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

! Seat cushion height adjustment

(driver’s seat)

1) Push the lever down to lower the seat.

2) Pull the lever up to raise the seat.

You can adjust the height of the seat by

moving the seat cushion adjustment lever

up or down.

1-4

& Power seat (if equipped)

! Driver’s seat

1) Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion angle or seat cushion

height.

2) Seat cushion angle control switch

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

3) Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

4) Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback,

move the control switch.

5) Lumbar support control switch

To increase lower back support, push the

front side of the switch. To decrease

lower back support, push the rear side of

the switch.

! Front passenger’s seat (if

equipped)

1) Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward.

2) Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback,

move the control switch.

! Memory function (driver’s seat — if

equipped)

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-

trol and personal injury.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

– CONTINUED –

1-5

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure that cargo or the hands and

feet of rear seat passengers are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. Never retrieve the seat position

while driving to avoid loss o f

vehicle control and personal in-

jury.

. Perform the seat position retrie-

val before driving. Be sure to

confirm that the select lever is

in the “P” position, and the

parking brake is applied, when

adjusting the seat position. Do

not drive until the retrieval of the

seat position is complete.

. When retrieving a registered seat

position, make sure the hands,

feet and possessions of rear seat

passengers are clear of the seat

adjusting mechanism.

. When any unusual conditions or

malfunctions occur during the

retrieval of the seat position, stop

the retrieval of the seat position

by performing any of the follow-

ing procedures.

– Operate any of the power seat

switches

– Press the “SET” button

– Press button “1” or “2”

Some of your desired seat positions can

be registered. Register the seat position

with button “1” or “2” or each of the access

keys and retrieve the seat position.

The foll owing seat positions can be

registered.

. Forward/backward position of the seat

. Angle of seatback

. Angle of seat cushion

. Height of seat

! Registration of seat position with

button “1” or “2”

1. Adjust the seat position under the

following conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The select lever is in the “P” posi-

tion.

2. While pressing the “SET” button, press

and hold the desired button “1” or “2”.

A chirp sounds once, and the seat position

is registered.

! Registration of seat position with

each access key

1. Adjust the seat position und er the

following conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

. The select lever is in the “P” posi-

tion.

1-6

2. While holding the access key and

pressing the “SET” button, press the “

”

button of the access key.

A chirp sounds once, and the seat position

is registered.

! Retrieval of seat position regis-

tered with button “1” or “2”

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button

to retrieve your registered seat

position. If the seat position is not

optimum for you, it may adversely

affect your driving and may reduce

the effectiveness of the seatbelt.

That could result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. While the select lever is in the “P”

position and the parking brake is applied,

press button “1” or “2”.

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the

registered position. When the seat moves

to the registered position, a chirp will

sound.

NOTE

. If a new position is registered for the

same button, the previously registered

seat position is deleted.

. If the vehicle battery is removed, the

registered seat position is not deleted.

. When the button “1” or “2” is

pressed within 45 seconds after the

driver’s door is opened, the registered

seat position can be retrieved even if

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or

“OFF” position.

! Retrieval of the seat position

registered with access key

1. Hold the registered access key.

2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing

the “

” button or gripping the door handle.

3. Open the driver’s door.

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the

registered position. When the seat moves

to the registered position, a chirp will

sound.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

– CONTINUED –

1-7

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats

NOTE

. If the registered seat position cannot

be retrieved after performing the pre-

vious procedures, try the following

procedures.

(1) Press the “SET” button on the

driver’s door.

(2) Press the “

” button on the

access key or touch the door lock

sensor to lock the doors.

(3) Perform the prior procedures

again.

. If the keyless access func tion is

disabled, the seat position cannot be

retrieved by gripping the driver’s door

handle. However, the seat position can

still be retrieved by pressing the “

”

button on the access key. For informa-

tion about how to enable/disable the

keyless access function, refer to “Dis-

abling keyless access function” F2-18.

. If a new position is registered for the

same access key, the previously regis-

tered seat position is deleted.

! Clearing the registered seat

position with access key

1. Close the driver’s door.

2. While holding the access key and

pressing the “SET” button, press the “

”

button on the access key.

A chirp will sound, and the registered seat

position will be cleared.

& Head restraint adjustment

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Also, never install

the head restraints the opposite

way around. Doing so will pre-

vent the head restraints from

functioning as intended. There-

fore, when you remove the head

restraints, you must reinstall all

head restraints correctly to pro-

tect vehicle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

Both the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger ’s seat are equipped with head re-

straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-

ble in the following ways.

! Head restraint height adjustment

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while

pressing the release button on the top of

the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

1-8

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

! Head restraint angle adjustment

The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-

ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the

head restraint to a position where the back

of your head is as close to the head

restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the

preferred position. A click will be audible

when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forward

as it can go. The head restraint will

automatically return to the fully upright

position. Then, adjust the head restraint

again to the preferred angle.

Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater operates when the igni-

tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

CAUTION

. People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

more from the completely closed posi-

tion.

Retrieval of the rear gate height:

To open the rear gate and stop it at the

registered height, perform the following

procedure.

1. Press the memory switch to select the

ON status.

2. Press and hold any of the power rear

gate switches.

Even if any of the p ower rear gate

switches are pressed and held while the

memory switch is in the OFF status, you

can stop it at the registered height by

pressing the memory switch to select the

ON status before the rear gate reaches

the registered height.

NOTE

The rear gate will open to the position

that is stored in the memory function

even if the rear gate is opened by the

reverse function.

! Reverse function

WARNING

. Do not let parts of your body get

caught when operating the re-

verse function. If the reverse

function does not operate for

some reason, this may lead to

serious injury or accidents.

. The reverse fu nction may not

operate if foreign objects are

caught in the rear gate just

before it closes completely. Be

careful not to catch your fingers

and other body parts.

. The reverse fu nction may not

operate depending on the object

shape and the manner in which it

was caught. Be careful not to

catch your fingers and other

body parts.

CAUTION

. If the reverse function is operated

3 times consecutively, automatic

opening and closing of the power

rear gate function will be can-

celed and the rear gate will stop

opening or closing suddenly.

Whether the rear gate opens or

closes depends on the rear gate

height when automatic operation

is ceased. Be careful that the rear

gate does not hit anyone’s head

or face, etc. and that fingers and

baggage, etc. are not caught in it.

. Take care not to damage the

touch sensors. Otherwise, the

reverse function may cease to

operate.

If, while opening or closing using power

rear gate, the rear gate catches persons

or baggage or hits an obstacle, an

electronic chirp will sound 3 times and

the rear gate will operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate: The rear

gate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate: The rear

gate will automatically open.

Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)

– CONTINUED –

2-45

Keys and doors/Moonroof

1) Touch sensor

Touch sensors are attached on the left

and right edges of the rear gate. If the

touch sensors detect fingers, baggage,

etc. while closing by the power rear gate

function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3

times and the rear gate will open auto-

matically.

NOTE

When the rear gate is opened using the

reverse function, it will be opened fully

or to the height registered in the

memory function.

! Rear gate drop prevention function

If, while fully opened via the power rear

gate function, the rear gate is lowered by

the weight of snow and such, an electronic

chirp will sound and the rear gate drop

prevention function will apply braking to

the rear gate so that it prevents a rapid

closure of the rear gate.

NOTE

. If there is snow on the rear gate,

only use the power rear gate function

after removing the snow.

. If you close the rear gate manually

just after the rear gate is fully opened

using the power rear gate function, the

rear gate drop prevention function will

detect a rapid closure of the rear gate

and apply braking to the rear gate. In

this case, this is not a malfunction.

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

Never let anyone’shands,arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if the vehicle stops

suddenly or turns sharply or if the

vehicle is involved in an accident.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

conform to the following instruc-

tions without exception.

. Before closing t he moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety (models

without “keyless access w ith

push-button start system”) and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child operat-

ing the moonroof.

2-46

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to do so

before tilting the moonroof down.

. If the moonroof does not close,

we recommend that you have the

system checked by a SUBARU

dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Moonroof switches

! Tilting moonroof

“UP/DOWN” switch

1) Tilting up

2) Laying down

The tilting up function will only operate

when the moonroof is fully closed. The

laying down function will only operate

when the moonroof is tilted.

Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”

switch to tilt up the moonroof.

Press the front side of the “ UP/DOWN”

switch to lay down the moonroof.

Release the switch after the moonroof has

been tilted or has been laid down com-

pletely. Pressing the switch continuously

may cause damage to the moonroof.

NOTE

One-touch operation does not take

place when the moonroof is lowered.

Press the switch continuously to lower

the moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof

“OPEN/CLOSE” switch

1) Open

2) Close

Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”

switch to open the moonroof. The sun

shade will also be opened together with

the moonroof. For Outback, the moonroof

will stop at a position approximately 0.8 in

(2 cm) away from the fully opened posi-

tion. Press the switch again to open the

moonroof completely.

Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”

Keys and doors/Moonroof

– CONTINUED –

2-47

Keys and doors/Moonroof

switch to close the moonroof.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

way position while opening or closing it,

momentarily press the front side or rear

side of the switch.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,

wipe away water on the roof prior to

opening the moonroof to prevent drops

of water from falling into the passenger

compartment.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

! Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully open

position and stops there. The anti-entrap-

ment function may also be activated by a

strong shock on the moonroof even when

there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts

of your body.

& Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

2-48

Ignition switch (models without push-

button start system)......................................... 3-3

LOCK.................................................................. 3-3

ACC.................................................................... 3-4

ON ...................................................................... 3-4

START ................................................................ 3-4

Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4

Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-4

Push-button ignition switch (models with

push-button start system) ............................... 3-5

Safety precautions .............................................. 3-5

Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-5

Switching power ................................................. 3-6

When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-7

Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-7

Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-7

Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-7

Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle

movement upon turning on the ignition

switch............................................................... 3-8

Speedometer....................................................... 3-8

Odometer............................................................ 3-8

Double trip meter ................................................ 3-9

Tachometer ......................................................... 3-9

Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10

Temperature gauge ............................................ 3-11

ECO gauge ........................................................ 3-11

Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-12

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-12

SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-14

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators ........................................................ 3-14

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator light .................................................. 3-15

Charge warning light.......................................... 3-15

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-16

Engine low oil level warning indicator ................ 3-16

AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-16

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S. spec.

models) ........................................................... 3-17

ABS warning light.............................................. 3-18

Brake system warning light................................ 3-19

Hill Holder indicator light ................................... 3-21

Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-21

Door open indicator ........................................... 3-21

Windshield washer fluid warning indicator.......... 3-21

All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models)........ 3-21

Power steering warning light.............................. 3-22

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle

Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-22

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-23

Warning chimes and warning indicator of the

keyless access with push-button start system (if

equipped) ........................................................ 3-24

Security indicator light....................................... 3-28

Select lever/gear position indicator..................... 3-29

Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-29

High beam indicator light ................................... 3-29

Cruise control indicator ..................................... 3-29

Cruise control set indicator................................ 3-29

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light

(models with HID headlights)............................ 3-29

Instruments and controls

Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-30

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-30

X-mode indicator (if equipped) ............................ 3-30

Hill descent control indicator (if equipped) .......... 3-30

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator

(models with EyeSight system) ......................... 3-30

SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection warning

indicator (if equipped)/SUBARU Rear Vehicle

Detection OFF indicator (if equipped) ................ 3-30

Icy road surface warning .................................... 3-30

Information display ............................................ 3-31

Clock ................................................................. 3-31

Climate control mode indicators ......................... 3-32

Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-32

Multi information display ................................... 3-33

Basic operation .................................................. 3-33

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen ............... 3-34

Warning screen .................................................. 3-34

Basic screens .................................................... 3-35

Telltale screen.................................................... 3-37

Menu screens .................................................... 3-37

Light control switch ........................................... 3-42

Headlights.......................................................... 3-42

High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-44

Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-44

Daytime running light system ............................. 3-45

Headlight beam leveler (models with HID

headlights) ...................................................... 3-45

Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-46

One-touch lane changer..................................... 3-46

Illumination brightness control......................... 3-46

Auto dimmer cancel function ............................. 3-47

Front fog light switch (if equipped).................. 3-47

Steering responsive fog lights system (models

with EyeSight system) ..................................... 3-47

Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-49

Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-50

Rear window wiper and washer switch

(Outback) ........................................................ 3-51

Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-52

Mirrors ................................................................ 3-54

Inside mirror (without auto-dimming function) (if

equipped) ........................................................ 3-54

Auto-dimming mirror with HomeLink

(if

equipped) ........................................................ 3-54

Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink

(if

equipped) ........................................................ 3-60

Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-66

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-66

Horn.................................................................... 3-67

Ignition switch (models with-

out push-button start sys-

tem)

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is

being driven or towed because

that will lock the steering wheel,

preventing steering control. And

when the engine is turned off, it

takes a much greater effort than

usual to steer.

. Before leav ing the veh icle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure

to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child or

others. Children could operate

the power windows, the moon-

roof or other controls or even

make the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you are driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a

keyholder or to a large bunch of

other keys, centrifugal force may act

on it as the vehicle moves, resulting

in unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

& LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position. The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you remove the

key.

If turning the key is difficult, turn the

steering wheel slightly to the right and left

as you turn the key.

The key can be turned from “ACC” to

“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)

– CONTINUED –

3-3

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)

while turning it (all models) and the select

lever is in the “P” position (CVT models).

& ACC

In this position the electrical accessories

(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can

be used.

& ON

This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.

& START

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has

started), the key automatically returns to

the “ON” position.

If the engine does not start with your

registered key, pull out the key once (at

this time, the security indicator light will

blink), reinsert the key in the ignition

switch and then try to start the engine

again.

NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-

ing cases:

. The key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.

. The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transponder.

. The key is near or touching another

transmitter.

& Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door opens and the key is in the

“LOCK” or “ACC” positions. The chime

stops when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position or the key is removed

from the ignition switch.

& Ignition switch light

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when driver’s door is opened or

when the driver’s door is unlocked using

the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for approxi-

mately 30 seconds and gradually turns off

under the following conditions.

. When the driver’s door is closed

. When the doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter

The light gradually turns off under the

following conditions.

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position

. When the doors are locked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter

3-4

Push-button ignition switch

(models with push-button

start system)

& Safety precautions

Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-10.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

Legacy

1) Antenna

2) Operating range

Outback

1) Antenna

2) Operating range

NOTE

. If the access key is not detected

within the operating range of the an-

tennas inside the vehicle, the push-

button ignition switch and the engine

start cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key is outside

the vehicle, if it is placed too close to

the glass, it may be possible to switch

the power or to start the engine.

. Do not leave the access key in the

following places. It may become im-

possible to operate the push-button

ignition switch and the engine start.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– On the rear shelf (Legacy)

– Inside the trunk (Legacy)

– At the corner of the cargo area

(Outback)

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch or starting the engine,

if the access key battery is discharged,

perform the procedure described in

“Access key – if access key does not

operate properly” F9-18. In such a

case, replace the battery immediately.

Refer to “Replacing battery of access

key” F11-49.

Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)

– CONTINUED –

3-5

Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)

& Switching power

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the

push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake pedal. Every

time the button is pressed, the power is

switched in th e seque nce of “OFF”,

“ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When the engine

is stopped and the push-button ignition

switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation

indicator on the push-button ignition

switch illuminates in orange.

Power

status

Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off

Power is turned

off.

ACC Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. When the push-button ignition

switch is left in “ON” or “ACC”

for a long time, it may result in

vehicle battery discharge.

. Do not spill drinks or other

liquids on the push-button igni-

tion switch. It may cause a mal-

function.

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand soiled

with oil or other contaminants. It

may cause a malfunction.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not illuminate even when

the instrument panel illumination

is turned on, have the vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot

sun for a long time, the surface of

the push-button ignition switch

may get hot. Be careful not to

burn yourself.

NOTE

. The push-button ignition switch can-

not be switched to “OFF” when the

select lever is in a position other than

“P”.

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch, firmly press it all the

way.

. If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

. If the indicator light on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in green

when the push-button ignition switch is

pressed, steering is locked. When this

occurs, press the push-button ignition

switch while turning the steering wheel

3-6

left and right.

! Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

When the push-button ignition switch is

left in the “ACC” or “ON” position for

approximately 1 hour, the pus h-button

ignition switch will be automatically

switched to “OFF” to prevent the battery

from going dead. This function is activated

when the select lever is in the “P” position.

& When access key does not

operate properly

Refer to “Access key – if access key does

not operate properly” F9-18.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions.

The hazard warning flasher works with the

ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

press the hazard warning button on the

instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,

press the button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

NOTE

Liquid crystal displays are used in

some of the meters and gauges in the

combination meter. You will find their

indications hard to see if you wear

polarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-

tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the various parts of the

combination meter are illuminated in the

following sequence.

1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter

needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal

display illuminate.

2. The meter and gauge needles sweep

one time.

3. Dials and indicators in meters and

gauges light up.

4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher

– CONTINUED –

3-7

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

NOTE

This sequence of operations may not

take place if you quickly turn the

ignition switch to start the engine. This

is not a malfunction.

& Canceling the function for

meter/gauge needle move-

ment upon turning on the

ignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate the

movement of the met er need les and

gauge needles that takes place when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. For details, perform the proce-

dures described in “Gauge Initial Move-

ment” F3-40.

& Speedometer

The speedome ter shows the vehicle

speed.

& Odometer

1) U.S. spec. models

2) Except U.S. spec. models

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

Trip reset switch

If you press the trip reset switch when the

ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or

“ACC” position, the odometer/trip meter

will light up. If you do not press the trip

reset switch within 10 seconds of illumina-

tion of the odometer/trip meter, the od-

ometer/trip meter will turn off.

Also, if you open and close the driver’s

door within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will turn off.

3-8

& Double trip meter

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

Trip reset switch

If you press the trip reset switch when the

ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or

“ACC” position, the odometer/trip meter

will light up. It is possible to switch

between the A trip meter and B trip meter

indications while the odometer/trip meter

is lit up. If you do not press the trip reset

switch within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will turn off.

Also, if you open and close the driver’s

door within 10 seconds of illumination of

the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip

meter will turn off.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following illustration by pressing the

trip reset switch.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the trip

reset switch and keep the switch pressed

for more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

If the connection between the combina-

tion meter and battery is broken for any

reason such as vehicle maintenance or

fuse replacement, the data recorded on

the trip meter will be lost.

& Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

– CONTINUED –

3-9

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

NOTE

To protect the engine while the select

lever is in the “P” or “N” position (for

CVT models) or the shift lever is in the

neutral position (for MT models), the

engine is controlled so that the engine

speed may not become too high even if

the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.

& Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge

shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains

fuel.

The gauge may move slightly during

braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel

level movement in the tank.

If you press the trip reset switch while the

ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or

“ACC” position, the fuel gauge’s dial will

light up and the needle will indicate the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating

the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,

you (a) do not press the trip reset switch

for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the

driver’s door, the fuel gauge needle will

drop to the “E” position and the dial and

needle will turn off.

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge.

This indicates that the fuel filler door

(lid) is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

3-10

& Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will va ry in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range.

Engi ne operation is optimum with the

engine coolant at this temperature range

and high revving operation when the

engine is not warmed up enough should

be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-

13.

& ECO gauge

1) U.S. spec. models

2) Except U.S. spec. models

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the average rate of fuel con-

sumption since the trip meter was last

reset and the current rate of fuel con-

sumption.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel

efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed unit

Needle position

“+” side “-” side

MPG Better Poorer

l/100km Poorer

Better

NOTE

. T he ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication.

. After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is not

shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).

Until that time, the ECO gauge does not

operate.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

3-11

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned

to the “ON” position. This permits check-

ing the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. For

the system check, the following lights

illuminate and turn off after several sec-

onds or after the engine has started:

: Seatbelt warning light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the driver fastens the

seatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning

light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the front seat passenger

fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

ON /

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

(CVT models)

/ : ABS warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Hill Holder indicator light

: All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT

models)

: Power steering warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light

(U.S. spec. models)

: Low fuel warning light

: Hill descent co ntrol indicator (if

equipped)

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat, as required by current

safety standards.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by the warning lights in the locations

indicated in the following illustration and a

chime.

Driver’s warning light

3-12

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-

ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will

also sound simultaneously.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

– At speeds lower than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

– At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation that foll ows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch . When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no pa ssenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the device from

functioning correctly or cause the device

to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

“Manual seat” F1-4 (models equipped

with manual seats only).

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),

take the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-13

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

If still the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

& SRS airbag system

warning light

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

Immediately take your vehi cle to

your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very

minor collision or not inflate in a

severe collision), which may in-

crease the risk of injury.

For details about the components mon-

itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS

airbag system monitors” F1-68.

& Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indica-

tors

NOTE

For details about the operating condi-

tions of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer

to “SRS seat cushion airbag operation”

F1-61.

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located as shown in the

illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

3-14

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors remain illumi nated or off simul ta-

neously even after the system check

period, the system is malfunctioning.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately for an inspection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator l ight illumi-

nates while you are driving, have

your vehicle checked/repaired by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is a pro blem or potential

problem somewhere in the emission con-

trol system.

! If the light illuminates constantly

If the light illuminates constantly while

driving or does not turn off after the engine

starts, an emission control system mal-

function has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light coming on

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering

with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the

cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator light

turn off immediately. It may take several

driving trips. If the light does not turn off,

take your vehicle to your authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should conform

to the following instructions.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

. Stop towing a trailer as soon as

possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light may stop blinking

and illuminate steadily after several driv-

ing trips. You should have your vehicle

checked by an authorized SUBARU deal-

er immediately.

& Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-15

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good

condition but the light remains illuminated,

contact your nearest SUBA RU deale r

immediately.

& Oil pressure warning

light

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light on. This

may cause serious engine damage.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is

at the proper level but the light remains

illuminated, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Engine low oil level

warning indicator

This indicator appears when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.

If the engine low oil level warning indicator

appears while driving, park the vehicle at a

safe and level location, and then check

the engine oil level. When the engine oil

level is not within the normal range, refill

with engine oil. Refer to “Engine oil” F11-

11.

If the warning indicator does not disappear

after refilling with engine oil or the warning

indicator appears even though the engine

oil level is within the normal range, have

the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

. After replacing or adding the engine

oil, if the engine oil level is within the

normal range when restarting the en-

gine on a level surface, the warning

indicator will be off.

. The warning indicator may appear

temporarily in the following conditions

because a low oil level may be detected

as a result of significant oil movement

in the engine.

– when the vehicle is considerably

inclined on an uphill or steep slope

– when the vehicle has continu-

ously accelerated and decelerated

– when the vehicle is continuously

turned

– when the vehicle is driven on a

road that alternates continuously

between uphill and downhill

& AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the transmis-

sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

! Transmission control system warn-

ing

If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes

after the engine has started, it may

indicate that the transmission control

system is not working properly. Contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer for service

immediately.

3-16

& Low tire pressure

warning light (U.S. spec.

models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will go out.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

subst itute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibili ty to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfun ction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of re-

placement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from

functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tires or wh eels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate stea-

dily after blinking for approximately one

minute, have the system inspected by

your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned ON or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-17

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshol d, the low tire

pressure warning light should turn

off a few minutes later. Therefore, be

sure to install the specified size for

the front and rear tires.

& ABS warning light

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS repaired at the first

available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

– The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position,

but it does not turn off even

after starting the vehicle.

– The warning light illuminates

during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and

brake system warning light is

off), the ABS function shuts

down; however, the conventional

brake system continues to oper-

ate normally.

The ABS warning light illuminates to-

gether with the brake system warning light

if the EBD system malfunctions. For

further details of the EBD system mal-

function warning, refer to “Brake system

warning light” F3-19.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following conditions,

the ABS may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been started,

but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

3-18

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will turn off.

& Brake system

warning light

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

. If the brake system warning light

flashes, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunc-

tioning. Immediately stop your

vehicle in a safe location, use

tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving

and contact your SUBARU deal-

er. For details, refer to “Electro-

nic parking brake” F7-42.

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

electronic parking brake applied, the

brake system warning light remains

illuminated for approximately 30 sec-

onds and then turns off.

. When the electronic parking brake

switch is pressed to apply the electro-

nic parking brake while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion, the brake system warning light

illuminates, remains illuminated for

approximately 30 seconds and then

turns off.

. Even if the brake system warning

light flashes, if the warning light beha-

vior is as described in the following

examples, the electronic parking brake

system is not malfunctioning.

– The warning light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is ap-

plied or released.

– The warning light turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position again.

. When you start the engine while the

electronic parking brake is being either

applied or released, the brake system

may determine that an abnormality has

occurred and the brake system warn-

ing light may illuminate. If the warning

light illuminates, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF ” position

and restart the engine. When you then

operate the electronic parking brake

again, the warning light will turn off and

the system will recover to the normal

state. If the warning light still does not

turn off, contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

. The brake system warning light may

flash immediately after the engine is

started. However, it is not malfunction-

ing if the warning light turns off after

the electronic parking brake is re-

leased.

. The brake system warning light may

flash after the electronic parking brake

is frequently applied and released.

However, the electronic parking brake

system is not malfunctioning if the light

turns off for a short period of time.

This light has the following functions:

! Parking brake warning

The light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. It turns off when the

parking brake is released.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-19

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

! Brake fluid level warning

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN ” level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake released.

If the light should illuminate while driving

(with the parking brake released and with

the ignition switch positioned in “ON”), it

could be an indication of leaking of brake

fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs,

immediately stop the vehicle at the near-

est safe place and check the brake fluid

level. If the fluid level is below the “MIN”

mark in the reservoir, do not drive the

vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. For

details, refer to “Towing” F9-13.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning li ght also

illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the

EBD system. In that event, it illuminates

together with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate si multaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights turn off, the EBD system

may be malfunctioning.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights illuminate again

and remain illuminated after the engine

has been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”

F11-19.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. For

details, refer to “Towing” F9-13.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

The brake system warning light flashes

when the electronic parking brake system

is malfunctioning. If the warning light

flashes, promptly park in a safe location

as soon as possible and contact your

SUBARU dealer.

The brake system warning light remains

illuminated when the parking brake cannot

be released even if the parking brake

switch is pulled. For details, refer to

“Electronic parking brake” F7-42.

! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-

ing

The brake system warning light flashes for

10 seconds and a chirp sound will be

heard if the parking brake switch i s

operated when the parking brake cannot

be applied.

! Frequent operation warning

The brake system warning light flashes for

20 seconds and a chirp sound will be

heard if the parking brake switch i s

operated too frequently. In this case, the

operation of the parking brake switch is

restricted to protect the electronic parking

brake system.

3-20

NOTE

Wait until the warning light turns off.

& Hill Holder indicator

light

WARNING

If the Hill Holder indicator light does

not illuminate even when the Hill

Holder switch is pressed to activate

the Hill Holder function, the electro-

nic parking brake system may be

malfunctioning. Immediately stop

the vehicle in a safe location and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

The light illuminates when the Hill Holder

switch is pressed to activate the Hill

Holder function. For details about the Hill

Holder function, “Hill Holder function” F7-

44.

& Low fuel warning

light

The low fuel warning light illuminates

when the tank is nearly empty approxi-

mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp

gal). It only operates when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

NOTE

This light does not turn off unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US

gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Door open indicator

When any of the doors, the rear gate

(Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not

fully closed , the door ope n indicator

appears. This function is effective even if

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”

or “ACC” position (all models) or the key is

removed from the ignition switch (models

without “keyless access with push-button

start system”).

The open door is indicated by the corre-

sponding part of the door open indicator.

Always make sure this indicator does not

appear before you start to drive.

& Windshield washer

fluid warning indicator

This indicator appears when the fluid level

in the windshield washer fluid tank de-

creases to the lower limit (approximately

0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).

& All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light (CVT models)

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe place then check whether

all four tires are the same diameter

and whether any of the tires has a

puncture or has lost air pressure for

some other reason.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, the

AWD warning light may flash. Use of

the temporary spare tire should there-

fore be restricted to the minimum time

necessary. Replace the temporary

spare tire with a conventional tire as

soon as possible.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-21

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

with tires of different diameters fitted on its

wheels or with the air pressure exces-

sively low in any of its tires.

& Power steering warn-

ing light

While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has

been detected in the electric power steer-

ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU deale r and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period

of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too fre-

quently, that may result in a malfunc-

tion of the power steering control

system.

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol operation indicator

light

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem provides its ABS control

through the electrical circuit of the

ABS. A cc ordingly, if the A BS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

becomes inoperative, causing the

warning light to illuminate. Although

both the Vehicle Dynamics Control

and ABS are inoperative in this

case, the ordinary functions of the

brake system are still available. You

will be safe while driving in this

condition, but drive carefully and

have your vehicle checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

3-22

NOTE

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only illumi-

nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System) r emains fully opera-

tional.

. The warning light illuminates when

the electronic control system of the

ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

malfunctions.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following examples,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately and remains off.

. The warning light illuminates after

the engine has started and turns off

while the vehicle is subsequently being

driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but turns off immediately and

remains off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light

The indicator light flashes during activa-

tion of the skid suppression function and

during activation of the traction control

function.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a short period of time after the engine

has been started, especially in cold

weather. This does not indicate the

existence of a problem. The light

should turn off as soon as the engine

has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after

the lapse of several minutes (the engine

has warmed up) after the engine has

started.

& Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator

light

The light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not turn off even after a

period of approximately 2 seconds after

the ignition switch has been turned to the

“ON” position.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-23

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Warning chimes and warning

indicator of the keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system (if equipped)

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and the

access key warning indicator appears on

the combination meter in order to minimize

improper operations and help protect your

vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning indicator appears, take the

appropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indi-

cator on the push-button ignition

switch is flashing in green when

starting the engine. This indicates

the status that the steering wheel is

not released and could result in an

accident involving serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in green, if the operation

indicator is still flashing in green,

there could be a steering lock

malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

. Even when the access key is within

the operating ranges inside the vehicle,

the access key warning for engine start

may be provided depending on the

status of the access key and the

environmental conditions.

. When the access key is taken out of

the vehicle through an open window,

the access key takeout warning or

passenger access key takeout warning

will not be provided.

! List of warnings

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warn-

ing indicator does not appear, take

the appropriate action.

3-24

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding,

ding ...

(intermittent)

——

The driver’s door was opened while the

push-button ignition switch is “ACC” and the

select lever is in the “P” position.

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.

*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch

the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch was

switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door is

open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Lockout warning:

An attempt was made to lock all doors while

the access key is left inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key from the vehicle,

and lock the doors.

*The doors cannot be locked while the

access key is inside the vehicle.

*A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors

will be unlocked.

—

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Access key lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while the

push-button ignition switch is “OFF” and the

access key is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key from the vehicle,

and lock the doors.

*If the access key is inside the vehicle, the

doors cannot be locked.

—

Beep, beep,

beep, beep,

beep

(5 times)

—

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the

ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and

one of the doors including the rear gate is

opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them.

*If one of the doors including the rear gate is

opened, the doors cannot be locked.

Ding

Long beep (60

seconds max.)

—

Power warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

carrying the access key, the push-button

ignition switch is in a position other than

“OFF” and the select lever is in the “P”

position.

Return the access key inside the vehicle, or

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

*If the push-button ignition switch is not

switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be

locked.

Ding,

ding ...

(7 seconds)

——

Access key warning:

The vehicle was driven while the access key

is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key, and drive the vehicle.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-25

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding ——

Access key warning for engine start:

The push-button ignition switch was pressed

while the access key is not inside the

vehicle.

Carry the access key, and press the push-

button ignition switch.

Ding

Beep, beep,

beep (3 times)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exited the vehicle with the access

key and closed the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is in

the “P” position.

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding

Beep, beep,

beep (3 times)

—

Passenger access key takeout warning:

A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with

the access key and closed a door other than

the driver’s door while the push-button

ignition switch is in a position other than

“OFF”.

Return the access key to inside the vehicle,

or switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

Long beep

(continuous)

Long beep

(continuous)

—

The driver exited the vehicle with the access

key and closed the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Long beep

(continuous)

——

Select lever position warning:

The driver’s door was opened while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Ding ——The battery of the access key is low. Replace the battery of the access key.

Ding —

Flashes in green

(15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning:

The engine start procedure was performed,

but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and left

lightly, depress the brake pedal and press

the push-button ignition switch.

3-26

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding — Flashes in orange

System malfunction warning:

A malfunction was detected in the power

system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and

have the vehicle inspected.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-27

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation

of the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm system ” F2-

27.

! Immobilizer system

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the push-button igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.

. Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the following

conditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is in

the “ON” or “ACC” position.

– The access key is outside the

vehicle.

– The engine is not running.

– In the event that an unauthorized

key is used (for example, the key is

unregistered or the ID code does not

match), the power is not switched to

“ON” and the security indicator light

continues blinking.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

. Approximately 60 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned from the “ON”

position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

. Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the

above conditions, it may indicate that

immobilizer system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used, the security indicator light illumi-

nates. For details about the immobilizer

system, refer to “Immobilizer” F2-4.

NOTE

. The security indicator light remains

off in the following conditions. It means

that the matching of the ID code is

completed and the immobilizer system

is deactivated, and it does not indicate

a malfunction.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– while the engine is running

– the push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the driver ’s

door has not been opened or closed

Models witho ut “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– while the engine is running

– for approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned

from the “ON” position to the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position

– when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such

as the security indicator light flashes

irregularly, it will not affect the func-

tionality of the immobilizer system.

3-28

& Select lever/gear position in-

dicator

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the

shift lever (MT models) or select lever

(CVT models).

! Upshift/downshift indicator (CVT

models)

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator (which shows the

current gear selection) and the upshift/

downshift indicator light up. Refer to

“Selection of manual mode” F7-29.

! Gear position indicator setting (MT

models)

The gear position indicator light can be

activated or deactivated. For details about

the setting p rocedur e, refer to “Gear

Position Indicator Settings (MT models)”

F3-40.

& Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-39.

& High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

operating the headlight flasher.

& Cruise control indica-

tor

This indicator appears when the cruise

control main button is pressed to activate

the cruise control function. For details,

refer to “To set cruise control” F7-49.

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illumi-

nates, the cruise control indicator

flashes at the same time. At this

time, do not drive at high speed and

have your vehicle inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

& Cruise control set in-

dicator

This indicator appears when vehicle

speed has been set to use the cruise

control function.

& Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light (models with HID

headlights)

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

If this light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off approximately 3 seconds after

turning the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, have your vehicle inspected at

your SUBARU dealer.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

– CONTINUED –

3-29

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights

& Headlight indicator

light

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

. when the light switch is turned to the

“

” or “ ” position

. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically

& Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

& X-mode indicator (if

equipped)

This indicator appears while the X-mode is

activated. It will disappear when the X-

mode is deactivated.

& Hill descent control

indicator (if equipped)

This indicator appears whil e the hill

descent control function is in standby. It

will flash while the hill descent control

function is operating. It will disappear

when the hill descent control function is

not available.

& Steering responsive

fog lights OFF indicator

(models with EyeSight

system)

This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deacti-

vated. This indicator disappears when the

system is activated.

For details about the steering responsive

fog lights system, refer to “Steering

responsive fog lights system (models with

EyeSight system)” F3-47.

& SUBARU Rear Vehicle

Detection warning indi-

cator (if equipped)/

SUBARU Rear Vehicle

Detection OFF indicator

(if equipped)

! SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection

warning indicator

This warning indicator appears when the

SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

is malfunctioning. When this indicator

appears, have your vehicle inspected by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

! SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection

OFF indicator

The indicator appears when the SRVD

OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the

SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD).

In this case “SRVD Off” will be shown on

the multi information display. For details,

refer to “SRVD OFF switch” F7-58.

& Icy road surface warn-

ing

When the outside temperature is 378F

(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning

will illuminate to inform the driver that the

road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. Therefore, the tem-

perature indication may differ from the

actual outside air temperature.

. The icy road surface warning screen

should be treated only as a guide. Be

sure to check the condition of the road

surface before driving.

. Once the icy road surface warning

screen appears, it will not disappear

unless the outside temp erature has

increased to 418F(58C) or higher.

3-30

Information display

1) Clock

2) Climate control mode indicators

3) Outside temperature indicator

With the ignition switch in the “ ON”

position, the following items are shown

on the information display.

. Clock

. Climate control mode indicators

. Outside temperature indicator

& Clock

NOTE

Your SUBARU dealer can change the

settings of activating/deactivating the

automatic adjustment of the clock by

the GPS (Global Positioning System)

(for models with the genuine SUBARU

navigation system). While the auto-

matic adjustment is activated, you

cannot adjust the time shown on the

clock manually. If you press the “+”

button or “-” button, the “---” indication

will be displayed to inform you that you

cannot adjust it manually. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details.

The clock shows the time whi le the

ignition switch is in the “ACC ” or “ON”

position.

To adjust the time shown by the clock,

press the “+” button or the “−” button. If

you press the “+” button, the indicated

time will change in one-minute incre-

ments. If you press the “−” button, the

indicated time will change in one-minute

decrements. If you keep the button

pressed, the rate at which the indicated

time changes will speed up.

Instruments and controls/Information display

– CONTINUED –

3-31

Instruments and controls/Information display

& Climate control mode indica-

tors

Models with manual climate control sys-

tem

1) Maximum air conditioner ON indicator

2) Air conditioner ON indicator

3) Airflow mode indicator

4) Air inlet selection ON indicator

Models with automatic climate control

system

1) Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)

2) Set temperature indicator (front passen-

ger’s side)

3) Maximum air conditioner ON indicator

4) Air conditioner ON indicator

5) FULL AUTO indicator

6) Airflow mode indicator

7) Fan speed indicator

& Outside temperature indica-

tor

1) U.S. spec. models

2) Except U.S. spec. models

The outside temperature indicator shows

the outside temperature in a range from

−22 to 1228F(−30 to 508C).

The indicator can give a false reading

under any of the following conditions:

. When there is too much sun.

. During idli ng; while ru nning at low

speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine

is restarted immediately following a shut-

down.

. When the actual outside temperature

falls outside the specified indicator range.

3-32

Multi information display

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

multi information display while the

vehicle is in motion. When operation

of the multi information display

interferes with your ability to con-

centrate on driving, stop the vehicle

before performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentrate on

the display while driving. Doing so

may cause you to look away from

the road and could result in an

accident.

Various information will be shown on the

multi information display. Also, a warning

message will appear on the display if a

malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,

several settings for the displayed content

can be performed.

Multi information display

1) ECO gauge (refer to “ECO gauge” F3-

11.)

2) Basic screen/Warning screen (refer to

“Basic screens” F3-35 and “Warning

screen” F3-34.)

3) Cruise control information display

4) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer

to “Select lever/gear position indicator”

F3-29.)

5) Telltale screen (refer to “Telltale screen”

F3-37.)

6) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-8.)/

double trip meter (refer to “Double trip

meter” F3-9.)

Control switch

1) Up (select)

2) Set (enter)

3) Down (select)

& Basic operation

By operating “

” or “ ” of the control

switch, the screens and selection items

can be switched. When the “

/SET”

switch is pulled toward you, the item can

be selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, such

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-33

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. If such a screen is

displayed, take proper action according to

the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the “

” information reminder is shown on

the display, it may be possible to display

the warning screen again. To recall the

message marked with “

” on the display,

pull the “

/SET” switch on the steering

wheel toward you.

& Welcome screen and Good-

bye screen

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed after unlock ing the door, the

welcome screen will appear on the multi

information display for approximately 20

seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the multi informa-

tion display gradually turns off (Good-bye

screen).

NOTE

. The basic screen will be shown

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position while the welcome

screen is displayed.

. Once the welcome screen appears,

it takes a certain period of time to

display it again.

. If the ignition switch is operated

after unlocking the driver’s door, the

welcome screen will not appear even

when the driver’s door is opened and

closed.

. The welcome screen will disappear

when you lock the driver’s door by

using the remote keyless entry system

(all models) or the keyless access

function (if equipped) while the wel-

come screen is displayed.

. If any of the doors (including the

rear gate) is opened while the welcome

screen is display ed, the door ajar

warning will appear.

. The welcome screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome

Screen” F3-40.

. The Good-bye screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “Good-

bye Screen” F3-40.

& Warning screen

Example of warning

If there is a warning message o r a

maintenance notification, it will appear for

approximately 5 seconds. Take the appro-

priate actions based on the messages

indicated.

3-34

& Basic screens

By operating the “

” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the

screen that is always displayed.

Default screen:

Average fuel consumption screen:

: Fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of fuel

consumption since the trip meter was last

reset.

Current fuel consumption screen:

: Fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the rate of fuel con-

sumption at the present moment.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-35

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

Driving information screen:

: Journey time

: Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON” position) and journey

distance (the distance that has been driven

since the ignition switch was turned to the

“ON” position).

Digital speed screen:

This screen displays the current vehicle

speed.

Multi Media Link screen (while not selecting

the destination) (models with genuine

SUBARU navigation system):

Multi Media Link screen (while selecting the

destination) (models with genuine SUBARU

navigation system):

Menu screen entering screen:

While this screen is selected, pull and hold the

“

/SET” switch to enter the menu screen.

3-36

& Telltale screen

1) Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs,

the following telltales will be displayed on

the telltale screen.

Mark Name Page

Door open indicator 3-21

Engine low oil level

warning indicator

3-16

SUBARU Rear Vehicle

Detection warning indi-

cator (if equipped)/

SUBARU Rear Vehicle

Detection OFF indicator

(if equipped)

3-30

Steering responsive fog

lights OFF indicator (if

equipped)

3-30

Windshield washer fluid

warning indicator

3-21

Hill descent control in-

dicator (if equipped)

3-30

Icy road surface warn-

ing screen

3-30

& Menu screens

Pull and hold the “

/SET” switch to enter

the menu screens when all of the following

conditions are satisfied.

. The vehicle has been completely

stopped.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

. The menu screen entering screen is

selected.

By operating the “

” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can select the menu.

Pull the “

/SET” switch to enter the

selected menu.

NOTE

If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the

system will return to the previous

screen.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-37

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

The menu list is as follows.

First menu

Second menu

Third menu Settings

Screen Settings Welcome Screen

—

. ON (with sound)

. ON (without sound)

. OFF

Good-bye Screen

—

ON/OFF

Gauge Initial Movement

—

ON/OFF

Gear Position Indicator Settings

(MT models)

—

ON/OFF

Units

—

. Km, km/h, Liter

. miles, MPH, Gallon

Languages

—

. English

. Spanish

. French

. Japanese

Combination Meter Illumination (if

equipped)

Meter Ring Illumination

—

ON/OFF

EyeSight (models with EyeSight

system)

Warning Volume

—

Max/Mid/Min

Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

—

ON/OFF

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor

Function

—

ON/OFF

Vehicle Icon

—

ON/OFF

SRVD (if equipped) Warning Volume

—

Max/Mid/Min/OFF

3-38

First menu

Second menu

Third menu Settings

Vehicle Setting Keyless Entry System

Audible Signal

ON/OFF

Hazard Warning Flasher

ON/OFF

Driver Door Unlock

Driver Door Only/All

Rear Gate Unlock

*1 *2

Rear Gate/All

Defogger

—

15 minutes/Continuous

Interior Light

—

10 seconds – 30 seconds, OFF

Auto Light Sensor

—

Max/Mid/Low/Min

Welcome Lighting

Approaching Time Set

30 seconds – 90 seconds, OFF

Leaving Time Set

30 seconds – 90 seconds, OFF

Default Settings OK To Reset?

—

Yes/No

: Keyless access with push-button start system only.

: Outback only.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

– CONTINUED –

3-39

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

! Screen Settings

After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,

select one of the following menus.

! Welcome Screen

The welcome screen can be activated or

deactivated. Select “On (with Sound)” to

activate the screen and sound. Select “On

(without Sound)” to activate the screen

and deactivate the sound. Select “Off” to

deactivate the screen.

! Good-bye Screen

The Good-bye screen can be activated or

deactivated. Select “On” to activate the

screen. Select “Off” to deactivate the

screen.

! Gauge Initial Movement

The movement of the meter needles and

gauge needles that occurs when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position can be activated or deactivated.

Select “On” to activate. Select “Off” to

deactivate.

! Gear Position Indicator Settings

(MT models)

The gear position indicator light can be

activated or deactivated. Select “On” to

activate. Select “Off” to deactivate.

! Units

You can select the displayed units of the

distance, vehicle sp eed and volume.

Operate the “

” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel to display the preferred

units. Then pull the “

/SET” switch to

select the displayed units.

! Languages

Operate the “

” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel to display the preferred

language. Then pull the “

/SET” switch to

select the displayed language.

! Combination Meter Illumination (if

equipped)

After entering t he “Combination Meter

Illumination” menu, select the following

menu.

! Meter Ring Illumination

The illumination of the combination meter

rings can be activated or deactivated.

Select “On” to activate the illumination.

Select “Off” to deactivate the illumination.

! EyeSight (models with EyeSight

system)

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

After entering the “ EyeSight” menu, select

one of the following menus.

! Warning Volume

The volume of the warning buzzer that

sounds when the EyeSight system is in

use can be set in 3 stages (“Max”, “Mid”

and “Min”).

! Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

When adaptive cruise control is used, the

buzzer that sounds under any of the

following conditions can be activated or

deactivated.

. A vehicle is detected in front

. Detection is not possible

Select “On” to activate the buzzer. Select

“Off” to deactivate the buzzer.

! Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor

Function

When adaptive cruise control is used, the

buzzer that sounds if a vehicle in front has

started can be activated or deactivated.

Select “On” to activate the buzzer. Select

“Off” to deactivate the buzzer.

! Vehicle Icon

The vehicle icon indication can be acti-

vated or deactivated. Select “On ” to

activate. Select “Off” to deactivate.

3-40

! SRVD (Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-

tion) (if equipped)

After entering the “SRVD” menu, select

the “Warning Volume” menu. You can set

the volume of the warning buzzer that

sounds when the SRVD is in use. You can

select “Max”, “Mid”, “Min” or “Off”.

! Vehicle Setting

After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu,

select one of the following menus.

! Keyless Entry System

After entering the “Keyless Entry System ”

menu, select one of the following menus.

. Audible Signal (models with “key-

less access with push -button st art

system”):

The audible signal can be activated or

deactivated. Select “On” to activate. Se-

lect “Off” to deactivate.

. Hazard Warning Flasher (all mod-

els):

The hazard warning flasher operation can

be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to

activate. Select “Off” to deactivate.

. Driver Door Unlock (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”):

The door unlock selection function for the

driver’s door can be activated or deacti-

vated. Select “On” to activate. Select “Off”

to deactivate.

. Rear Gate Unlock (Outback with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”):

The door unlock selection function of the

rear gate unlock button of the key can be

changed. Select “All” to unlock all doors

and the rear gate. Select “Rear Gate” to

unlock only the rear gate.

! Defogger

The defogger and deicer system can be

set for the continuous operation mode or

automatic shut-off mode. Select “Contin-

uous” to select the continuous operation

mode. Select “15 minutes” to select the

automatic shut-off mode.

! Interior Light

The setting for the period of time in which

the interior lights remain on (OFF delay

timer) after closing the doors and/or the

rear gate can be set or customized. Select

the preferred seconds to customize the

operation period. Select “ Off” to deactivate

the OFF delay timer.

! Auto Light Sensor

The operational sensitivity of the auto on/

off headlights can be set. You can select

“Max”, “Mid”, “Low” or “Min”.

! Welcome Lighting

After entering the “Welcome L ighting”

menu, select either of the following me-

nus.

! Approaching Time Set

The setting for the period of time in which

the low beam headlights remain on when

approaching the vehicle can be set or

customized. Select the preferred seconds

to customize the operation period. Select

“Off” to deactivate the welcome lighting

function when approaching.

! Leaving Time Set

The setting for the period of time in which

the low beam headlights remain on when

exiting the vehicle can be set or custo-

mized. Select the preferred seconds to

customize the operation period. Select

“Off” to deactivate the welcome lighting

function when exiting.

! Default Settings

Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to

restore customized settings to the factory

default settings. Select “No” to return to

the previous screen without restoring to

the factory default settings.

Instruments and controls/Multi information display

3-41

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

Light control switch

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the engine is not

running can cause the battery to

discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the light control switch

is turned to the off position. If the

vehicle is left unattended for a

long time with the light control

switch set to a position other

than the off position, the battery

may be discharged.

Models with “keyless acc ess w ith

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC ”

or “ON” position.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be oper-

ated (except auto on/off headlights),

even under the following conditions.

. when the key is not inserted into the

ignition switch (models without “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

. when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off (models with “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

If the driver’s door is opened while the

headlights are illuminated under such

conditions, a chirp sound will inform

the driver that the lights are illumi-

nated.

& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

“

” position

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

parking lights, front side marker lights, rear

side marker lights, tail lights and license

plate lights are on.

“

” position

Instrument panel il lumination, pa rking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license plate

lights are on.

“

” position: auto on/off headlights

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

3-42

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

“

” position

The headlights are all off.

NOTE

The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-

lights can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details. Also, the sensitivity

can be changed using the multi infor-

mation display. For details, refer to

“Auto Light Sensor” F3-41.

! Welcome lighting function

The welcome lighting function turns on the

low beam headlight for smooth approach-

ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or

in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the

following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position

. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/

off headlights

When approaching:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

automatically illuminate when unlocking

the doors (for Outback, including the rear

gate) by using the remote keyless entry

system.

The low beam headlights will remain

illuminated for 30 seconds

and then turn

off. However, if any of the following

operations is done, the low beam head-

lights will turn off.

. The doors are locked.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

When exiting:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

remain illuminated even when either of the

following operation is done.

. Thepush-buttonignitionswitchis

turned to the “OFF” status (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”)

. The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

The low beam headlights will turn off

under any of the following conditions.

. 3 minutes have passed since the low

beam headlights were illuminated by the

welcome lighting function.

. 30 seconds have passed since the

door is opened and closed.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The locking procedure is performed

twice. When performing the unlocking

procedure after pe rforming the locking

procedure, perform the locking procedure

twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which

the low beam headlights remain on by the

welcome lighting function can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for details. Also, you can change the setting by

operating the multi information display. For

details, refer to “Vehicle Setting” F3-41. For

models with the genuine SUBARU navigation

system, you can change the setting by using

the navigation system. For details, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation

system.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

– CONTINUED –

3-43

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

! Sensor for the auto on/off head-

lights

The sensor is on the instrument panel as

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect

the level of the ambient light cor-

rectly and the auto on/off headlights

may not operate properly.

& High/low beam change

(dimmer)

To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When

the headlights are on high beam, the high

beam indicator light “

” on the combina-

tion meter is also on.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever

back to the center position.

& Headlight flasher

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the

off position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter also illuminates.

3-44

& Daytime running light system

WARNING

The brightness of the illumination of

the high beam headlights is reduced

by the daytime running light system.

The light switch must always be

turned to the “

” position when it

is dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati-

cally illuminate at reduced brightness

when the engine has started, under the

following conditions.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light switch is in the off or “

”

position.

. The light sw itch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights do not turn

on automatically.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position (CVT models).

NOTE

. When the light switch is in the “

”

position, the front side marker lights,

tail lights and license plate lights are

illuminated.

. While the turn signal is flashing, the

high beam headlight on the side which

the turn signal is flashing turns off.

. While the hazard warning flasher is

on, the high beam headlights turn off.

Headlight beam leveler

(models with HID headlights)

The HID headlights generate more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience too much glare when your

headlight beam height adjustment is high

due to the vehicle carrying heavy load.

The automatic headlight beam leveler

adjusts the headlight beam height auto-

matically and optimally according to the

load being carried by the vehicle.

Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with HID headlights)

3-45

Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left

turn signal, push the turn signal lever

down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does

not return after cornering, return the lever

to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The turn signal

indicator lights will flash in the direction of

the turn or lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

& One-touch lane changer

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down sli ghtly and

immediately release it.

The operational/non-operational setting of

the one-touch lane changer’s can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

Illumination brightness con-

trol

The illumination brightness of the instru-

ment panel di ms under the following

conditions.

. when the light switch is in the “

” or

“

” position

. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically

You can adjust the illumination brightness

for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

3-46

NOTE

. When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illuminatio n brightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

. The brightness setting is not can-

celed even when the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

& Auto dimmer cancel function

When the ambient light is bright, the

illumination brightness is set to the max-

imum regardless of the position of the

control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust

the illumination brightness by using the

control dial. When the ambient light is

dark, you can dim the illumination bright-

ness as described above.

The operational/non-operational setting

and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel

function can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details.

Front fog light switch

(if equipped)

1) Headlight switch

2) Fog light switch

To turn on the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch to the “

”

position while the headlights are in either

of the following conditions.

. while the headlight switch is in the “

”

position with the low beam mode selected

. while the headlight switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam head-

lights turn on automatically

To turn off the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch back down to the

“

” position.

Indicator light

The indicator light located on the combi-

nation meter will illuminate when the front

fog lights are on.

& Steering responsive fog

lights system (models with

EyeSight system)

The steering responsive fog lights system

automatically turns the front fog light on

and off based on the steering angle and

vehicle speed when entering a curve or

driving on curved roads. The system is

intended to help prevent accidents by

enabling better visibility of curves ahead

and early r ecognition of any disabled

vehicles or other obstacles.

The front fog light on the inside of a curve

Instruments and controls/Front fog light switch

– CONTINUED –

3-47

Instruments and controls/Front fog light switch

will turn on if all of the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “

”

position

. The light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam head-

lights turn on automatically

. The fog light switch is in the “

”

position

. The low beam mode is selected (the

turn signal lever is in the center position)

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “R” position

. The steering response fog lights sys-

tem has not been deactivated

. The operating conditions such as the

steering angle and vehicle speed are met

The front fog lights on both sides will turn

on as usual if all of the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “

”

position

. The light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam head-

lights turn on automatically

. The fog light switch is in the “

”

position

. The low beam mode is selected (the

turn signal lever is in the center position)

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

switch

Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch

Press this switch to deactivate the steer-

ing responsive fog lights system. Press

the switch again to activate the system.

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indica-

tor

This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deacti-

vated. This indicator disappears when the

system is activated.

3-48

Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid le vel

frequently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades and

might cause the wiper motor to

fail. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshield or rear

window, always use the wind-

shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blades frozen to the

window glass could cause not

only the wiper blades to be

damaged but also might cause

the wiper motor to fail. If the

wiper blades are frozen to the

window glass, be sure to operate

the defroster, windshield wiper

deicer (if equipped) or rear win-

dow defogger before turning on

the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to

fail even if the wiper switch is

turned off. If this occurs,

promptly stop the vehicle in a

safe place, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-

sition an d clean the window

glass to allow proper wiper op-

eration.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailab le. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to “Windshield washer

fluid” F11-31.

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wi-

per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

NOTE

. The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates continu-

ously under an unusually heavy load,

the circuit breaker may trip to stop the

motor temporarily. If this happens, park

your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the

wiper switch, and wait for approxi-

mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker

will reset itself, and the wipers will

again operate normally.

. Clean your wiper blades and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Operate the windshield

washer for at least 1 second so that

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

– CONTINUED –

3-49

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blades results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you

cannot remove those streaks afte r

operating the washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield or rear window

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,

rinse the window glass and wiper

blades with clean water. The glass is

clean if no beads form on the glass

when you rinse with water.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades with new

ones. For replacement instructions,

refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”

F11-32.

& Windshield wiper and washer

switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

! Windshield wipers

: Mist (for a single wipe)

:Off

: Intermittent

: Low speed

High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “

” position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper. The operating

interval can be adjusted in several steps

from the shortest interval to the longest.

3-50

! Windshield washer

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

Windshield washer fluid warning indicator

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

indicator appears when the washer

fluid level in the tank has dropped to

the lower limit. If the warning indicator

appears, refill the tank with fluid. For

the tank refilling method, refer to

“Windshield washer fluid” F11-31.

& Rear window wiper and

washer switch (Outback)

Washer (accompanied by wiper op-

eration)

: Continuous

: Intermittent

:Off

Washer (accompanied by wiper op-

eration)

! Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob

switch upward.

To turn the wiper off, return the knob

switch to the “

” position.

With the switch turned to the “

” posi-

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

– CONTINUED –

3-51

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer

tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit-

tently at intervals corresponding to the

vehicle speed. In this position, when you

move the select lever to the “R” position

(CVT models) or the shift lever to the

reverse position (MT models), the rear

wiper will switch to continuous operation.

When you move the select lever/shift lever

from the “R” (reverse) position to another

position, the re ar wi per wi ll r eturn to

intermittent operation.

NOTE

. Even if the rear wiper switch is in the

“

” position, while the shift lever/

select lever is in the “R” position with

the front windshield wiper operating

continuously, the rear wiper will oper-

ate intermittently (reverse gear inter-

locked rear wiper).

. If a cargo carrier or other object that

disturbs rear wiper operation is at-

tached, the rear wipers may be da-

maged when they operate. In cases like

this, set the reverse gear interlocked

rear wiper to “non-operational”. For

more details, we recommend that you

contact a SUBARU dealer.

! Washer

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob switch

upward to the “

” position. The washer

fluid sprays until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch

downward to the “

” position. The washer

fluid sprays and the wiper operates until

you release the knob.

Defogger and deicer

1) Rear window defogger

2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The defogger and deicer system is acti-

3-52

vated only when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position.

Control switch (type A)

1) Models without outside mirror defogger

2) Models with outside mirror defogger

Control switch (type B)

1) Models without outside mirror defogger

2) Models with outside mirror defogger

To activate the defogger and dei cer

system, press the control switch. The rear

window defogger, outside mirror defogger

and windshield wiper deicer are activated

simultaneously. The indicator light on the

control switch illuminates while the defog-

ger and deicer system is activated.

To turn them off, press the control switch

again. They also turn off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

15 minutes. If the rear window and outside

mirrors have been cleared and the wind-

shield wiper blades have been deiced

completely before that time, press the

control switch to turn them off. If defrost-

ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,

you have to press the control switch to

turn them on again.

It is possible for a SUBARU dealer to set

the defogger and deicer system for the

continuous operation mode by operating

the multi information display. For details,

refer to “Defogger” F3-41.

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger and deicer system con-

tinuously for any longer than

necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface

of the rear window. They may

damage the conductors printed

on the window.

NOTE

. Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to the

windshield.

. If the windshield is covered with

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer

– CONTINUED –

3-53

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effec-

tively.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem is in the continuous operation

mode, if the vehicle speed remains at

9mph(15km/h)orlowerfor15

minutes, the windshield wiper deicer

automatically stops operating, though

the rear window defogger and outside

mirror defogger maintain continuous

operation in this condition.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem is in the continuous operation

mode, if the battery volta ge drops

below the permissible level, continu-

ous operation of the defogger and

deicer system is canceled and the

system stops operating.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside mirror (without auto-

dimming function) (if

equipped)

The mirror has a day and night position.

Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror

toward you for the night position. Push it

away for the day position . The night

position reduces glare from headlights.

& Auto-dimming mirror with

HomeLink

(if equipped)

1) HomeLink

button 1

2) HomeLink

button 2

3) LED

4) HomeLink

button 3

5) Sensor

6) Automatic dimming on button

7) Automatic dimming off button

The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare

feature which automatically reduces glare

coming from headlights of vehicles behind

you. It also contains a HomeLink

wireless

control system.

By pressing the automatic dimming on/off

button, the automatic dimming function is

turned on or off. When the automatic

dimming function is on, the LED indicator

3-54

will illuminate.

Even with the mirror in the automatic

dimming mode, the mirror surface turns

bright if the shift lever/select l ever is

shifted into the “R” (reverse) position. This

is to ensure good rearward visibility during

reversing.

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened with

glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner

directly on the mirror as that may cause

theliquidcleanertoenterthemirror

housing and damage the mirror.

! Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. During

nighttime driving, these sensors detect

distracting glare from vehicle headlights

behind you and automa tically dim the

mirror to eliminate glare and preserve

your vision. For this reason, use care not

to cover the sensors with stickers, or other

similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-

sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton

cloth or an applicator.

! HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

can be used to activate remote control

devices such as gate operators, garage

door openers, door locks, home lighting

and security systems.

There are three HomeLink

buttons on the

mirror, each of which can be programmed

for operation of one desired device. For

details on the device types which can be

operated by this system, consult the

HomeLink

website at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: NZLPZLHL4

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, includi ng

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

. Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard

(s). Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions: (1) this device may

not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

NOTE

Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables

aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne

doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)

l’utilisateur de l ’appareil doit accepter

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-55

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

HomeLink

and the HomeLink

house are

registered trademarks of Johnson Con-

trols, Inc.

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operatin g a

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way

of the garage door o r other

device to prevent potential harm

or damage.

. Do not use the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System with a gar-

age door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature

as required by applicable safety

standards. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object,

signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com or

call 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Wireless Control System to operate

a garage door opener or an entrance

gate, unplug the device’s motor

from the outlet during programming

to prevent motor burnout.

NOTE

. After programming your HomeLink

Wireless Control System for the de-

sired devices, retain the hand-held

transmitters for further programming

or device testing in the event of a

problem.

. It is recommended that you insert a

new battery in the hand-held transmit-

ter of a device to ensure correct

programming.

! Garage door opener program-

ming in the U.S.A.

NOTE

When programming the Home Link

Wireless Control System for a garage

door opener, it is suggested that you

park the vehicle outside the garage.

1. Unplug the motor of the garage door

opener from the outlet.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink

buttons are

already programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the

memory of all three buttons.

1) HomeLink

button 1

2) HomeLink

button 2

3) HomeLink

button 3

2. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons (button 1 and button

3) until the indicator light begins to flash

(after approximately 20 seconds). Then

release both buttons.

3. Hold the end of the garage door

3-56

opener’s hand-held transmitter between 1

and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from

the HomeLink

button you wish to pro-

gram.

4. Simultaneously press and hold both

the hand-held transmitter button and the

desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT re-

lease the buttons until step 5 has been

completed.

NOTE

Some gate operators and garage door

openers may require you to replace

this programming step 4 with proce-

dures in “Programming for entrance

gates and garage door openers in

Canada” F3-58.

5. Hold down both buttons until the

HomeLink

indicator light flashes, first

slowly then rapidly. When the indicator

light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-

cates successful programming of the new

frequency signal.)

6. Press and hold the programmed but-

ton and check the HomeLink

indicator

light. If the indicator light stays on con-

tinuously, your garage door should acti-

vate and the programming is completed.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2

seconds and then stays on continuously,

your garage door opener may be pro-

tected by a rolling code feature. In this

case you need to perform the additional

steps that are described in “Programming

rolling-code-protected garage door open-

ers in the U.S.A.” F3-57.

! Programming rolling-code-pro-

tected garage door openers in

the U.S.A.

If your garage door opener has a rolling

code feature, program the HomeLink

Wireless Control System for it by following

steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener

programming in the U.S.A.” F3-56. Then

continue with the following steps.

NOTE

The assistance of a second person

may make the programming quicker

and easier.

1. Locate the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit.

The exact location and color of the button

may vary by brand of garage door opener.

If it is difficult to locate the training button,

refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-

tion manual.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-57

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

1) Training button

2. Press the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit

(which activates the “training light” on the

unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.

3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for

2 seconds and release the HomeLink

button that was programmed in the pre-

vious section. Press and release the

button a second time to complete the

programming procedure.

NOTE

Some garage door openers may re-

quire you to do the above press-hold-

release sequence a third time to com-

plete the programming.

4. The garage door opener should now

recognize the HomeLink

Wireless Control

System and your garage door opener

should activate when the HomeLink

button is pressed.

! Programming for entrance gates

and garage door openers in

Canada

1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate

or garage door opener from the outlet.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink

buttons are

already programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the

memory of all three buttons.

1) HomeLink

button 1

2) HomeLink

button 2

3) HomeLink

button 3

2. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons (button 1 and button

3) until the Home Link

indicator light

begins to flash (after approximately 20

seconds). Then release both buttons.

3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/

garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-

ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76

mm) away from the HomeLink

button you

wish to program.

4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button.

5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-

held transmitter button every 2 seconds

until step 6 is complete.

6. When the indicator light flashes slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds,

release both buttons.

7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/

garage door opener to the outlet.

8. Test your entrance gate/garage door

opener by pressing the programmed

HomeLink

button.

! Operating the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System

Once programmed, the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System can be used to

remote-control the devices to which its

buttons are programmed. To activate a

device, simply press the appropriate but-

3-58

ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-

ing that the signal is being transmitted.

! Programming other devices

To program other devices such as door

locks, home lighting and security systems,

contact HomeLink

at www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

! Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button

1. Press and hold the HomeLink

button

you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release

the button until step 4 has been com-

pleted.

2. When the HomeLink

indicator light

begins to flash slowly (after approximately

20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-

mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches

(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink

button you wish to program.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-

mitter button. The HomeLink

indicator

light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flash

rapidly, release both buttons.

The programming for the previous device

is now erased and the new device can be

operated by pres sing the HomeL ink

button.

! Erasing HomeLink

button mem-

ory

NOTE

. Performi ng this procedure erases

the memory of all the preprogrammed

buttons simultaneously. The memory

of individual buttons cannot be erased.

. It is recommended that upon the

sale of the vehicle, the memory of all

programmed HomeLink

buttons be

erased for security purposes.

1) HomeLink

button 1

2) HomeLink

button 2

3) HomeLink

button 3

1. Press and hold the two outer buttons

(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator

light begins to flash (after approximately

20 seconds).

2. Release both buttons.

! In case a problem occurs

If you cannot activate a device using the

corresponding HomeLink

button after

programming, contact HomeLink

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515 for assistance.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-59

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass with HomeLink

(if

equipped)

1) HomeLink

button 1

2) HomeLink

button 2

3) LED

4) HomeLink

button 3

5) Sensor

6) Automatic dimming on/off button

7) Compass display button

8) Compass display

The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare

feature which automatically reduces glare

coming from headlights of vehicles behind

you. It also contains a built-in compass

and HomeLink

wireless control system.

. By pressing the automatic dimming on/

off button, the automatic dimming function

is toggled on or off. When the automatic

dimming function is on, the LED indicator

will illuminate.

Even with the mirror in the automatic

dimming mode, the mirror surface turns

bright if the transmission is shifted into

reverse. This is to ensure good rearward

visibility during reversing.

. By pressing the compass display but-

ton, the compass display is toggled on or

off. When the compass is on, an illumi-

nated compass reading will appear in the

upper right corner of the mirror.

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened with

glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner

directly on the mirror as that may cause

the liquid cleaner to enter the mir ror

housing and damage the mirror.

! Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. During

nighttime driving, these sensors detect

distracting glare from vehicle headlights

behind you and automatically dim the

mirror to eliminate glare and preserve

your vision. For this reason, use care not

to cover the sensors with stickers, or other

similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-

sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton

cloth or an applicator.

3-60

! Compass zone adjustment

Compass calibration zones

1. Refer to t he “Compass c alibration

zones” map shown above to verify that

the compass zone setting is correct for

your geographical location.

2. Press and hold the compass display

button for 3 seconds until the zone

selection comes up (a number will be

displayed in the mirror compass window).

3. Press the compass display button

repeatedly until the correct zone setting

for your location is displayed.

4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will

exit the zone setting mode.

! Compass calibration

1. If a “ C” is displayed in the compass

window, the compass needs to be cali-

brated.

2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8

km/h) or less until the display reads a

direction.

3. You can also calibrate the compass by

driving your vehicle on your everyday

routine. The compass will be calibrated

once it has tracked a complete circle.

4. To recalibrate your compass, push and

hold the compass display button for 9

seconds until a “C” appe ars in the

compass window.

5. Calibrate the compass according to

step 2 or step 3.

! HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

can be used to activate remote control

devices such as gate operators, garage

door openers, door locks, home lighting

and security systems.

There are three HomeLink

buttons on the

mirror, each of which can be programmed

for operation of one desired device. For

details on the device types which can be

operated by this system, consult the

HomeLink

website at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: NZLPZLHL4

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, includi ng

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

. Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard

(s). Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions: (1) this device may

not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference,

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-61

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

NOTE

Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables

aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne

doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)

l’utilisateur de l ’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

HomeLink

and the HomeLink

house are

registered trademarks of Johnson Con-

trols, Inc.

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operatin g a

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way

of the garage door o r other

device to prevent potential harm

or damage.

. Do not use the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System with a gar-

age door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature

as required by applicable safety

standards. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object,

signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com or

call 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Wireless Control System to operate

a garage door opener or an entrance

gate, unplug the device’s motor

from the outlet during programming

to prevent motor burnout.

NOTE

. After programming your HomeLink

Wireless Control System for the de-

sired devices, retain the hand-held

transmitters for further programming

or device testing in the event of a

problem.

. It is recommended that you insert a

new battery in the hand-held transmit-

ter of a device to ensure correct

programming.

! Garage door opener program-

ming in the U.S.A.

NOTE

When programming the HomeLink

Wireless Control System for a garage

door opener, it is suggested that you

park the vehicle outside the garage.

1. Unplug the motor of the garage door

opener from the outlet.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink

buttons are

already programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the

memory of all three buttons.

3-62

1) HomeLink

button 1

2) HomeLink

button 2

3) HomeLink

button 3

2. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons (button 1 and button

3) until the indicator light begins to flash

(after approximately 10 seconds). Then

release both buttons.

3. Hold the end of the garage doo r

opener’s hand-held transmitter between

1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from

the HomeLink

button you wish to pro-

gram.

4. Simultaneously press and hold both

the hand-held transmitter button and the

desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT re-

lease the buttons until step 5 has been

completed.

NOTE

Some gate operators and garage door

openers may require you to replace

this programming step 4 with proce-

dures in “Programming for entrance

gates and g arage do or op eners in

Canada” F3-64.

5. Hold down both bu ttons until the

HomeLink

indicator light flashes, first

slowly then rapidly. When the indicator

light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-

cates successful programming of the new

frequency signal.)

6. Press and hold the programmed but-

ton and check the HomeLink

indicator

light. If the indicator light stays on con-

tinuously, your garage door should acti-

vate and the programming is completed.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2

seconds and then stays on continuously,

your garage door opener may be pro-

tected by a rolling code feature. In this

case you need to perform the additional

steps that are described in “Programming

rolling-code-protected garage door open-

ers in the U.S.A.” F3-63.

! Programming rolling-code-pro-

tected garage door openers in

the U.S.A.

If your garage door opener has a rolling

code feature, program the HomeLink

Wireless Control System for it by following

steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener

programming in the U.S.A.” F3-62. Then

continue with the following steps.

NOTE

The assistance of a second person

may make the programming quicker

and easier.

1. Locate the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit.

The exact location and color of the button

may vary by brand of garage door opener.

If it is difficult to locate the training button,

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-63

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-

tion manual.

1) Training button

2. Press the training button on the

garage door opener motor head unit

(which activates the “training light” on the

unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.

3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for

2 seconds and release the HomeLink

button that was programmed in the pre-

vious section. Press and release the

button a second time to complete the

programming procedure.

NOTE

Some garage door openers may re-

quire you to do the above press-hold-

release sequence a third time to com-

plete the programming.

4. The garage door opener should now

recognize the HomeLink

Wireless Control

System and your garage door opener

should activate when the HomeLink

button is pressed.

! Programming for entrance gates

and garage door openers in

Canada

1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate

or garage door opener from the outlet.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink

buttons are

already programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the

memory of all three buttons.

1) HomeLink

button 1

2) HomeLink

button 2

3) HomeLink

button 3

2. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons (button 1 and button

3) until the Home Link

indicator light

begins to flash (after approximately 10

seconds). Then release both buttons.

3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/

garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-

ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76

mm) away from the HomeLink

button you

wish to program.

4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button.

5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-

held transmitter button every 2 seconds

until step 6 is complete.

3-64

6. When the indicator light flashes slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds,

release both buttons.

7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/

garage door opener to the outlet.

8. Test your entrance gate/garage door

opener by pressing the programmed

HomeLink

button.

! Operating the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System

Once programmed, the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System can be used to

remote-control the devices to which its

buttons are programmed. To activate a

device, simply press the appropriate but-

ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-

ing that the signal is being transmitted.

! Programming other devices

To program other devices such as door

locks, home lighting and security systems,

contact HomeLink

at www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

! Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button

1. Press and hold the HomeLink

button

you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release

the button until step 4 has been com-

pleted.

2. When the HomeLink

indicator light

begins to flash slowly (after approximately

20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-

mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches

(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink

button you wish to program.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-

mitter button. The HomeLink

indicator

light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flash

rapidly, release both buttons.

The programming for the previous device

is now erased and the new device can be

operated by pressin g the HomeLink

button.

! Erasing HomeLink

button mem-

ory

NOTE

. Performi ng this procedure erases

the memory of all the preprogrammed

buttons simultaneously. The memory

of individual buttons cannot be erased.

. It is recommended that upon the

sale of the vehicle, the memory of all

programmed HomeLink

buttons be

erased for security purposes.

1) HomeLink

button 1

2) HomeLink

button 2

3) HomeLink

button 3

1. Press and hold the two outer buttons

(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator

light begins to flash (after approximately

20 seconds).

2. Release both buttons.

! In case a problem occurs

If you cannot activate a device using the

corresponding HomeLink

button after

programming, contact HomeLink

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515 for assistance.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

– CONTINUED –

3-65

Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use

the convex mirror to judge the

distance of vehicles behind you

when changing lanes. Use the inside

mirror (or glance backwards) to

determine the actual size and dis-

tance of objects that you view in

convex mirror.

! Remote control mirror switch

: Select side to adjust

: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,

“R” is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional opera-

tion.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in

personal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to

the fixed position, adjust the

steering wheel again. It is dan-

gerous to drive without locking

the steering wheel. This may

cause loss of vehicle control

and result in personal injury.

3-66

1) Tilt adjustment

2) Telescopic adjustment

1. Adjust th e seat posi tion. Refer to

“Front seats” F1-2.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down,

and forward and backward.

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Instruments and controls/Horn

3-67

————————————————————————————————————————

Ventilator control................................................. 4-2

Center ventilators................................................ 4-2

Side ventilators ................................................... 4-2

Rear ventilators (if equipped)............................... 4-2

Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3

Type A ................................................................ 4-3

Type B ................................................................ 4-4

Automatic climate control system (type B)....... 4-5

Temperature sensors........................................... 4-5

Manual climate control ....................................... 4-6

Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-6

Temperature control ............................................ 4-7

Fan speed control ............................................... 4-8

Air conditioner control ........................................ 4-8

Air inlet selection ................................................ 4-8

Defrosting ............................................................ 4-9

Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner ........................................................ 4-9

Cleaning ventilator grille ...................................... 4-9

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ............................................................. 4-9

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit.............................................................. 4-10

Checking air conditioning system before summer

season ............................................................ 4-10

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and

low temperature weather condition................... 4-10

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine

is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-10

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-10

Air filtration system (if equipped)..................... 4-10

Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-11

Climate control

Climate control/Ventilator control

Ventilator control

& Center ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the center grille

open/close wheel to the “

” position.

To close it, turn the wheel to the “ ”

position.

& Side ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the side grille

open/close wheel upward to the “

”

position.

To close it, turn the wheel downward to the

“

” position.

& Rear ventilators (if equipped)

1) Open

2) Close

Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the rear grille

open/close wheel upward to the “

”

position.

To close it, turn the wheel downward to the

“

” position.

4-2

Climate control panel

& Type A

1) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control” F4-8.)

2) “A/C” button (Refer to “Air conditioner

control” F4-8.)

3) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” F4-8.)

5) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-

perature control” F4-7 and “MAX A/C

mode” F4-7.)

6) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode

selection” F4-6 and “Defrosting” F4-9.)

7) Rear window defogger button (models

without outside mirror defogger) (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” F3-52.)

8) Rear window and outside mirror defogger

button (models with outside mirror de-

fogger) (Refer to “Defogger and deicer”

F3-52.)

Climate control/Climate control panel

– CONTINUED –

4-3

Climate control/Climate control panel

& Type B

1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-

perature control” F4-7.)

2) “AUTO” button (Refer to “Automatic

climate control system (type B)” F4-5.)

3) “OFF” button (Refer to “Automatic cli-

mate control system (type B)” F4-5.)

4) “A/C” button (Refer to “Air conditioner

control” F4-8.)

5) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)

6) Fan speed control button (for decreasing

the fan speed) (Refer to “Fan speed

control” F4-8.)

7) Fan speed control button (for increasing

the fan speed) (Refer to “Fan speed

control” F4-8.)

8) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-

perature control” F4-7.)

9) “MAX A/C” button (Refer to “MAX A/C

mode” F4-7.)

10) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” F4-8.)

11) “DUAL ” button (Refer to “Automatic

climate control system (type B)” F4-5

and ““DUAL” mode (type B)” F4-8.)

12) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode

selection” F4-6 and “Defrosting” F4-9.)

13) Rear window defogger button (models

without outside mirror defogger) (Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” F3-52.)

14) Rear window and outside mirror defogger

button (models with outside mirror de-

fogger) (Refer to “Defogger and deicer”

F3-52.)

4-4

Automatic climate control

system (type B)

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

. The blower fan rotates at a low

speed when the engine coolant tem-

perature is low.

. For efficient defogging or dehumidi-

fying in cold weather, press the “A/C”

button.

When the automatic climate control mode

is selected, the following items are auto-

matically controlled.

. Outlet air temperature

. Fan speed

. Airflow distribution

. Air inlet control

. Air conditioner compressor operation

To activate this mode, perform the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Set the preferred temperature using

the temperature control button.

2. Press the “AUTO” button. The FULL

AUTO mode is selected and the “FULL

AUTO” indic ator li ght on the di splay

illuminates.

NOTE

If you operate any of the buttons on the

control panel other than the “OFF”

button, rear window defogger button

and temperature control buttons during

FULL AUTO mode operation, the

“FULL” indicator light on the control

panel will turn off and the “AUTO”

indicator light will remain illuminated.

You can then manually control the

system as desired. To change the

system back to the FULL AUTO mode,

press the “AUTO” button.

To turn off the climate control system,

press the “OFF” button. The air inlet

selection is then automatically switched

to the outside air mode.

& Temperature sensors

1) Solar sensor

2) Interior air temperature sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly

Climate control/Automatic climate control system (type B)

– CONTINUED –

4-5

Climate control/Manual climate control

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows:

– Solar sensor: beside the speaker grille

on the dashboard

– Interior air temperature sensor: on the

side of the driver-side part of the center

panel

– Outside temperatur e sensor: behind

front grille.

Manual climate control

& Airflow mode selection

Select the preferred airflow mode by

pressing the airflow mode selection button

or defroster button.

Airflow modes are as follows.

A) Models with rear ventilators

(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets

A) Models with rear ventilators

(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and the

foot outlets

A) Models with rear ventilators

(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of

4-6

the instrument panel and some through

windshield defroster outlets (A small

amount of air flows to the windshield and

both side windows to prevent fogging.)

A) Models with rear ventilators

(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the

instrument panel

A) Models with rear ventilators

(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets and

both side outlets of the instrument panel

NOTE

. When the “

” mode or “ ” mode

is selected, the air conditioner com-

pressor automatically operates to more

quickly defog the windshield. At the

same time, the air inlet selection is

automatically set to the outside air

mode.

In this state:

– The air conditioner indicator light

does not illuminate.

– You cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the

air conditioner button.

& Temperature control

Turn the temperature control dial over a

range from the blue side (cool) to red side

(warm) to regulate the temperature of

airflow from the air outlets.

! MAX A/C mode

Perform the following operation to select

the MAX A/C mode.

. Turn the temperature control dial to the

“MAX A/C” position (models with type A

climate control system).

. Press the “MAX A/C” button (models

with type B climate control system).

When this mode is selected, some of the

settings will be changed as follows.

Type A climate control system:

. The air inlet selection mode will be

changed to the ON position (recirculation).

. The air conditioner will turn on.

Type B climate control system:

. The temperature setting will be chan-

ged to the maximum cooling mode.

. The fan speed setting will be changed

to the maximum speed.

. The airflow mode setting will be chan-

ged to the “

” (ventilation) mode.

. The air inlet selection mode will be

changed to the ON position (recirculation).

Climate control/Manual climate control

– CONTINUED –

4-7

Climate control/Manual climate control

. The air conditioner will turn on.

While the MAX A/C mode is selected,

performing the following operation returns

the system to the setting that had been

selected before the MAX A/C mode is

selected.

. Turn the temperature control dial to a

position other than “MAX A/C” position

(models with type A climate control sys-

tem).

. Press the “MAX A/C” button again

(models with type B climate control sys-

tem).

! “DUAL” mode (type B)

You can change the setting of the driver’s

side and front passenger’s side tempera-

ture independ ently by selecting the

“DUAL” mode.

You can select the “DUAL” mode by

performing either of the following proce-

dures.

. Press the “DUAL” button

. Turn the passenger’s side temperature

control dial

The “DUAL” mode can be canceled by

pressing the “DUAL” button.

When the “DUAL” mode is selected:

Turn the driver’ssidedialtosetthe

driver’s side temperature. Turn the front

passenger’s si de dial to set the front

passenger’s side temperature.

When the “DUAL” mode is canceled:

Set the desired temperature by turning the

driver’s side dial.

& Fan speed control

The fan operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position. Select the

preferred fan speed by turning the fan

speed control dial (type A), or by pressing

the fan speed control buttons (type B).

& Air conditioner control

The air conditioner operates only when

the engine is running.

Press the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is

on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.

To turn off the air conditioner, press the

button again. The indicator light will turn

off.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, turn on the air

conditioner. However, if the ambient

temperature decreases to approxi-

mately 328F(08C), the air conditioner

and dehumidification system may not

work properly.

& Air inlet selection

Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet

selection button.

ON position (recirculation): Interior air is

recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road. When the

ON position is selected, the “

” indicator

light on the information display (type A)/

the indicator light on the air inlet selection

button (type B) illuminates.

OFF position (outside air): Outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment.

Press the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty. The indicator light will

turn off.

4-8

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside dusty condition clears.

Defrosting

Select the desired “

” mode or “ ” mode

to defrost or dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows by performing the

following procedures.

. To select the “

” mode, press the

defroster button.

. To select the “

” mode, press the

airflow mode selection button and select

the “

” mode.

NOTE

. When the “

” mode or “ ” mode

is selected, the air conditioner com-

pressor automatically operates to more

quickly defog the windshield. (The air

conditioner indicator light does not

illuminate in this case.) At the same

time, the air inlet selection is automa-

tically set to the outside air mode. For

details, refer to “Airflow mode selec-

tion” F4-6.

. If the defroster button is pressed

while the “

” mode is selected, it will

return to the previous mode before

selecting the “

” mode.

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

& Cleaning ventilator grille

1) Front ventilator inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

Climate control/Defrosting

– CONTINUED –

4-9

Climate control/Air filtration system

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of

the air conditioner for maximum cooling

efficiency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air con-

ditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather condition

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving on a steep

upgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climate

control system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-

od of adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant is different from the method for

CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are

not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system (if

equipped)

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system.

Replace the air filter element according

to the replacement schedule shown in the

following table. This schedule should be

followed to maintain the filter ’ sdust

collection ability. Under extremely dusty

conditions, the filter should be replaced

more frequently. Have your filter checked

or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For

replacement, use only a genuine

SUBARU air filter kit. For the replacement

schedule, refer to the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter.

. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

. Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

4-10

mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing an air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

(3) Pull out the glove box.

2. Remove the cover of the air filter.

1) Pull the air filter approximately 3.9 inches

(10 cm) first.

2) Gently push the near side of the air filter

down.

3) Pull out the air filter.

3. Remove the air filter.

Climate control/Air filtration system

– CONTINUED –

4-11

Climate control/Air filtration system

4. Replace the air filter element with a

new one.

5. Reinstall the cover of the air filter.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

6. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

7. Close the glove box.

4-12

Antenna system .................................................. 5-2

Printed antenna................................................... 5-2

FM reception ....................................................... 5-2

Installation of accessories.................................. 5-2

Audio set ............................................................. 5-3

Base display audio set (if equipped) .................... 5-4

SUBARU STARLINK

Multimedia Plus audio set

(U.S. spec. models only, if equipped) ................. 5-5

Basic info rmation before use ............................. 5-6

Initial screen ....................................................... 5-6

Loading and unloading a disc.............................. 5-6

Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/

portable device ................................................. 5-7

Touch screen gestures ........................................ 5-8

Touch screen operation ....................................... 5-8

Entering letters and numbers/list screen

operation .......................................................... 5-9

Screen adjustment ............................................. 5-10

Other settings..................................................... 5-11

Basic operation .................................................. 5-13

Some basics ...................................................... 5-13

Audio/visual remote controls ............................ 5-18

Steering switches............................................... 5-18

Tips for operating the audio/visual system...... 5-21

Operating information......................................... 5-21

Useful information.............................................. 5-28

SiriusXM Data Service*....................................... 5-28

STARLINK.......................................................... 5-30

Radio operation.................................................. 5-32

AM/FM radio....................................................... 5-32

SiriusXM Satellite Radio..................................... 5-43

Media operation ................................................. 5-48

CD .................................................................... 5-48

USB memory ..................................................... 5-51

iPod .................................................................. 5-54

Bluetooth audio ................................................. 5-58

aha

by HARMAN ............................................ 5-62

AUX .................................................................. 5-70

Pandora

........................................................... 5-73

Bluetooth

settings ........................................... 5-78

Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device .......... 5-78

Setting Bluetooth details.................................... 5-81

Phone operation (Hands-free system for

cellular phones) .............................................. 5-84

Quick reference ................................................. 5-84

Some basics...................................................... 5-85

Calling on the Bluetooth phone .......................... 5-88

Receiving on the Bluetooth phone...................... 5-94

Talking on the Bluetooth phone.......................... 5-95

Setup .................................................................. 5-97

Phone settings .................................................. 5-97

What to do if..................................................... 5-100

Troubleshooting............................................... 5-100

Voice command system operatio n ................. 5-104

Voice command system ................................... 5-104

Command list................................................... 5-107

Appendix .......................................................... 5-111

Certification...................................................... 5-111

Certification for the Hands-free system............. 5-112

Certification for Mexico models ........................ 5-112

Audio

Audio/Antenna system

Antenna system

& Printed antenna

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the window on which the antenna is

printed. Doing so may damage the

antenna printed on the window.

The antenna is printed on the inner

surface of the rear window glass.

NOTE

Antenna performance will deteriorate

significantly if you apply tinting film or

any other material over the antenna

portion of the rear window glass.

& FM reception

Although FM is normally static free,

reception can be affected by the surround-

ing area, atmospheric conditions, station

strength and transmitter distance. Build-

ings or other obstr uctions may cause

momentary static, flutter or station inter-

ference. If reception continues to be

unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

Installation of accessories

Always consu lt you r SUBAR U dea ler

before installing a citizen band radio or

other transmitting device in your vehicle.

Such devices may cause the electronic

control system to malfunction if they are

incorrectly installed or if they are not

suited for the vehicle.

5-2

Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with one

of the following audio sets. Refer to the

pages indicated in this section for operat-

ing details.

NOTE

If a cell phone is placed near the audio

set, it may cause the audio set to emit

noise when the phone receives calls.

This noise does not indicate an audio

set malfunction. Note that a cell phone

should be placed as far as possible

from the audio set.

Audio/Audio set

– CONTINUED –

5-3

Audio/Audio set

& Base display audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ACC ” or “ON”

position.

NOTE

HD Radio Technology should be in-

cluded as feature in the base display

audio set.

This display audio set is referred to as

follows.

U.S.: SUBARU STARLINK

Multimedia

Canada: 6.2-inch infotainment system

5-4

& SUBARU STARLINK

Multimedia Plus audio set (U.S. spec.

models only, if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ACC ” or “ON”

position.

For details about how to use the SUBARU

STARLINK

Multimedia Plus audio set,

refer to the 2015 Legacy/Outback

SUBARU STARLINK

Multimedia Plus

and SUBARU STARLINK

Multimedia

Navigation Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

HD Radio Technology should be in-

cluded as a feature in the SUBARU

STARLINK

Multimedia Plus audio

set.

Audio/Audio set

5-5

Audio/Basic information before use

Basic information before use

& Initial screen

! Initial screen

1. When the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position, the initial screen

will be displayed and the system will begin

operating.

. When using the STARLINK function,

the display screen may be different

from the screen above.

. After a few seconds, the “Caution

(Caution)” screen will be displayed.

. After about 5 seconds, the “Caution

(Caution)” screen automatically

switches to the next screen.

WARNING

When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running, always apply the

parking brake for safety.

& Loading and unloading a disc

! Loading a disc

CAUTION

Never try to disassemble the audio

kit or lubricate any part of the CD

player. Do not insert anything other

than a disc into the slot.

1. Insert a disc into the disc slot.

. After insertion, the disc is automati-

cally loaded.

5-6

NOTE

. For compatible discs, refer to “CD

player and disc ” F5-22.

. When inserting a disc, gently insert

it with the label facing up.

! Unloading a disc

1. Press

and remove the disc.

& Connecting and disconnect-

ing a USB memory/portable

device

! Connecting a device

1. Open the cover and connect a device.

. Turn on the power of the device

when it is not turned on.

NOTE

. This device has a USB port for USB

memory/portable device.

. For compatible USB memor y de-

vices, refer to “USB memory device”

F5-24.

. For compatible iPod models, refer to

“iPod” F5-24.

. If a USB hub is plugged-in, up to two

devices can be connected at a time.

. Even if a USB hub is used to

connect more than two USB devices,

only the first two connected devices

will be recognized.

Audio/Basic information before use

– CONTINUED –

5-7

Audio/Basic information before use

& Touch screen gestures

Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.

Operation method Outline Main use

Touch

Quickly touch and release

once.

Changing and selecting various

settings

Drag*

Touch the screen with your

finger, and move the screen

to the desired position.

Scrolling the lists

Flick*

Quickly move the screen by

flicking with your finger.

Scrolling the main screen page

*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

NOTE

There may be a delayed response to

flick operation that are performed at

high altitudes.

& Touch screen operation

This system is operated mainly by the

buttons on the screen. (These are referred

to as screen buttons in this manual.)

. When a screen button is touched, a

beep sounds. (You can set the beep

sound.) Refer to “Other settings” F5-11.

CAUTION

. To prevent damaging the screen,

touch the screen buttons with

your finger lightly.

. Do not use objects other than

your finger to touch the screen.

. W ipe off f ingerprin ts u sing a

glass cleaning cloth. Do not use

chemical cleaners to clean the

screen, as they may damage the

touch screen.

NOTE

. If the system does not respond to

touching a screen button, move your

finger away from the screen and touch

5-8

it again.

. Grayed-out screen buttons cannot

be operated.

. The displayed image may become

darker and moving images may be

slightly distorted when the screen is

cold.

. In extremely cold conditions, the

map may not be displayed and the data

input by a user may be deleted. Also,

the screen buttons may be harder than

usual to press.

. When you look at the screen

through polarized material such as

polarized sunglasses, the screen may

be dark and hard to see. If so, look at

the screen from different angles, adjust

the screen settings on the “Display

Settings (Display Settings)” screen or

take off your sunglasses.

& Entering letters and num-

bers/list screen operation

! Entering letters and numbers

When entering the Bluetooth device name

or PIN-code, or the phone number, letters

and numbers can be entered via the

screen.

In-Car-Device setting

No. Function

Enter the desired characters (alpha-

bet key mode).

Display the number keys (change to

number key mode).

Enter a space.

Confirm the characters/numbers en-

tered into the window.

Delete a character/number entered

into the window.

Dialpad

No. Function

Enter the desired numbers.

Delete a number entered into the

window.

Audio/Basic information before use

– CONTINUED –

5-9

Audio/Basic information before use

! List screen

Two types of list are available on this

device.

. Multimedia playlists

. Contacts list

Multimedia playlists (Example: iPod play-

list)

No. Function

Graphic tab: Select a category that

wants to play back.

Return to the playback display of

each mode.

Select to skip to the next or previous

page.

Contacts list (Example: phone book)

No. Function

Alphabet button: Jump to list entries

that begin with the same letter.

Return to the playback display of

each mode.

Select to skip to the next or previous

page.

& Screen adjustment

The contrast and brightness of the screen

display and the image of the camera

display can be adjusted.

1. Select

2. Select

SETTINGS

(SETTINGS).

3. Select the items to be set.

In setting display, the Day/Night Mode and

the Brightness can be changed.

SETTINGS display

5-10

No. Function

Select “Day/Night Mode”.

“Auto”, “Day”,or“Night” can be se-

lected on the pop-up screen.

When “Auto” is selected, the screen

changes to day or night mode de-

pending on the position of the head-

light switch.

Select “Brightness”.

Press “+” or “-” to adjust the bright-

ness.

NOTE

. When the screen is viewed through

polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pat-

tern may appear on the screen due to

optical characteristics of the screen. If

this is disruptive, please operate the

screen without polarized sunglasses.

. If the screen is set to “Day” mode

with the headlight switch turned on,

this condition is memorized even with

the engine turned off.

In Camera display, the brightness, tint,

color, and black level of the screen can be

adjusted.

1. Set the selector lever in the R range.

2. Touch the items to be set after the rear

camera monitor is displayed.

NOTE

The Camera display can be accessed

when the rear camera monitor is dis-

played.

Camera display

Other settings

1. Select

2. Select

SETTINGS

(SETTINGS).

3. Select the items to be set.

Audio/Other settings

– CONTINUED –

5-11

Audio/Other settings

Gear wheel symbol tab

Item Function

System

Language

Select to change the language.

Button

Beeps

Select to set the sound beeps

on/off.

System

Software

Select to update software ver-

sions. This menu is not used in

usual operation.

Reset to

Factory

Setting

Select to reset the device to

factory settings. This menu is not

used in usual operation.

When reset to factory setting,

turn ignition off and on again.

Bluetooth symbol tab

Item Function

BT De-

vices Con-

nection

Select to pair/connect the Blue-

tooth devices.

In-Car-De-

vice setting

Select to enter the Bluetooth

device name or PIN-code.

Note symbol tab

Item Function

Balance/

Fader

Select to adjust speaker volume

balance (right/left and front/rear).

Speed Vo-

lume Con-

trol

Select to adjust speaker volume

coupled to vehicle speed.

Graphic

Equalizer

Select to adjust sound quality in

each frequency band.

Sound Re-

storer

Select to add high-pitched tone

to the compressed audio file.

Volume

Smoother

Select to adjust volume differ-

ence between audio sources.

Virtual

Bass

Select to add harmonic tone so

that low-pitched tone is

strengthened.

5-12

Item Function

Vocal Im-

age Con-

trol

Select to pick-up vocal sound

signal from the sound data, and

adjust it to right/left or front/rear.

Monitor symbol tab

Item Function

Day/Night

Mode

Select “Day/Night Mode”.

“Auto”, “Day”,or“Night” can be

selected on the pop-up screen.

When “Auto” is selected, the

screen changes to day or night

mode depending on the position

of the headlight switch.

Brightness

Select “Brightness”.

Spanner symbol tab

Item Function

Browser

cache

Select to initialize cache files

that the browser stores.

Basic operation

& Some basics

This section describes some of the basic

features of the audio/visual system. Some

information may not pertain to your sys-

tem.

Your audio/visual system works when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the audio/

visual system on longer than neces-

sary when the engine is not running.

Audio/Basic operation

– CONTINUED –

5-13

Audio/Basic operation

! Turning the system on and off

“POWER/VOLUME” knob: Press to turn

the audio/visual system on and off. When

the system turns on, the last mode is

displayed. Press and hold the knob

approx. 1.5 seconds or more, turn the

display to off.

Turn this knob to adjust the volume.

“AUDIO/TUNE” knob: Press to display

screen buttons for the audio/visual sys-

tem.

! Selecting an audio source

1. Press the “AUDIO/TUNE” knob.

. If the audio control screen appears,

select

Source

(Source) on the audio

screen or press the “AUDIO/TUNE”

knob again.

. Press the “AUDIO/TUNE” knob dur-

ing lists are displayed, the audio play

back screen appears. Press and hold

the “AUDIO/TUNE” knob approx. 1.5

seconds or more, the graphic equal-

izer screen is displayed.

2. Select the desired source.

Source select display (for USA)

5-14

Source select display (for CANADA)

! Audio settings

1. Select

2. Select

SETTINGS

(SETTINGS).

3. Select the note symbol tab.

4. Select the desired item to be adjusted.

Setting ranges

Item Step Default

Audio volume 0-40 15

Balance L9-R9 0 (Center)

Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)

Vocal Image Control

Left/Right: R9-L9

Front/Rear: R9-F9

Left/Right: L3

Front/Rear: 0 (Center)

Speed Volume Control OFF, Low, High Low

Graphic Equalizer, SET1-3 −6-+6 0 (Flat)

Sound Restorer ON, OFF ON

Volume Smoother OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid

Virtual Bass OFF, Low, Mid, High

Mid

Audio/Basic operation

– CONTINUED –

5-15

Audio/Basic operation

! “Balance/Fader”

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is important for good quality audio

program listening.

Keep in mind that when listening to a

stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increas e the

volume of 1 group of sounds while

decreasing the volume of another.

1. Touch the “Set” button of the Balance/

Fader function.

2. Select the “Volume Balance Control”

menu.

3. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ”

or “

” button.

4. Adjust the fader by pressing “

” or

“

” button.

5. Select the “Vocal Image Control”

menu.

6. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ”

or “

” button.

7. Adjust the fader by pressing “

” or

“

” button.

! “Speed Volume Control”

The system adj usts to the optimum

volume and tone quality according to

vehicle speed to compensa te for in-

creased vehicle noise.

1. Touch the right side button of the

Speed Volume Control function, and se-

lect “OFF”, “Low”,or“High” menu. “High”

comes to have a bigger effect.

2. When select “OFF”, speed volume

control function is cancelled.

5-16

! “Graphic Equalizer”

1. Touch the “Set” button of the Graphic

Equalizer function.

2. In this mode, 6 preset equalizer

patterns and 3 customized patterns are

available.

6 preset patterns: “Bass” , “Treb le” ,

“Acoustic”, “Impact”, “Smooth”, “Flat”

3 customized patterns: “SET 1” - “SET 3 ”

3. When customizing the equalizer pat-

tern, press one of SET button and then

press “Adjust” button.

4. Adjust the le vel of each frequency

band by pressing “

” or “ ” button.

! “Sound Restorer”

Select “ON” or “OFF” by the right side

button of the Sound Restorer function.

! “Volume Smoother”

1. Touch the right side button of the

Volume Smoother f unction, and select

“OFF”, “Low”, “Mid ” or “High” menu. “High”

comes to have a bigger effect.

Audio/Basic operation

– CONTINUED –

5-17

Audio/Audio/visual remote controls

2. When select “OFF”, volume smoother

function is cancelled.

! “Virtual Bass”

1. Touch the right side button of the

Virtual Bass function, and select “OFF”,

“Low”, “Mid” or “High” menu. “High” comes

to have a bigger effect.

2. When select “OFF”, virtual bass func-

tion is cancelled.

! Voice command system

1. Press this switch to operate the voice

command system.

. The voice command system and its

list of commands can be operated.

Refer to “Voice c ommand system

operation” F5-104.

Audio/visual remote controls

& Steering switches

Some parts of the audio/visual system can

be adjusted using the switches on the

steering wheel.

No. Switch

“+-” switch

“<>” switch

Mute/Enter switch

Back switch

List switch

“Source” switch

5-18

“+/-” switch

Mode Operation Function

Except list screen

Press Volume up/down

Press and hold Volume up/down continuously

List screen Press

Move cursor up/down

“<>” switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio, SiriusXM

Press Preset channel up/down

Press and hold

Seek up/down continuously

while the switch is being

pressed

aha

Press Content up/down

Press and hold

Reverse the current content

item for 15 seconds/Fast for-

ward the current content item

for 30 seconds

Audio CD, MP3/WMA/AAC

disc, USB, iPod, BT audio

Press Select a track/file

Press and hold Fast forward/rewind

Pandora Press and hold Thumbs up

List screen Press

Move cursor left/right

Audio/Audio/visual remote controls

– CONTINUED –

5-19

Audio/Audio/visual remote controls

Mute/Enter switch

Mode Operation Function

Except list screen Press Audio ON/OFF

List screen Press

Select cursor entry

Back switch

Mode Operation Function

All (except STARLINK) Press Return to the previous screen

All Press and hold

Return to the HOME screen

List switch

Mode Operation Function

All (except STARLINK) Press

Show list screen

“Source” switch

Mode Operation Function

All Press

Change audio modes

NOTE

In the aha, Pandora and STARLINK mode, some operation may be done on the

screen depend on the selected APPS.

5-20

Tips for operating the audio/

visual system

& Operating information

CAUTION

. To avoid damage to the audio/

visual system:

– Be careful not to spill bev-

erages over the audio/visual

system.

– Do not put anything other than

an appropriate disc into the

disc slot.

NOTE

The use of a cellular phone inside or

near the vehicle may cause a noise

from the speakers of the audio/visual

system which you are listening to.

However, this does not indicate a

malfunction.

! Radio

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with the

radio — it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or phone wires can interfere with AM

signals. And of course, radio signals have

a limited range. The farther the vehicle is

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as the vehicle moves.

Here, some common reception problems

that probably do not indicate a problem

with the radio are described.

! FM

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40

km). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by

distortion.

Multi-path: FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for 2 signals to reach

the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If

this happens, the signals will cancel each

other out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering: These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping: If the FM signal being

listened to is interrupted or weakened, and

there is another strong station nearby on

the FM band, the radio may tune in the

second station until the original signal can

be picked up again.

! AM

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere — especially at

night. These reflected signals can inter-

fere with those received directly from the

radio station, causing the radio station to

sound alternately strong and weak.

Station interference: When a reflected

signal and a signal received directly from

a radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static: AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening or electrical

motors. This results in static.

! SiriusXM

. Cargo loaded on th e roof lu ggage

carrier, especially metal objects, may

adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM

Satellite Radio.

. Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization may in-

validate the user’s right to operate the

equipment.

Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system

– CONTINUED –

5-21

Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system

! CD player and disc

. This CD player is intended for use with

4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.

. Extremely high temperatures can keep

the CD player from working. On hot days,

use the air conditioning system to cool the

inside of the vehicle before using the

player.

. Bumpy roads or other vibrations may

make the CD player skip.

. If moisture gets into the CD player, the

discs may not be able to be played .

Remove the discs from the player and

wait until it dries.

WARNING

CD players use an invisible laser

beam which could cause hazardous

radiation exposure if directed out-

side the unit. Be sure to operate the

player correctly.

Audio CDs

. Use only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not

be playable on your player:

– SACD

– dts CD

– Copy-protected CD

– Video CD

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

5-22

Labeled discs

CAUTION

. Do not use special shaped, trans-

parent/translucent, low quality or

labeled discs such as those

shown in the illustrations. The

use of such discs may damage

the player, or it may be impossi-

ble to eject the disc.

. This system is not designed for

use of Dual Discs. Do not use

Dual Discs because they may

cause damage to the player.

. Do not use discs with a protec-

tion ring. The use of such discs

may damage the player, or it may

be impossible to eject the disc.

. Do not use printable discs. The

use of such discs may damage

the player, or it may be impossi-

ble to eject the disc.

. Handle discs carefully, especially when

inserting them. Hold them on the edge and

do not bend them. Avoid getting finger-

prints on them, particularly on the shiny

side.

. Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or

other disc damage could cause the player

to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To

see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the

light.)

. Remove discs from the players when

not in use. Store them in their plastic

cases away from moisture, heat and direct

sunlight.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-

free cloth that has been dampened with

water. Wipe in a straight line from the

center to the edge of the disc (not in

circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free

cloth. Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or anti-static device.

! CD-R/RW discs

. CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been

subject to the “finalizing process” (a

process that allows discs to be played

on a conventional CD player) cannot be

played.

. It may not be possible to play CD-R/

CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD

recorder or a personal computer because

of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on

the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the

Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system

– CONTINUED –

5-23

Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system

lens of the unit.

. It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depend-

ing on the application settings and the

environment . Record with th e corre ct

format. (For details, contact the appropri-

ate application manufacturers of the ap-

plications.)

. CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged

by direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-

peratures or other storage conditions. The

unit may be unable to play some damaged

discs.

. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the

player, playback will begin more slowly

than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.

. Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot

be playe d using the DDCD (Doub le

Density CD) system.

! USB memory device

. USB communication formats: USB

1.1/2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)

. File formats: FAT 16/32

. Correspondence class: Mass storage

class

! iPod

The following iPod

, iPod nano

, iPod

classic

, iPod touch

and iPhone

de-

vices can be used with this system.

Made for

. iPod touch (5th generation)*

. iPod touch (4th generation)

. iPod touch (3rd generation)

. iPod touch (2nd generation)

. iPod touch (1st generation)

. iPod classic

. iPod with video

. iPod nano (7th generation)*

. iPod nano (6th generation)*

. iPod nano (5th generation)

. iPod nano (4th generation)

. iPod nano (3rd generation)

. iPod nano (2nd generation)*

. iPod nano (1st generation)*

. iPhone 5*

. iPhone 4S

. iPhone 4

. iPhone 3GS

. iPhone 3G

. iPhone

*: iPod video not supported

Depending on differences between mod-

els or software versions etc., some mod-

els might be incompatible with this sys-

tem.

! File information

Compatible compressed files (Audio)

Item USB DISC

Compatible

file format

MP3/WMA/AAC

Folders in the

device

Maximum

512

Maximum

255

Files in the

device

Maximum

8000

Maximum

512

Files per

folder

Maximum

255

—

Corresponding sampling frequency

(Audio)

File type Frequency (kHz)

MP3 files:

MPEG 1 LAYER 3

32/44.1/48

MP3 files:

MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3

16/22.05/24

WMA files:

Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)

32/48/64/80/96/128/

160/192

AAC files:

MPEG4/AAC-LC

48/44.1/32/24/22.05/

16/12/11.025/8

5-24

Corresponding bit rates (Audio)

File type Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files:

MPEG 1 LAYER 3

32 - 320

MP3 files:

MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3

8 - 160

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192

WMA files:

Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2)

CBR 32 - 192

AAC files:

MPEG4/AAC-LC

16 - 320

(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)

. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA

(Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Ad-

vanced Audio Coding) are audio compres-

sion standards.

. This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC

files on CD-R, CD-RW discs, USB mem-

ory, and Bluetooth device.

. This system can play disc recordings

compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level

2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file

system.

. When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,

add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/

.wma/.m4a).

. This system plays back files with .mp3/

.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/

AAC files respectively. To prevent noise

and playback errors, use the appropriate

file extension.

. This system can play only the first

session when using multi-session compa-

tible CDs.

. MP3 files are compatible with the ID3

Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3

formats. This system cannot display disc

title, track title and artist name in other

formats.

. WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/

AAC tag that is used in the same way as

an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa-

tion such as track title and artist name.

. The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at

32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.

. This system can play back AAC files

encoded by iTunes.

. The sound quality of MP3/WMA files

generally improves with higher bit rates. In

order to achieve a reasonable level of

sound quality, discs recorded with a bit

rate of at least 128 kbps are recom-

mended.

. The MP3/WMA player does not play

back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded

using packet write data transfer (UDF

format). Discs should be recorded using

“pre-mastering” software rather than pack-

etwrite software.

. M3u playlists are not compatible with

the audio device.

. MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the audio

device.

. The player is compatible with VBR

(Variable Bit Rate).

. When playing back files recorded as

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time

will not be correctly displayed if the fast

forward or reverse operations are used.

. It is not possible to check folders that

do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.

. MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8

levels deep can be played. However, the

start of playback may be delayed when

using discs containing numerous levels of

folders. For this reason, we recommend

creating discs with no more than 2 levels

of folders.

Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system

– CONTINUED –

5-25

Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system

. The play order of the compact disc with

the structure shown above is as follows:

. The order changes depending on the

personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC

encoding software you use.

! Terms

! Packet write

. This is a general term that describes

the process of writing data on-demand to

CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is

written to floppy or hard discs.

! ID3 tag

. This is a method of embedding track-

related information in an MP3 file. This

embedded information can include the

track number, track title, the artist’s name,

the album title, the music genre, the year

of production, comments, cover art and

other data. The contents can be freely

edited using software with ID3 tag editing

functions. Although the tags are restricted

to a number of characters, the information

can be viewed when the track is played

back.

! WMA tag

. WMA files can contain a WMA tag that

is used in the same way as an ID3 tag.

WMA tags carry information such as track

title and artist name.

! ISO 9660 format

. This is the international standard for

the formatting of CD-ROM folders and

files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2

levels of regulations.

. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format

(8 character file names, with a 3 character

file extension. File names must be com-

posed of one-b yte ca pital l etter s and

numbers. The “_” symbol may also be

included.)

. Level 2: The file name can have up to

31 characters (including the separation

mark “.” and file extension). Each folder

must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

! MP3

. MP3 is an audio compression standard

determined by a working group (MPEG) of

the ISO (International Standard Organiza-

tion). MP3 compresses audio data to

about 1/10 the size of that on conventional

discs.

! WMA

. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an

audio compression format developed by

Microsoft

. It compresses files into a size

smaller than that of MP3 files. The

decoding formats for WMA files are Ver.

7, 8 and 9.

. This product is protected by certain

intellectual property rights of Microsof t

Corporation and thir d partie s. Use or

distribution of such technology outside of

this product is prohibited without a license

from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft

subsidiary and third parties.

! AAC

. AAC is short for Advanced Audio

Coding and refers to an audio compres-

sion technology standard used with

5-26

MPEG2 and MPEG4.

! Error messages

Mode Message Explanation

“Disc read error.”

. This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files

are included in the disc.

. This indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged,

or it was inserted upside down. Clean the

disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc

which is not playable is inserted.

“Please eject disc.”

There is a trouble inside the system.

Eject the disc.

USB

“Media not connected. Press

AUDIO/TUNE knob to exit.”

This indicates a problem in the USB memory or

its connection. Refer to “Connecting and dis-

connecting a USB memory/portable device”

F5-7.

“No audio file.”

This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are

included in the USB memory.

“Unplayable file”

This indicates that the accessed file cannot play

back.

iPod

“Media not connected”

This indicates that a USB device/iPod is not

connected to the system.

“No audio file”

This indicates that there is no audio file in the

connected iPod.

“Unplayable file”

This indicates that the accessed file cannot play

back.

NOTE

If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system

5-27

Audio/Useful information

Useful information

& SiriusXM Data Service*

Data service information, which is com-

prised of traffic information and weather

information, can be received via the

SiriusXM Radio.

To receive the data service information in

the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM

Satellite Radio service is necessary. Refer

to “SiriusXM Satellite Radio” F5-43.

Content set to use the SiriusXM data

service is reset when personal information

is initialized.

No. Function

Option key: Perform the SXM

setting. See below.

Scan key: Search for a channel

which the direction of higher fre-

quency from current frequency. Re-

produce the channel that can re-

ceive by five seconds.

List key: A list is displayed. There

are three types of lists (“Presets”,

“Categories”,or“All Channels”) are

available.

“Presets”: Preset channels are dis-

played in a list.

“Categories”: The channels of the

selected category are displayed in a

list.

“All Channels”: All selectable chan-

nels are displayed in a list.

Info key: Display the contents in-

formation of a channel receiving.

No. Function

Presets tab: Presets list (30 chan-

nels max.) is displayed.

Categories tab: Categories list is

displayed.

All Channels tab: All channels list is

displayed.

Direct Tune tab: Change to the

Direct Tune display. See below.

Return to the previous display.

Return to the playback display.

! SXM setting option

1. A option menu screen is displayed

when touch the Option key.

5-28

Option menu screen

No. Function

Channel Lock: Set the lock function

of each channel. Input the password

is necessary for operation.

Channel Lock Password: Set the

password of the lock function.

2. A password input screen is displayed

when touch the “Set” button of the

Channel Lock function.

Password input screen

3. When the input password is approved,

change to the lock channel selection

screen.

Lock channel selection screen

4. In the channel list, touch the channel

that should be locked.

Audio/Useful information

– CONTINUED –

5-29

Audio/Useful information

! Direct Tune

1. A channel input screen is displayed

when touch the Direct Tune tab.

2. Input an y numb er and press OK,

receive the channel which input.

& STARLINK

The STARLINK function allows the system

to link with a smartphone using Bluetooth.

! Displaying STARLINK information

1. Press APPS key on the home screen,

or press APPS button, the APPS screen is

displayed.

2. If you press “STARLINK” on the APPS

screen, the STARLINK disclaimer screen

or the error screen is displayed.

No. Function

Check: Go to APPS screen.

Cancel: STARLINK disclaimer

screen is disappeared and return to

the previous screen.

5-30

STARLINK disclaimer error screen

The error screen will be displayed due to

one of the following possible reasons.

. Your smartphone and the system

has not been connected via USB (for

iPhone) or Bluetooth (for Android).

. STARLINK APPS has not been

activated.

3. If you press

Check

(Check) on the

STARLINK disclaimer screen, the APPS

main screen will be displayed.

No. Function

Select to go to the Music APPS

screen.

Select to go to the News APPS

screen.

Select to go to the Calender APPS

screen.

Select to go to the Weather APPS

screen.

Select to go to the iHeartRadio

APPS screen.

Error screen that is displayed while using

STARLINK

The error screen will be displayed while

using STARLINK due to one of the

following possible reasons.

. When your smartphone has no service

or the Bluetooth communication is not

possible.

. When your smartphone is turned off.

. When the STARLINK APPS is quit.

. When connection to the STARLINK

server is not possible.

. When a problem occurs other than a

server error.

NOTE

When using the STARLINK function, a

disclaimer screen will be displayed. Be

sure to fully read the contents before

Audio/Useful information

– CONTINUED –

5-31

Audio/Radio operation

using the function.

NOTE

Connection method

iPhone: USB

Android: Bluetooth

Supported devices

iPhone: iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5

(iOS Ver. 5.1 or later)

Android: (OS Ver. 4.0 or later)

Radio operation

& AM/FM radio

! Overview

Select

(AM) or

(FM) on the

“Select Audio Source (Select Audio

Source)” screen. Refer to “Selecting an

audio source” F5-14.

5-32

Control screen

Control panel

Audio/Radio operation

– CONTINUED –

5-33

Audio/Radio operation

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to change the FM band.

HD Radio indicator.

The indicator on the top right of the

screen changes according to the

reception condition of HD Radio.

Select to display a station list.

Select to scan radio channels.

This function enables searching for

receivable stations automatically,

and tunes in to a frequency for 5

seconds if a station is found. When

the 5-second period has elapsed, the

system searches for the next recei-

vable station again, and tunes in to

the frequency for 5 seconds.

Option key. Select to open the

Option screen.

If you press a key for less than 1.5

seconds, the system tunes to the

stored frequency.

If you press a key for more than 1.5

seconds, the system stores the

frequency to the selected preset

channel. Refer to “Presetting a sta-

tion” F5-36.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation”

F5-13.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

No. Function

Turn to step up/down frequencies.

Turn to move up/down the list. Also,

the knob can be used to enter

selections on the list screens by

pressing.

Press to select an audio mode.

Select to seek for a station/channel.

Select and hold for continuous seek.

NOTE

. The radio automatically changes to

stereo reception when a stereo broad-

cast is received.

. The radio automatically blends to an

HD Radio signal in AM or FM where

available.

. Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio

Technology enables local radio stations to

broadcast a clean digital signal. A M

sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds

like a CD.

! HD caution list

The following caution messages appear.

5-34

The message “Acquiring” appears in the following situations.

Caution Contents Case

Conditions when caution

disappears

This caution message appears

when the system tries the

digital reception.

When acquiring digital data

while receiving a digital broad-

cast and SPS station.

. When the reception in digital

of the SPS station is con-

firmed.

. When the system deter-

mined that the SPS station

could not be received.

. When the SPS broadcast is

ended (stopped) by the

radio station while receiv-

ing SPS.

Audio/Radio operation

– CONTINUED –

5-35

Audio/Radio operation

The message “HD Channel is unavailable” appears in the following situations.

Caution Contents Case

Conditions when caution

disappears

This caution message appears

when the digital reception is not

possible.

. When the system

determined that the SPS

station could not be re-

ceived while receiving a

digital broadcast and SPS

station.

. When the SPS broadcast

is ended (stopped) by the

radio station while receiv-

ing SPS.

. When the status is changed

to acquiring digital data

because the reception

condition of SPS station

has improved.

. When the received station is

changed.

! Presetting a station

Radio mode has a mix preset function,

which can store up to 36 stations from any

of the AM, FM or SAT bands.

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. If you press a key for more than 1.5

seconds, the system stores the frequency

to the selected preset channel.

. To change the preset station to a

different one, select and hold the

preset station.

5-36

! Selecting a station from the list

A station list can be displayed.

1. Select

2. Select the desired station and then

select

Back

(Back) or

(Close).

! Update the station list

1. Select

Update Station List

(Update

Station List) on the station list screen and

the following screen will be displayed.

Cancel

(Cancel): Select to cancel

the manual update.

(OK): Select to execute the

manual update.

NOTE

. The audio system sound is muted

during refresh operation.

. In some situations, it may take some

time to update the station list.

! Bookmark the list

1. Select

Bookmark

(Bookmark) on the

station list screen and the following screen

will be displayed.

2. If you select an item from the book-

mark list, the following image will be

displayed.

3. When you call up bookmark informa-

tion, a QR code converted from the

bookmark information will be displayed

Audio/Radio operation

– CONTINUED –

5-37

Audio/Radio operation

on the screen. You can access a URL by

reading the QR code using a smartphone,

etc.

! Delete bookmark the list

1. Select

Delete Bookmark

(Delete

Bookmark) on the station list screen and

the following screen will be displayed.

2. If you select an item from the book-

mark list, the item will be deleted from the

bookmark list.

3. If you select

Delete All

(Delete All), all

bookmark items in the bookmark list will

be deleted.

. FM stations can provide additional

digital-only audio programming on HD2/

HD3 Channels.

! About HD Radio

technology

HD Radio Technology manufactured un-

der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-

tion. Foreign Patents. HD Radio

and the

HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are

proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital

Corp.

HD Radio

Technology is the digital

evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your

radio product has a special receiver which

allows it to receive digital broadcasts

(where available) in addition to the analog

broadcasts it already rece ives. Digital

broadcasts have better sound quality than

analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts

5-38

provide free, crystal clear audio with no

static or distortion. For more information,

and a guide to available radio stations and

programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.

! Available HD Radio

technology

! Multicast

On the FM radio frequency most digital

stations have “multiple” or supplemental

programs on one FM station.

1. Select

Sub CH

(Sub CH) on the

control screen and the following screen

will be displayed.

2. The indication that shows whether the

current broadcast is digital or analog is

displayed on the top right of the control

screen.

3. Select the desired channel.

. Turning the “AUDIO/TUNE” knob

can also select the desired multicast

channel.

! Preserving a music information

Tag information in the music broadcasting

is preserved in the system and transmits

to an iPod.

1. If you select a tag in the control screen

while receiving HD Radio, the tag setting

screen will be displayed.

Audio/Radio operation

– CONTINUED –

5-39

Audio/Radio operation

2. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device” F5-7.

. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is

not turned on.

. Onc e an iPod is connected, the

music tag moves from the radio into

the iPod.

. When the iPod is connected to

iTunes, the “tagged” information of

the songs which were tagged while

listening to the radio can be viewed.

Then a user may decide to purchase

the song or CD/Album which had been

listened to on their radio.

In addition, the following caution messages appear.

Caution Contents Display Message

If there is not enough memory in the digital audio “Tag storage full”

If the same information is stored in the digital

audio

“Already Stored”

If the store process in the digital audio failed “Storing Failed”

If there is not enough memory in the iPod “iPod full Tags cannot be stored”

If the system starts to transmit music information

to an iPod

“Starting to transfer the Tag files.”

If the transmitting process of music information

to an iPod failed

“Transferring Failed”

If the transmitting process of music information

to an iPod is successful

“X Tag(s) Sent” (X = number of transmitted

information) will be displayed.

5-40

NOTE

. The tag informati on can n ot be

preserved while scanning or caching

the radio station.

. If tagging the music information

fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag was

unsuccessful. (Saving the HD Radio

tag was unsuccessful.)” will be dis-

played on the screen. If this occurs, tag

the information again.

. HD Radio

stations can be preset.

. An orange

HD)

(HD)) will be dis-

played on the screen when in digital.

The

HD)

(HD)) will first appear in a gray

color indicating the station is indeed

(an analog and) a digital station. Once

the digital signal is acquired, the logo

will change to a bright orange color.

. The song title and artist name will

appear on the screen when available by

the radio station. The radio station can

send album pictures when available.

. As a user works through the analog

radio stations, (where applicable) the

radio receiver will automatically tune

from an analog signal to a digital signal

within 5 seconds.

. Program Service Data: Presents song

name, artist, station IDs, and other rele-

vant data streams.

. iTunes Tagging provides you the op-

portu nity to discover a wide range of

content and the means to “tag” that

content for later review and purchase from

the iTunes Store. Also refer to the Apple

Automotive specifications for implement-

ing iTunes Tagging.

. Visual information related to content

being played on your HD Radio receiver,

such as Album Art, historical photographs,

still art from live broadcasts, among other

related content.

Audio/Radio operation

– CONTINUED –

5-41

Audio/Radio operation

! Troubleshooting guide

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time alignment - a user may hear

a short period of programming replayed or an

echo, stutter or skip.

The radio stations analog and digital volume is

not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame

mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact

the radio station.

Sound fades, blending in and out.

Radio is shifting between analog and digital

audio.

Reception issue, may clear-up as the vehicle

continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the

“HD Radio

” button off can force radio in an

analog audio.

Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3

multicast channel had been playing.

The radio does not have access to digital

signals at the moment.

This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal

returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new

station.

Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/

HD3 multicast channel preset.

The digital multicast content is not available until

HD Radio

broadcast can be decoded and

make the audio available. This takes up to 7

seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to

become available.

Text information does not match the present

song audio.

Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio

_station_experiences.

No text information shown for the present

selected frequency.

Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;

www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio

_station_experiences.

5-42

& SiriusXM Satellite Radio

! Overview

Select

SiriusXM

(SiriusXM) on the “Select

Audio Sou rce (Sel ect Audi o Sou rce)”

screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-14.

Control screen

Control panel

Audio/Radio operation

– CONTINUED –

5-43

Audio/Radio operation

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Display the contents information of a

channel receiving.

Select to display each list.

Search for a channel from the

direction of a higher frequency than

the current frequency and play each

channel that can be received for five

seconds.

Option key. Select to open the

Option screen.

Return to the control screen.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation”

F5-13.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

Turn right to step up channels and

turn left to step down channels.

Select to step up/down channels.

Select and hold to step up/down

channels fast.

No. Function

Return to the All channels list.

Return to the control screen.

Press each tab key to switch the list

screen.

Presets tab: Presets list is displayed.

Categories tab: Categories list is

displayed.

All Channels tab: All channels list is

displayed.

Direct Tune tab: Change to the

Direct Tune display.

! How to subscribe to SiriusXM Sa-

tellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in

the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM

Satellite Radio service is necessary.

A SiriusXM Satel lite Radio is a tuner

designed exclusively to receive broad-

casts provided under a separate subscrip-

tion.

! How to subscribe

It is necessary to enter into a separate

service agreement with SiriusXM Satellite

Radio in order to receive satellite broad-

cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-

tional activation and service subscription

fees apply that are not included in the

purchase price of the vehicle and digital

satellite tuner.

. For complete information on subscrip-

tion rates and terms, or to subscribe to

SiriusXM Satellite Radio:

Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call

1-877-209-0079.

5-44

WARNING

. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services

— Legal Disclaimers and Warn-

ings

– Fees and Taxes — Subscrip-

tion fee, taxes, one time acti-

vation fee, and other fees may

apply. Subscription fee is con-

sumer only. All fees and pro-

gramming subject to change.

Subscriptions subject to Cus-

tomer Agreement available at

www.siriusxm.ca XM service

only available in Canada.

Explicit Language Notice —

Channels with frequent expli-

cit l anguage are indicated

with an “XL” preceding the

channel name. Channel block-

ing is available for SiriusXM

Satellite Radio receivers by

notifying XM at;

Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call-

ing

1-877-209-0079

CAUTION

. It is prohibited to copy, decom-

pile, disassemble, reverse engi-

neer, hack, manipulate, or other-

wise make available any technol-

ogy or software incorporated in

receivers compatible with the

SiriusXM Satellite Radio System

or that support the XM website,

the Online Service or any of its

content. Furthermore, the

AMBE

voice compression soft-

ware included in this product is

protected by intellectual property

rights includ ing patent rights,

copyrights, and trade secrets of

Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

. Note: this applies to SiriusXM

Satellite Radio receivers only

and not XM Ready devices.

NOTE

. SiriusXM Satellite Services — De-

scriptions

– Only SiriusXM Satellite Radio

brings you more of what you love,

all in one place. Get ove r 175

channels, including commercial-

free music, plus the best sports,

news, talk, comedy and entertain-

ment. Welcome to the world of

satellite radio. More information

about SiriusXM Satellite Radio is

available online at www.siriusxm.

ca.

. SiriusXM Satellite Services — Sub-

scription Instructions

– For SiriusXM Services requiring

a subscription (such as SiriusXM

Satellite Radio, and some Infotain-

ment & data services), the following

paragraph shall be included.

Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio

and some Infotainment & data ser-

vices monthly subscriptions sold

separately after trial period. Sub-

scription fee is consumer only. All

fees and programming subject to

change. Subscriptions are subject

to the Customer Agreement avail-

able at www.siriusxm.ca. Sirius, XM

and all related marks and logos are

trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

All other marks, channel names and

logos are the property of their

respective owners.

For more information, program

schedules, and to subscribe or

extend subscription after compli-

mentary trial period; more informa-

tion is available at:

Visit www.siriusxm.ca or calling

Audio/Radio operation

– CONTINUED –

5-45

Audio/Radio operation

1-877-209-0079

. SiriusXM Satellite Radio is solely

responsible for the quality, availability

and content of the satellite radio ser-

vices provided, which are subject to

the terms and conditions of the

SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer ser-

vice agreement.

. Customers should have their radio

ID ready; the radio ID can be found by

tuning to “Ch 000” on the radio. For

details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO

ID” below.

. All fees and programming are the

responsibility of SiriusXM Satellite

Radio and are subject to change.

! Displaying the Radio ID

Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a

unique radio ID. The radio ID is required

when activating an SiriusXM Satellite

Services or when reporting a problem.

1. If “Ch 000” is sele cted using the

“AUDIO/TUNE” knob, the ID code, will

be displayed.

2. If you touch the Option key, the Radio

ID will be displayed on the Option screen.

! Presetting a channel

1. The Presets list is displayed via either

of the following procedures.

. When you press the List key in the

SiriusXM main screen (if the list that

was displayed the last time is Presets).

. When you select the Categories tab

(star icon) in each list screen.

2. The current channel is stored if you

press and hold the Preset list key for 1.5

seconds. You can store up to 30 channels

(A beep sounds when a channel stored).

. The “Playing” icon is displayed for

the currently selected channel.

5-46

! Selecting a channel from the list

1. The Categories list is displayed via

either of the following procedures.

. When you press the List key in the

SiriusXM main screen (if the list that

was displayed the last time is Cate-

gories).

. When you select the Categories tab

(folder icon) in each list screen.

2. Each channel list is displayed when

you select each category item.

In addition, the following caution messages appear.

Caution Contents Display Message

An update to your SiriusXM subscription has

been received by the SiriusXM tuner. Press any

button to continue.

Subscription Update

Press OK to Continue

This channel is not a valid SiriusXM channel.

The channel number has been entered incor-

rectly, or the channel was removed from the

SiriusXM channel lineup.

Channel XXX Not Available

(“XXX” refers to the selected channel number.)

This channel is not included in your SiriusXM

subscription plan.

Channel XXX not subscribed.

Call SiriusXM to subscribe.

(“XXX” refers to the selected channel number.)

The selected channel has been locked by the

parental controls.

A prompt to enter the unlock code will appear.

Ch Locked

Lock Code?

Ensure the SiriusXM antenna cable is connected

to the SiriusXM tuner correctly.

Check the SiriusXM antenna wire for breaks or

sharp bends.

Replace the antenna if necessary.

Check Antenna

The vehicle must be outside, and the antenna

must have a clear view of the southern sky.

No Signal

NOTE

Contact the SiriusXM Listener Care Center at 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

Audio/Radio operation

5-47

Audio/Media operation

Media operation

& CD

! Overview

The CD operation screen can be reached

by the following methods:

. Insert a disc. Refer to “Loading and

unloading a disc ” F5-6.

. Select

(CD) on the “Select Audio

Source (Select Audio Source)” screen.

Refer to “Selecting an audio source” F5-

14.

5-48

Control screen

Left: Audio CD, Right: MP3/WMA/AAC disc

Control panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display Trick Play Settings

screen.

Audio CD

Select to display a track list.

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

Select to display a folder list

Shows progress.

The tracks in the disc are played

back for ten seconds each from the

beginning of the track.

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

Select to choose a folder.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation”

F5-13.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/

off.

Press to eject a disc.

Disc slot

Turn to select a track/file.

Press to select an audio mode.

Select to select a track/file.

Select and hold to fast forward/

rewind.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-49

Audio/Media operation

Control screen (Trick Play)

Left: Audio CD, Right: MP3/WMA/AAC disc

No. Function

Select to start 1 Track Repeat.

Select to start Repeat All.

Select to start Shuffle All.

Return to the control screen.

Select to start Folder Repeat.

Select to start Shuffle Folder.

NOTE

. If a disc contains CD-DA files and

MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA

files can be played back.

. If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the

title of the disc and track will be

displayed. Up to 32 characters can be

displayed.

. If the disc contains no CD-TEXT,

only the track number would be dis-

played on the screen.

. If you press the “Mute” switch on

the steering wheel during playback, the

track pauses. If you press the “Mute”

switch once again, the playback will

resume.

5-50

& USB memory

Audio files on the USB memory can be

played back.

! Overview

The USB Audio playback screen can be

reached by the following methods:

. Connect a USB memory. Refer to

“Connect ing and disconnectin g a USB

memory/portable device” F5-7.

. Select

USB

(USB) on the “Select

Audio Sou rce (Sel ect Audi o Sou rce)”

screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio

source” F5-14.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-51

Audio/Media operation

Control screen

Control panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display Trick Play Settings

screen.

Select to display Folders List.

Shows progress.

The tracks in the disc are played back

ten seconds each from the beginning

of the track.

Select to choose a folder.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation”

F5-13.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn to select a file/track.

Press to select an audio mode.

Select to select a file/track.

Select and hold to fast forward/re-

wind.

5-52

Control screen (Trick Play)

No. Function

Select to start 1 Track Repeat.

Select to start Folder Repeat.

Select to start Repeat All.

Return to the control screen.

Select to start Shuffle All.

Select to start Shuffle Folder.

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the USB memory while

driving.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-53

Audio/Media operation

CAUTION

. Do not leave your portable player

in the car. In particular, high

temperatures inside the vehicle

may damage the portable player.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the por-

table player while it is connected

as this may damage the portable

player or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

NOTE

If you press the “Mute” switch on the

steering wheel during playback, the

track pauses. If you press the “Mute”

switch once again, the playback will

resume.

& iPod

! Overview

TheiPodoperationscreencanbe

reached by the following methods:

. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting

and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-

ble device” F5-7.

. Select

iPod

(iPod) on the “Select

Audio Sourc e (Sel ect Au dio So urce)”

screen. Refer to “Sele cting an audio

source” F5-14.

5-54

Control screen

Control panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display Trick Play Settings

screen.

Select to display iPod List.

Shows progress.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation” F5-

13.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn to select a track/file.

Press to select an audio mode.

Select to select a track/file.

Select and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-55

Audio/Media operation

Control screen (Trick Play)

No. Function

Select to start 1 Track Repeat.

Select to start Repeat All.

Return to the control screen.

Select to start Shuffle Track.

Select to start Shuffle Album.

Select to turn off Shuffle.

5-56

Control screen (Play List)

No. Function

Select to display the Playlist.

Select to display Song List.

Select to display Artists List.

Select to display Albums List.

Select to open Others List.

Select to open Genres List.

Select to open Composers List.

Select to open Audiobooks List.

Select to open Podcasts List.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-57

Audio/Media operation

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the iPod while driving.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your portable player

in the car. In particular, high

temperatures inside the vehicle

may damage the portable player.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the por-

table player while it is connected

as this may damage the portable

player or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable player or its terminal.

NOTE

. When an iPod is connected using a

genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts

charging its battery.

. When an iPod is connected and the

audio source is changed to iPod mode,

the iPod will resume playing from the

same point it was last used.

. Depending on the iPod that is con-

nected to the system, certain functions

may not be available.

. Files/tracks selected by operating a

connected iPod may not be recognized

or displayed properly.

. If you press the “Mute” switch on

the steering wheel during playback, the

track pauses. If you press the “Mute ”

switch once again, the playback will

resume.

& Bluetooth audio

The Bluetooth audio system enables

users to enjoy listening to music that is

played on a portable player on the vehicle

speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth, a

wireless data system capable of playing

portable audio music without cables. If

your device does not support Bluetooth,

the Bluetooth audio system will not func-

tion.

! Overview

Select

Bluetooth Audio

(Bluetooth Audio)

on the “Select Audio Source (Select Audio

Source)” screen. Refer to “Selecting an

audio source” F5-14.

Depending on the type of portable player

connected, some functions may not be

available and/or the screen may look

differently than shown in this manual.

5-58

Control screen

Control panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to display Trick Play Settings

screen.

Select to display as a list (for the

models with AVRCP Ver. 1.4 or high-

er).

Select to play back or pause a track.

The track pauses when pressed dur-

ing playback and plays back when

pressed during pause.

Select to open Bluetooth Settings.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation” F5-

13.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn to select a track.

Press to select an audio mode

Select to select a track.

Select and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-59

Audio/Media operation

Control screen (Play List)

No. Function

Select to start 1 Track Repeat.

Select to start Repeat All.

Return to the control screen.

Select to start Shuffle Track.

Select to start Group Shuffle.

Select to turn off Shuffle.

5-60

WARNING

. Do not operate the player’s con-

trols or connect to the Bluetooth

audio system while driving.

. Your audio unit is fitted with

Bluetooth antennas. People with

implantable cardiac pacemakers,

cardiac resynchronization ther-

apy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should

maintain a reasonable distance

between themselves and the

Bluetooth antennas. The radio

waves may affect the operation

of such devices.

. Before using Bluetooth devices,

users of any electrical medical

device other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-

synchronizatio n thera py-pace-

makers or implantable cardiover-

ter defibrillators should consult

the manufacturer of the device

for information about its opera-

tion under the influence of radio

waves. Radio waves could have

unexpected effects on the opera-

tion of such medical devices.

CAUTION

Do not leave your portable player in

the vehicle. In particular, high tem-

peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the portable player.

NOTE

. Depending on the Bluetooth device

that is connected to the system, the

music may start playing when selecting

while it is paused. Conversely, the

music may pause when selecting

while it is playing.

. In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not function:

– The Bluetooth device is turned

off.

– The Bluetooth device is not con-

nected.

– The Bluetooth device has a low

battery.

. Itmaytaketimetoconnectthe

phone when Bluetooth audio is being

played.

. For operating the portable player,

see the instruction manual that comes

with it.

. If the Bluetooth device is discon-

nected due to poor reception from the

Bluetooth network when the ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion, the system will automatically

reconnect to the portable player.

. If the Bluetooth device is discon-

nected on purpose, such as it was

turned off, this does not happen.

Reconnect the portable player manu-

ally.

. Bluetooth device information is re-

gistered when the Bluetooth device is

connected to the Bluetooth audio sys-

tem. When selling or disposing of the

vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio

information from the system. Refer to

“Other settings” F5-11.

! Connecting a Bluetooth device

To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is

necessary to register a Bluetooth device

with the system.

Registering an additional device

1. Select

Select Add

(Select Add) on the

Bluetooth audio control screen.

2. For more information: Refer to “Regis-

tering a Bluetooth device” F5-81.

Selecting a registered device

1. Select

Select Device

(Select Device)

on the Bluetooth audio control screen.

2. For more information: Refer to “Con-

necting a Bluetooth device” F5-82.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-61

Audio/Media operation

& aha

by HARMAN

aha is a cloud-based application that

connects to the system and gives you

access to your favorite web content safely

and easily. There are over 30,000 stations

spanning internet radio, personalized mu-

sic, audiobooks, Facebook, Twitter, res-

taurant and hotel searches, weather and

more. For more about aha, go to the aha

site (http://www.aharadio.com).

When connecting iPhone and iPod touch

or Android devices with the aha applica-

tion installed, you can control, view, and

hear aha content through the system.

In order to connect to this system, use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and

Bluetooth for Android devices.

In this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch or

Android devices will be referred to as a

smartphone.

! Overview

Control screen

Control panel

5-62

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to open Station List.

Select to fast forward the current con-

tent item by 30 seconds.

Select to display the Contents List of

the selected station.

Select to make a phone call to the

current content item.

A phone number is distributed depend-

ing on content items.

This feature is available only in these

cases.

Select to play back or pause a track.

The track pauses when pressed during

playback and plays back when pressed

during pause.

Select to set Thumbs Up.

Select to set Thumbs Down.

Select to start the playback from the

beginning of the content in the target

station.

Select to rewind the current content

item by 15 seconds.

Select to display the station operation

screen.

Press to select an audio mode.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation” F5-

13.

No. Function

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn to display the next/previous con-

tent item.

Press to select an audio mode

Select to display the next/previous

content item.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-63

Audio/Media operation

Control screen (Station Display)

No. Function

Select to display Preset List.

Return to the control screen.

Select to display Nearby List.

5-64

WARNING

. Do not connect or operate the

smartphone while driving.

. Be sure to park the vehicle in a

safe location before connecting

or operating the smartphone.

CAUTION

. Do not leave your smartphone in

the car. In particular, high tem-

peratures inside the vehicle may

damage the smartphone.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the

smartphone while it is connected

as this may damage the smart-

phone or its terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

smartphone or its terminal.

NOTE

. For safety reasons, certain func-

tions are not avail able while your

vehicle is in motion.

. In order to maximize signal recep-

tion, performance and precision of the

smartphone, please ensure the smart-

phone is placed as close to the system

as possible, while ensuring it is stowed

and secure while driving.

. Use USB cables of iPhone/iPod

touch accessories.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position, the battery of

the connected iPhone/iPod touch is

charged.

. iPhone/iPod touch may not be re-

cognized when the ignition switch is in

the “ACC” or “ON” position. In this

case, remove the iPhone/iPod touch

and reconnect it.

. The accuracy of the displayed in-

formation or the signal reception per-

formance depends on the smartphone

or the connected device, and it’s wire-

less connection.

. Since the aha application uses sig-

nals from GPS satellites and wireless

communication lines, it may not work

properly in the following locations.

– In a tunnel

– In underground parking lots

– Outside wireless communication

range, such as some countryside

areas

– Where the wireless communica-

tion network is congested, or where

communications are restricted

. Depending on the circumstances

and environment, the signal may be

weak or not be received. In such cases,

an error may occur.

. Top 35 entries in the preset station

list on the smartphone are displayed.

When there are more than 35 entries in

the preset station list, change the order

of the entries in the list on the smart-

phone. You can change the priority of

your preset stations within the aha

application (after disconnected from

this system) to modify the station list

shown on the screen. Please see your

smartphone aha application “Edit Pre-

sets (in Main menu)” to modify this list.

. For operating the smartphone, see

the instruction manual that comes with

it.

. If there are multiple music files

stored on your iPhone or iPod touch,

it may take some time until playback

starts.

. Playback may be intermittent when

youswitchtostreamingBluetooth

audio from aha on your smartphone

device.

. When conne cting the device via

Bluetooth, the communication speed

may become slower than via USB.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-65

Audio/Media operation

! Before using aha application

In order to use the aha application on this

system, the application must be installed

on the smartphone.

! Settings required to use aha

application

. Search and download the aha applica-

tion from your smartphone app store.

– iPhone and iPod touch: Apple App

Store via iTunes

– Android device: Google Play Store

. Create an account and login to the aha

application on the smartphone.

NOTE

Please use the latest version of the aha

application.

! About app-based connected con-

tent

Requirements for using the connected

content services of the aha application

on this system.

. Latest version of the system is compa-

tible with connected content application(s)

for the smartphone, available from aha,

downloaded to your smartphone.

. A c urrent account with a wireless

content service provider.

. A smartphone data plan: If the data

plan for your smartphone does not provide

for unlimited da ta usage , additi onal

charges from your carrier may apply for

accessing app-based connected content

via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi, or 4G LTE wireless

networks.

. Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G,

Wi-Fi, or 4G LTE networks.

NOTE

. Changes to product specifications

may result in differences between the

content of the manual and features of

the product.

. Be careful not to exceed the data

usage limits for your smartphone.

Doing so will result in additional data

usage charges from your phone car-

rier.

. Access to app-based connected

content will depend on the availability

of wireless cellular and/or Wi-Fi net-

work coverage for the purpose of

allowing your smartphone to connect

to the internet.

. Service availability may be geogra-

phically limited by region. Consult the

wireless connected content service

provider for additional information.

. Ability of this product to access

connected content is subject to change

without notice and could be affected by

any of the following: compatibili ty

issues with future firmware versions

of the smartphone; co mpatibility is-

sues with future versions of the con-

nected content application(s) for the

smartphone; changes to or disconti-

nuation of the connected content ap-

plication(s) or service by its provider.

. Communi cation and phone c all

charges for smartphones should be

paid by the wireless subscriber.

. If you lose the data in a smartphone

or other device while using it with the

system, no compensation will be given

for the lost data.

. Fuji Heavy Industries makes no

guarantee regarding the content pro-

vided by aha.

. aha may not work due to factors on

smartphones, smartphone applications

or stations. Fuji Heavy Industries is not

responsible for it.

5-66

! About the supported devices

This system supports the following devices.

For iPhone/iPod touch users

Type Generation Firmware version or OS

iPhone

iPhone 3G iOS 4.2.x

iPhone 3GS iOS 6.1.x

iPhone 4 iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 4S iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5 iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5C iOS 7.0.x

iPhone 5S iOS 7.0.x

iPod touch

iPod touch iOS 3.1.x

iPod touch 2 iOS 4.2.x

iPod touch 3 iOS 5.1.x

iPod touch 4 iOS 6.1.x

iPod touch 5

iOS 7.0.x

NOTE

Note that the warranty does not apply if an unsupported iPhone/iPod touch is connected.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-67

Audio/Media operation

For Android device users

Android OS Specification Profile

Android Ver. 2.2 or Ver. 2.3

Bluetooth Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher

(Ver. 2.0 + EDR or higher is recommended)

. aha Connect Binary API over SPP

. Digital audio by A2DP

NOTE

The available functions may vary depending on the type of Android device.

5-68

! Using aha application

Ifyouconnectasmartphonetothis

system after startin g a supported aha

application on the smartphone, you can

display and operate the aha application

displayed on the smartphone on the

system screen.

1. Run the aha application on you r

smartphone.

2. Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the

USB port or connect the Android device

by utilizing the Bluetooth connection (SPP

and A2DP profile).

. For details about connecting an

iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect-

ing and disconnecting a USB memory/

portable device” F5-7.

. For details about registering or con-

necting an Android device: Refer to

“Registering/connecting Bluetooth

device” F5-78.

Press AUDIO/TUNE knob twice to switch

between iPhone and Android.

3. Select “aha” on the “Select Audio

Source (Select Audio Source)” screen.

Refer to “Basic operation” F5-13.

Select “aha” on the “Apps (APPS)” screen.

Refer to “STARLINK” F5-30.

4. Check that the top screen is displayed.

5. Select the desired station.

6. Check that the station operation

screen is displayed.

. Main functions of the station opera-

tion screen button: Refer to “Station

operation screen buttons” F5-70.

. For details on the services or the

operations, check the aha site

(http://www.aharadio.com) on the in-

ternet.

NOTE

. When iPhone/iPod touch and An-

droid devices are connec ted at the

same time, iPhone/iPod touch is prior-

itized.

. The following operations are not

available on this system. Perform these

operations on the smartphone.

– Add/Reorder/Delete stations

– Login to Facebook/Twitter

. For the aha function, the following

touch screen gestures are not avail-

able.

– Multi-touch operation

– Double-tap

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-69

Audio/Media operation

! Station operation screen buttons

Button Function

Select to start playback.

Select to pause playback.

Select to stop playback.

Select to upload “Like” informa-

tion to the application server. To

cancel “Like” information that is

being uploaded to the server,

select this button again.

Select to upload “Dislike” infor-

mation to the application server.

To cancel “Dislike” information

that is being uploaded to the

server, select this button again.

Select to make a phone call to

the current content item.

Select to start the playback from

the beginning of the content in

the target station.

Select to rewind the current

content item by 15 seconds.

Select to fast forward the current

content item by 30 seconds.

NOTE

The button display will vary depending

on each station or content item.

& AUX

! Overview

The AUX operation screen can be

reached by the following methods:

. Connect a portable audio device. Refer

to “Connecting and disconnecting a USB

memory/portable device” F5-7.

. Select

AUX

(AUX) on the “Select

Audio Sourc e (Sel ect Au dio So urce)”

screen. Refer to “Sele cting an audio

source” F5-14.

5-70

Control screen

Control panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to adjust the audio gain level.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation”

F5-13.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

Press to select an audio mode.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-71

Audio/Media operation

Control screen (Option Display)

No. Function

Select to adjust the audio gain level.

Select High, Mid, or Low for the audio

gain level.

The High setting has greater effect.

Select to close the list.

5-72

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the portable audio device

while driving.

CAUTION

. Do not leave portable audio de-

vice in the vehicle. The tempera-

ture inside the vehicle may be-

come high, resulting in damage

to the player.

. Do not push down on or apply

unnecessary pressure to the por-

table audio device while it is

connected as this may damage

the portable audio device or its

terminal.

. Do not insert foreign objects into

the port as this may damage the

portable audio device or its term-

inal.

& Pandora

Pandora is an application for a smart-

phone. This can automatically select and

play recommended tracks.

By rating the track currently playing, tracks

that better match your preference will be

recommended.

In order to connect to this system, use a

USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and

Bluetooth for Android devices.

Depending on differences between mod-

els or software version etc., some models

might be incompatible with this system.

This function is not available if the

Pandora application has not been in-

stalled on the smartphone.

! Overview

The Pandora operation screen can be

reached by the following methods:

. Connecting a Pandora device. Refer to

“Connecting a Bluetooth device” F5-82 or

“Connecting and di sconnectin g a USB

memory/portable device” F5-7.

. Sele ct

Pandora

(Pandora) on the

“Select Audio Source (Select Audio

Source)” screen. Refer to “Selecting an

audio source” F5-14.

. Sele ct

Pandora

(Pandora) on the

“ APPS (APPS)” screen. Refer to

“STARLINK” F5-30.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-73

Audio/Media operation

Control screen

Control panel

No. Function

Select to display the audio source

selection screen.

Select to open Station List.

Select to skip the current track.

Select to play back or pause a track.

The Pause icon is displayed in the

“Play/Pause” key during playback and

the Playback icon is displayed in the

“Play/Pause” key during pause.

Select to set Thumbs Up.

This gives a high rating to the current

song.

All other similar songs will be played

back more frequently.

Select to set Thumbs Down.

This gives a low rating to the current

song.

All other similar songs will be played

back less frequently.

When you select Thumbs Down, the

current track is skipped.

During playback of a station, you can

use the “Bookmark Key” to bookmark a

song or artist.

The Bookmark Type Selection screen is

displayed.

Select to display the sound setting

screen. Refer to “Basic operation” F5-

13.

Turn to adjust volume.

Press to turn the audio system on/off.

5-74

No. Function

Turn clockwise to skip to the next track.

Select

to skip to the next track/

cover art.

Control screen (Bookmark Display)

No. Function

When selected after the Bookmark key

is pressed, the current track is book-

marked.

When selected after the Bookmark key

is pressed, the current artist is book-

marked.

Select to cancel the bookmark opera-

tion.

Audio/Media operation

– CONTINUED –

5-75

Audio/Media operation

Control screen (Station list)

Control screen (New station)

No. Function

Select to sort the list in the chronologi-

cal order of when the Station List was

created.

Select to create a station.

The station can be created using track

names or artist names.

Select to delete a station.

Return to the control screen.

Select to sort the list based on the

alphabetical order of the station names.

Select to create a station using a track

name.

Select to create a station using an artist

name.

Select to cancel the operation to add a

station.

5-76

Control screen (Delete Station)

No. Function

Select to delete the selected item from

the list.

Select to cancel the operation to delete

a station.

WARNING

Do not operate the player’s controls

or connect the smartphone while

driving.

CAUTION

Do not leave your smartphone in the

car. In particular, high temperatures

inside the vehicle may damage the

smartphone.

NOTE

Follow the specific operation proce-

dures for the smartphone application.

Audio/Media operation

5-77

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

Bluetooth

settings

& Registering/connecting

Bluetooth

device

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc.

! Registering a Bluetooth phone for

the first time

To use the hands-free system, it i s

necessary to register a Bluetooth phone

with the system.

Once the phone has been registered, it is

possible to use the hands-free system.

This operation cannot be performed while

driving.

For details about registering a Bluetooth

device: Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

device” F5-81.

1. Turn the Bluetooth connection setting

of your cellular phone on.

. This function is not available when

Bluetooth connection setting of your

cellular phone is set to off.

2. Select

and select

SETTINGS

(SETTINGS) to display the SETTINGS

screen.

Settings (When selecting the “BT” tab)

. Operations up to this point can also

be performed by pressing the

switch on the steering wheel.

3. To register a device, select “Set” on

“BT Devices Connection ”.

“BT Devices Connection” screen (At the

initial startup and when no device is

registered.)

4. When this screen is displayed, search

for the device name displayed on this

screen on the screen of your Bluetooth

device.

5-78

When “Add” is selected (Waiting for the

connection request from a device).

. For details about operating the Blue-

tooth device, see the manual that

comes with it.

. To cancel the registration, select

Cancel

(Cancel).

5. Register the Bluetooth device using

your Bluetooth device.

. A PIN-code is not required for SSP

(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible

Bluetooth devices. Depending on the

type of Bluetooth device being con-

nected, a message confirming regis-

tration may be displayed on the Blue-

tooth device ’s screen. Respond and

operate the Bluetooth device accord-

ing to the confirmation message.

6. Check that the screen is displayed

when registration is complete.

. The system waits for connection

requests coming from the registered

device.

. At this stage, the Bluetooth func-

tions are not yet available.

! Registering a Bluetooth Audio de-

vice for the first time

To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary

to register an audio devi ce with the

system.

Once the player has been registered, it is

possible to use the Bluetooth Audio.

This operation cannot be performed while

driving.

For details about registering a Bluetooth

device: Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

device” F5-81.

The device registration procedure is the

same for both the hands-free system and

Bluetooth audio.

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

– CONTINUED –

5-79

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

! Profiles

This system supports the following services.

Bluetooth Device Spec. Function Requirements Recommendations

Bluetooth Phone/Bluetooth

Audio Device

Bluetooth Specification

Registering a Bluetooth de-

vice

Ver. 1.1

Ver. 2.1 + EDR

Bluetooth Device Profile Function Requirements Recommendations

Bluetooth Phone

HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5

OPP (Object Push Profile)

Transferring the contacts

Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1

PBAP (Phone Book Access

profile)

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0

MAP (Message Access

Profile)

Bluetooth phone message — Ver. 1.0

SPP (Serial Port Profile)

Connecting a Bluetooth

phone

— Ver. 1.1

Bluetooth Audio Device

A2DP (Advanced Audio

Distribution Profile)

Bluetooth audio system

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2

AVRCP (Audio/Video Re-

mote Control Profile)

Ver. 1.0

Ver. 1.4

NOTE

. If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles

individually will not be possible.

. If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may

not work properly.

. For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.

5-80

& Setting Bluetooth details

1. Select .

2. Select

SETTINGS

(SETTINGS).

3. To register a device, select “Add” on

“BT Devices Connection ”.

! BT Devices Connection screen

“BT Devices Connection” screen (One

device is registered.)

No. Function

“Add” key: Registers the device.

“Select” key: Makes the connection to

the registered device.

This shows the status of the device

connection profile. (The icon illuminates

while connected.)

“Delete (Trash box)” key: Deletes the

registered device.

Bluetooth ON/OFF key: Switches to

connect/disconnect the Bluetooth com-

munication.

Function Page

Registering a Bluetooth device 5-81

Deleting a Bluetooth device 5-82

Connecting a Bluetooth device

5-82

! Registering a Bluetooth device

You can register up to five devices,

regardless of whether they are Bluetooth

phones or audio devices.

This operation cannot be performed while

driving.

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

phone for the first time” F5-78.

2. Select

Add

(Add).

The “Add” button is not displayed when

five devices are already registered.

To add another device, you need to delete

one of the registered devices.

Press and hold the Trash box icon for the

device to be deleted, and then select

“OK”.

3. Register the Bluetooth device using

your Bluetooth device.

. A PIN-code is not required for SSP

(Secure Simple Pairing) compat ible

Bluetooth devices. Depending on the

type of Bluetooth device being con-

nected, a message confirming regis-

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

– CONTINUED –

5-81

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

tration may be displayed on the Blue-

tooth device ’s screen. Respond and

operate the Bluetooth device accord-

ing to the confirmation message.

4. Check that the screen is displayed

when registration is complete.

. The system waits for connection

requests coming from the registered

device.

. At this stage, the Bluetooth func-

tions are not yet available.

! Deleting a Bluetooth device

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

phone for the first time” F5-78.

2. Select the desired device.

Press and hold the Trash box icon for the

device to be deleted, and then select

“OK”.

NOTE

When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the

contact data will be deleted at the same

time.

! Connecting a Bluetooth device

Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (Phones (HFP)

and audio devices (AVP)) can be regis-

tered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been

registered, select which device to connect

to.

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

phone for the first time” F5-78.

2. Select the device to be connected.

. Supported profile icons will be dis-

played.

– : Phone

–

: Audio device

–

: Smartphone Application

. Supported profile icons for currently

connected devices will illuminate.

. The Audio icon illuminates only

when in the Bluetooth audio mode.

. All icons are dimmed when Blue-

tooth is set to OFF or when the

connection cannot be made with the

device.

NOTE

. It may take time if the device con-

nection is carried out during Bluetooth

audio playback.

. Depending on the type of Bluetooth

device being connecte d, it may be

necessary to perform additional steps

on the device.

. It is not possible to establish a

Bluetooth connection with iOS devices

currently connected with a USB cable.

! Bluetooth ON/OFF

1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”

screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth

phone for the first time” F5-78.

2. Select the “Bluetooth ON/OFF” key.

. Select “ON” or “OFF” to connect/

disconnect the Bluetooth communica-

tion. “ON” establishes a connection,

and “OFF” disconnects the connec-

tion.

. The setting is fixed as “OFF” when

no device is registered.

! “In-Car-Device setting” screen

The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed

and changed.

1. Display the “SETTINGS” screen. Refer

to “Registering a Bluetooth phone for the

first time” F5-78.

2. On the SETTINGS for In-Car-Device

setting select “set” key.

5-82

No. Function

BT device address: Displays the

Bluetooth device address of the in-

vehicle equipment.

BT device name: Displays the Blue-

tooth device name of the in-vehicle

equipment. The default name is

“SUBARU BT”, which can be changed

by selecting it and entering alphanu-

meric characters.

PIN code: Displays the PIN code of

the in-vehicle equipment. The default

code is “1234”, which can be changed

by selecting it and entering numbers.

“ABC” key: Switches the screen to

input alphabet characters. This key

cannot be selected when entering the

PIN code.

“Set” key: Saves the current BT

device name and PIN code.

No. Function

“123” key: Switches the screen to

input numbers.

Numeric input keys.

Alphabet input keys. The up arrow

key toggles the input between upper

case and lower case characters.

“Delete” key: Deletes one character

from the currently selected item (BT

device name of the PIN code).

! Editing the Bluetooth Name

1. Select “System Name”.

2. Enter a name and then select “Set”.

! Editing the PIN-Code

1. Select “PIN-Code”.

2. Enter a PIN-code and then select

“Set”.

! Common operations

. Press the “Alphabet” key or “Number”

key to make the changes.

. Press the “Set” key to set the entered

value. The screen changes to the “Set-

tings Bluetooth” screen.

. Press the “Back” key to discard the

entered value. The screen returns to the

“Settings Bluetooth” screen.

Audio/Bluetooth

settings

– CONTINUED –

5-83

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

! When the cursor is at the “Device

Name Display Area”

. Thedevicenamecanbesetor

changed.

. Press the “PIN” key to enter a pass-

code.

. If the “PIN” key is already selected, the

“Alphabet” key is cross-hatched and dis-

abled.

! When the cursor is at the “Pass-

code Display Area”

. The passcode can be set/changed.

. Press the “Name” key to enter a device

name.

Phone operation (Hands-free

system for cellular phones)

& Quick reference

The phone top screen can be used to

make a phone call. To display the hands-

free operation screen, select

and then

select

PHONE

(PHONE), or press the

switch on the steering wheel.

Several functions are available to operate

on each screen that is displayed by

selecting the 4 tabs.

PHONE (Menu) screen

PHONE (Dialpad) screen

5-84

No. Function

“Incoming Calls” key: Opens the

Incoming Calls screen.

“Outgoing Calls” key: Opens the Out-

going Calls screen.

“Contacts” key: Opens the Contacts

screen.

“Dialpad” key: Changes the screen

from the Menu screen to the Dialpad

screen.

“Option” key: Opens the phone vo-

lume setting screen.

“OFF Hook” key: Use to make a

phone call. You cannot press this key

until you open the Dialpad screen and

enter a phone number.

“Bluetooth Setting” key: Opens the BT

Devices Connection screen.

Enter the phone number that you

want to call.

“Switch Screen” key: Switches the

screen to the Phone (Menu) screen.

If no device is registered, a message

is displayed instead of menu items.

& Some basics

The hands-free system enables calls to be

made and received without having to take

your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth

is a wireless data system that enables

cellular phones to be used without being

connected by a cable or placed in a

cradle.

The operating procedure of the phone is

explained here.

WARNING

. While driving, do not use a cel-

lular phone or connect the Blue-

tooth phone.

. Your audio u nit i s fi tted wi th

Bluetooth antennas. People with

implantable cardiac pacemakers,

cardiac resynchro nization ther-

apy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should

maintain a reasonable distance

between themselves and the

Bluetooth antennas. The radio

waves may affect the operation

of such devices.

. Before using Bluetooth devices,

users of any electrical medical

device other than implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-

synchronization therapy-pace-

makers or implantable cardiover-

ter defibrillators should consult

the manufacturer of the device

for information about its opera-

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

– CONTINUED –

5-85

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

tion under the influence of radio

waves. Radio waves could have

unexpected effects on the opera-

tion of such medical devices.

CAUTION

Do not leave your cellular phone in

the vehicle. The temperature inside

mayrisetoalevelthatcould

damage the phone.

NOTE

. If your cellular phone does no t

support Bluetooth, this system cannot

function.

. In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not function:

– The cellular phone is turned off.

– The current position is outside

the communication area.

– The cellular phone is not con-

nected.

– The cellular phone has a low

battery.

. When using the hands free function

and other Bluetooth functions at the

same time, the following problems may

occur:

– The Bluetooth connection may

be cut.

– Noise may be heard when play-

ing back voice with the Bluetooth

function.

! Registering/connecting a Bluetooth

phone

To use the hands-free system for cellular

phones, it is necessary to regi ster a

cellular phone with the system. Refer to

“Registering/connecting Bluetooth

de-

vice” F5-78.

! Bluetooth phone condition dis-

play

The condition of the Bluetooth phone

appears on the upper right side of the

screen. Refer to “Bluetooth phone condi-

tion display” F5-86.

! Using the phone switch/micro-

phone

Steering switch

By pressing the phone switch, a call can

be received or ended without taking your

hands off the steering wheel.

Volume control switch

. Pre ss the “+” side to increase th e

volume.

. Press the “-” side to decrease the

volume.

Off hook switch

On hook switch

Microphone

The microphone is used when talking on

the phone.

5-86

! Voice command system

Press this switch to operate the voice

command system.

. The voice command system and its list

of commands can be operated. Refer to

“Voice command system operation” F5-

104.

NOTE

. The other party’s voice will be heard

from the front speakers. The audio/

visual system will be muted during

phone calls or when hands-free voice

commands are used.

. Talk alternately with the other party

on the phone. If both parties speak at

the same time, the other party may not

hear what has been said. (This is not a

malfunction.)

. Keep call volume down. Otherwise,

the other party’s voice may be audible

outside the vehicle and voice echo may

increase. When talking on the phone,

speak clearly towards the microphone.

. The other party may not hear you

clearly when:

– Driving on an unpaved road.

(Making excessive traffic noise.)

– Driving at high speeds.

– The roof or windows are open.

– The air conditioning vents are

pointed towards the microphone.

– The sound of the air conditioning

fan is loud.

– There is a negative effect on

sound quality due to the phone

and/or network being used.

! About the contacts in the contact

list

. The following data is stored for every

registered phone. When another phone is

connected, the following registered data

cannot be read:

– Contact data

– Call history data

– All phone settings

NOTE

When a phone’s registration is deleted,

the above-mentioned data is also de-

leted.

! When selling or disposing of the

vehicle

A lot of personal data is registered when

the hands-free system is used. When

selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize

the data. Refer to “Other settings” F5-11.

. The following data in the system can

be initialized:

– Contact data

– Call history data

– All phone settings

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

– CONTINUED –

5-87

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

NOTE

Once initialized, the data and settings

will be erased. Pay much attention

when initializing the data.

& Calling on the Bluetooth

phone

After a Bluetooth phone has been regis-

tered, a call can be made using the hands-

free system. There are several methods

by which a call can be made, as described

below.

1. Select

2. Select

PHONE

(PHONE).

3. Select the desired tab to call from.

. On the PHONE screen, select “Incom-

ing Calls” to open the Incoming Calls

screen. Refer to “Quick reference” F5-84.

Incoming Calls screen

. On the PHONE screen, select “Out-

going Calls” to open the Outgoing Calls

screen. Refer to “Quick reference” F5-84.

Outgoing Calls screen

5-88

. On the PHONE screen, select “Con-

tacts” to open the Contacts screen. Refer

to “Quick reference” F5-84.

Contacts screen

. On the PHONE screen, select “Dia-

lpad” to open the Dialpad screen. Refer to

“Quick reference” F5-84.

PHONE (Dialpad) screen

How to make a call list Page

By call history 5-89

By contacts list 5-91

By dialpad

5-94

By off hook switch 5-94

By voice command system

5-105

: The operation cannot be performed while

driving.

! By call history

! Incoming Calls

. On the PHONE screen, select “Incom-

ing Calls” to open the Incoming Calls

screen.

. Up to ten items in the incoming call

history are listed. Scroll the screen to see

items that are not on the screen.

. You can make a call by selecting an

item in the incoming call history list.

Incoming Calls screen

. If there is no incoming call history, a

message appears to indicate that there is

no incoming call history data.

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

– CONTINUED –

5-89

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

Incoming Calls screen (No incoming call

history)

Incoming Calls screen (Confirmation to

delete incoming call history)

No. Function

“Outgoing Calls” key: Opens the Out-

going Calls screen.

“Contacts” key: Opens the Contacts

screen.

“Delete All” key: Deletes all incoming

call history data. The “Delete All” key

is disabled when there is no incoming

call history.

“OK” key: Deletes incoming call his-

tory.

“Cancel” key: Cancels the deletion of

incoming call history. The screen

returns to the Incoming Calls screen.

NOTE

. When making a call to the same

number continuously, only the most

recent call is listed in call history.

. When a phone number registered in

the contact list is received, the name is

displayed.

. Number-withheld calls are also

memorized in the system.

. International phone calls may not be

made depending on the type of cellular

phone you have.

. The list should group together con-

secutive entries with the same phone

number and same call type.

! Outgoing Calls

. On the PHONE screen, select “Out-

going Calls” to open the Outgoing Calls

screen.

. Up to ten items in the outgoing call

history are listed. Scroll the screen to see

items that are not on the screen.

. You can make a call by selecting an

item in the outgoing call history list.

. If there is no outgoing call history, a

message appears to indicate that there is

no outgoing call history data.

Outgoing Calls screen

5-90

Outgoing Calls screen (No outgoing call

history)

Outgoing Calls screen (Confirmation to

delete outgoing call history)

No. Function

“Incoming Calls” key: Opens the

Incoming Calls screen.

“Contacts” key: Opens the Contacts

screen.

“Delete All” key: Deletes all outgoing

call history data. The “Delete All” key

is disabled when there is no outgoing

call history.

“OK” key: Deletes outgoing call his-

tory.

“Cancel” key: Cancels to delete out-

going call history. The screen will go

back to the Outgoing Calls screen.

NOTE

. When making a call to the same

number continuously, only the most

recent call is listed in call history.

. When a phone number registered in

the contact list is received, the name is

displayed.

. Number-withheld calls are also

memorized in the system.

. International phone calls may not be

made depending on the type of cellular

phone you have.

. The list should group together con-

secutive entries with the same phone

number and same call type.

! By contacts list

. Up to 1000 items in the contact data

are listed. Scroll the screen to see items

that are not on the screen.

. Select an item in the contact list to

open the Phone Number List screen.

. You can make a call by selecting an

item in the phone number list (up to five

phone numbers are listed).

. If there is no contact data, a message

is displayed to indicate that there is no

contact data.

Contacts screen

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

– CONTINUED –

5-91

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

Phone Number List screen (Example when

“Adam” is selected)

Contacts screen (When there is no data)

No. Function

“Incoming Calls” key: Opens the

Incoming Calls screen.

“Outgoing Calls” key: Opens the Out-

going Calls screen.

“Download Contacts” key: Opens a

pop-up screen for starting the down-

load of contact data.

“Delete All” key: Deletes all contact

data. The “Delete All” key is disabled

when there is no contact data.

“Search” key: Opens a list of contacts

that starts with the selected character.

This key is cross-hatched and cannot

be selected if there is no contact data

that starts with the selected character,

Select the up/down arrow key to scroll the

“Search” key.

! When the contact is empty

For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-

patible Bluetooth phones

. On the Contacts screen, select “Down-

load Contacts”. A screen where you can

select how to download contacts opens.

. You can select to download all items or

download one item.

*: To download all items, you may need to

change the settings in your cellular phone

beforehand.

Contacts screen (Download selection)

Contacts screen (Download confirmation)

5-92

Contacts screen (Download confirmation)

Contacts screen (Download in progress)

No. Function

“Download Contacts” key: Opens the

Download Confirmation screen. Con-

firm whether or not to download. If the

downloaded contact(s) already

exist(s), confirm whether or not to

overwrite the existing data.

“Download 1 Entry” key: Downloads

one set of contact data. To download

the data, you need to operate from the

connected device.

“OK” key: Starts downloading all

contacts.

“Cancel” key: Cancels the download.

The screen returns to the Contacts

screen. (The pop-up screen disap-

pears.)

. All contact data downloaded into the in-

vehicle equipment will be deleted.

Contacts screen (Confirmation to delete

contact data)

No. Function

“OK” key: Deletes all downloaded

contact data.

“Cancel” key: Cancels the deletion.

The screen returns to the Contacts

screen.

NOTE

. Manual transfer operation cannot be

performed while driving.

. If your cellular phone is neither

PBAP nor OPP compatible, the con-

tacts cannot be transferred.

. Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone:

– It may be necessary to perform

additional steps on the phone when

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

– CONTINUED –

5-93

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

transferring contact data.

! By Dialpad

The Outgoing Call screen opens when

you perform the following operations.

. When you enter a phone number on

the PHONE (Dialpad) screen and select

the “OFF_Hook” key, the Outgoing Call

screen opens.

. When you select an item in the incom-

ing call history list on the Incoming Calls

screen, the Outgoing Call screen opens.

. When you select an item in the out-

going call history list on the Outgoing Call

screen, the Outgoing Call screen opens.

. When you select a phone number on

the Contacts (Phone Number List) screen,

the Outgoing Call screen opens.

Outgoing Call screen

No. Function

“Option” key: Opens the Options

(volume settings) screen.

“ON_Hook” key: Aborts the call. The

screen returns to the Phone (Menu)

screen. This is the same as pressing

the “ON_Hook” switch on the steering

wheel.

NOTE

Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone being co nnecte d, it may be

necessary to perform additional steps

on the phone.

! By off hook switch

Calls can be made using the latest call

history item.

1. Press the

switch on the steering

wheel to display the phone top screen.

2. Check that the “Call (Call)” screen is

displayed.

& Receiving on the Bluetooth

phone

! Incoming calls

When a call is received, the incoming call

screen is displayed with a sound.

. When you are on the Outgoing Call

screen, the screen changes to the Call

screen when the other party answers the

call.

. The “Mute”, “Speaker”, and “Bluetooth”

keys are disabled on the Outgoing Call

screen.

. When you receive a phone call while

the cellular phone is connec ted, th e

screen changes to th e Incom ing Call

screen.

5-94

Incoming Call screen

Unable to put call on hold screen

No. Function

“Option” key: Opens the Options

(volume settings) screen.

No. Function

“Hold” key: Puts the incoming call on

hold. This function may not work on

some cell phone models. This func-

tion is the same as pressing the

“ON_Hook” switch on the steering

wheel for a short period of time.

“OFF_Hook” key: Opens the Call

screen. This function is the same as

pressing the “OFF_Hook” switch on

the steering wheel.

“ON_Hook” key: Rejects the incoming

call. This function is the same as

pressing and holding the “ON_Hook”

switch on the steering wheel.

NOTE

. During international phone calls, the

other party’s name or number may not

be displayed correctly depending on

the type of cellular phone you have.

. The incoming call display mode can

be set. Refer to “Incoming Calls” F5-

89.

. The ringtone that has been set in the

“Sound Settings (Sound Settings)”

screen sounds when there is an incom-

ing call. Depending on the type of

Bluetooth phone, both the system and

Bluetooth phone may sound simulta-

neously when there is an incoming call.

Refer to ““Sound Settings (Sound Set-

tings)” screen” F5-97.

& Talking on the Bluetooth

phone

While talking on the phone, this screen is

displayed. The operations outlined below

can be performed on this screen.

. When the Incoming Call screen is

displayed and you accept the call, the

screen changes to the Call screen. The

screen stays on the Incoming Call screen

if you reject the call.

. The “Dialpad” and “Bluetooth Setting”

keys are disabled on the Incoming Call

screen.

The Call screen opens when you perform

the following operations.

. When you accept a call on the Incom-

ing Call screen (by selecting the

“OFF_Hook” key), the Call screen opens.

. When you are on the Outgoing Call

screen, the screen changes to the Call

screen when the other party answers the

call.

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

– CONTINUED –

5-95

Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)

Call screen

Call screen (Your voice Mute ON)

Call screen (Private ON)

Call (Dialpad) screen (DTMF)

No. Function

“Option” key: Opens the Options

(volume settings) screen.

No. Function

“Mute” key: Mutes your voice to the

other party. Press the “Mute” key

again to deactivate the Mute mode.

This key is disabled in the Private

mode.

“Speaker” key: Changes the mode to

Private mode. The other party’s voice

emits from the cell phone. Press the

“Speaker” key again to deactivate the

Private mode.

“ON_Hook” key: Ends the call. You

return to the Phone (Menu) screen

when ending outgoing calls and the

previous screen when ending incom-

ing calls. This function is the same as

pressing and holding the “ON_Hook”

switch on the steering wheel.

“Dialpad” key: Opens the Call (Dia-

lpad) screen.

“Switch Screen” key: Switches the

screen to the Phone (Menu) screen.

“Dialpad” key: Allows you to make

DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency)

calls. The numbers you enter are sent

as tone signals.

NOTE

. When cellular phone call is changed

to hands-free call, the hands-free

screen will be displayed and its func-

tions can be operated on the screen.

. Changing bet ween cellular phone

call and hands-free call can be per-

5-96

formed by operating the cellular phone

directly.

. Transferring methods and opera-

tions will be different depending on

the type of cellular phone you have.

. For the operation of the cellular

phone, see the manual that comes with

it.

. On the PHONE (Menu) screen, the

screen changes to the Phone (Dialpad)

screen when you select “Dialpad”.

. After entering the phone number on the

keypad, the call is made when you select

the “OFF_Hook” key.

Phone (Dialpad) screen

No. Function

“Dialpad” keys: Allows you to enter

numbers from 0 to 9 and *, #, and +.

To enter “+”, press and hold the “0”

key.

“Delete” key: Deletes one character

from the entered characters.

“Switch Screen” key: Switches the

screen to the Phone (Menu) screen.

“OFF_Hook” key: Opens the Outgoing

Calls screen and dials the entered

phone number. This is the same as

pressing the “OFF_Hook” switch on

the steering wheel. This key is cross-

hatched and cannot be selected until

the phone number is entered.

“Option” key: Opens the Options

(volume settings) screen.

“Bluetooth Setting” key: Opens the BT

Devices Connection screen.

NOTE

The sound quality of the voice heard

from the other party’s speaker may be

negatively impacted.

Setup

& Phone settings

! “Sound Settings (Sound Settings)”

screen

The call and ringtone volume can be

adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.

1. Display the “ PHONE” screen. Refer to

“Quick reference” F5-84.

2. Select

Option

(Option).

3. Select the desired item to be set.

. Select to adjust the volume of the

telephone function.

. On the PHONE screen, the screen

changes to the Options screen when you

select the “Option” key.

Audio/Setup

– CONTINUED –

5-97

Audio/Setup

Options (volume settings) screen

No. Function

Phone Ringer Volume +/- keys: Ad-

justs the ringtone volume. The “-” key

lowers the volume, and the “+” key

increases the volume. (Default vo-

lume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume

levels)

Phone Incoming Volume +/- keys:

Adjusts the receive volume. The “-”

key lowers the volume, and the “+”

key increases the volume. (Default

volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume

levels)

Phone Outgoing Volume +/- keys:

Adjusts the transmit volume. The “-”

key lowers the volume, and the “+”

key increases the volume. (Default

volume: 3 out of a total of 5 volume

levels)

NOTE

. Depending on the type of phone,

certain functions may not be available.

. Contact data is managed indepen-

dently for every registered phone.

When one phone is connected, another

phone’s regis tered data cannot be

read.

! Update contacts from phone

Operation methods differ between PBAP

compatible and PBAP incompatible but

OPP compatible Bluetooth phones.

If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor

OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be

transferred.

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones

1. Select

Download Contacts

(Down-

load Contacts).

. Contacts are transferred automati-

cally.

2. Check that a confirmation screen is

displayed when the operation is complete.

. This operation may be unnecessary

depending on the t ype of cellular

phone.

. If another Bluetooth device is con-

nected when transferring contact data,

depending on the phone, the con-

nected Bluetooth device may need to

be disconnected.

. Depending on the type of Bluetooth

phone being connected, it may be

necessary to perform additional steps

on the phone.

For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-

patible Bluetooth phones

This operation cannot be performed while

driving.

1. Select

Download Contacts

(Down-

load Contacts).

Select Download 1 Entry.

2. Transfer the contact data to the sys-

tem using a Bluetooth phone.

. This operation may be unnecessary

depending on the type of cellular

phone.

. To cancel this function, select

Cancel

(Cancel).

3. Check that a confirmation screen is

displayed when the operation is complete.

! Deleting the contact data

1. Select

Delete All

(Delete All).

2. Select

(OK) when the confirma-

tion screen appears.

5-98

Refer to “By contacts list” F5-91.

NOTE

For deleting data, all items are deleted.

Audio/Setup

5-99

Audio/What to do if...

What to do if...

& Troubleshooting

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular

phone

This

system

The hands-free system or Bluetooth

device does not work.

The connected device may not be a

compatible Bluetooth cellular phone.

For USA customers, please visit

www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the

USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm

whether or not the device can be paired with

the vehicle.

* —

The Bluetooth version of the connected

cellular phone may be older than the

specified version.

Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version

1.1 or higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR

or higher).

5-80

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.

5-100

When registering/connecting a cellular phone

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular

phone

This

system

A cellular phone cannot be regis-

tered.

An incorrect passcode was entered

on the cellular phone.

Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone. * —

The registration operation has not

been completed on the cellular phone

side.

Complete the registration operation on the cellular

phone (approve registration on the phone).

* —

Old registration information remains

on either this system or the cellular

phone.

Delete the existing registration information from

both this system and the cellular phone, then

this system.

*5-81

A Bluetooth connection cannot be

made.

Another Bluetooth device is already

connected.

Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to

use to this system.

— 5-81

Bluetooth function is not enabled on

the cellular phone.

Enable the Bluetooth function on the cellular phone. * —

Automatic Bluetooth connection on

this system is set to off.

Set automatic Bluetooth connection on this system

to on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

—

5-81

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.

Audio/What to do if...

– CONTINUED –

5-101

Audio/What to do if...

When using the phonebook

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular

phone

This

system

Phonebook data cannot be trans-

ferred manually.

The profile version of the connected

cellular phone may not be compatible

with transferring phonebook data.

For USA customers, please visit

www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the

USA customers, contact your local dealer to

arrange a demonstration in order to confirm

whether or not the device can be paired with

the vehicle.

* —

Transfer operation on the cellular phone

has not completed.

Complete transfer operation on the cellular

phone (approve transfer operation on the

phone).

* —

Phonebook data cannot be edited.

Editing function is not available on this

system.

——

5-98

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.

5-102

In other situations

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular

phone

This

system

Even though all conceivable mea-

sures have been taken, the symptom

status does not change.

The cellular phone is not close enough

to this system.

Bring the cellular phone closer to this system. ——

The cellular phone is the most likely

cause of the symptom.

Turn the cellular phone off, remove and

reinstall the battery pack, and then restart the

cellular phone.

* —

Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth con-

nection.

* —

Stop the cellular phone’s security software

and close all applications.

* —

Before using an application installed on the

cellular phone, carefully check its source and

how its operation might affect this system.

—

*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.

Audio/What to do if...

5-103

Audio/Voice command system operation

Voice command system op-

eration

& Voice command system

The voice command system enables the

audio, hands-free systems, etc. to be

operated using voice commands.

Refer to the “Command list” F5-107 for

samples of voice commands.

! Using the voice command system

! Steering switch

Talk switch

. Press the talk switch to start the voice

command system.

. To cancel voice recognition, press and

hold the talk switch.

! Microphone

. It is unnecessary to speak directly into

the microphone when giving a command.

NOTE

. Wait for the confirmation beep be-

fore speaking a command.

. Voice commands may not be recog-

nized if:

– Spoken too quickly.

– Spoken at a low or high volume.

– The roof or windows are open.

– Passengers are talking while

voice commands are spoken.

– The air conditioning speed is set

high.

– The air conditioning vents are

turned towards the microphone.

. In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not recognize the command

properly and using voice commands

may not be possible:

– The command is incorrect or

unclear. Note that certain words,

accents or speech patterns may be

difficult for the system to recognize.

– There is excessive background

noise, such as wind noise.

! Voice command system operation

1. Press the talk switch.

. After the voice command top screen

has been displayed, speech guidance

will commence.

5-104

NOTE

When the voice command mode is

audio mode, voice guidance for the

voice command system can be skipped

by pressing the talk switch.

2. Say the command.

. Say “Help” or “Phone”.

. Say “Audio”.

. Commands related with each func-

tion are displayed on the screen of the

each function tab. Some commonly

used commands are displayed on the

screen of the main tab. Even if any tab

is selected, all commands can be

operated.

. Saying

Help

(Help) prompts gui-

dance to offer examples of commands

and operation methods.

. To cancel voice recognition, select

“6”, or press and hold the talk switch.

NOTE

If the system does not respond or the

confirmation screen does not disap-

pear, press the talk swi tch and try

again.

! Voice command example: Call

name

1. Press the talk switch.

2. Say

“Call <contacts>”

. A confirmation screen will be dis-

played show ing the recognition re-

sults. If multiple matching items are

found, a selec tion sc reen wil l be

displayed. Say

“<number>”

or select

the number.

NOTE

. In the same manner as it is dis-

played on the screen, “Call <con-

tacts>” (Call <contacts>), after saying

“Call a contact ”

say the name of a

contact. For example:

“Call a contact”

“John Smith”

“Call a contact”

“Mary Davis”

. Short or abbreviated names in the

contacts list may not be recognized.

Change names in the contacts list to

full names.

. Sometimes a voice recognition re-

sult confirmation screen will be dis-

played. After confirming the result, say

“Yes”

“No”

. When the system recognizes multi-

ple names from the contacts list, a

name candidate list will be displayed

Audio/Voice command system operation

– CONTINUED –

5-105

Audio/Voice command system operation

on the screen. If the desired name is

not displayed on the top of the screen,

say or select the number of the name

from the candidate list (number 1,

number 2, etc.) to select a name from

the candidate list.

. When a contact has multiple phone

numbers registered in the contacts list,

a candidate list will be displayed. If the

desired phone number is not displayed

on the top of the screen, say or select

the number o f the desired phone

number from the candidate list (num-

ber 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone

number from the candidate list.

! Voice command example: Dial

number

1. Press the talk switch.

2. Say the phone number.

. In the same manner as it is dis-

played on the screen, “ Dial <number>”

(Dial <number>), after saying

“Dial a

number”

say the phone number.

. Say the phone number one digit at a

time.

For example, if the phone number is

2345678:

Say

“two three four five six seven

eight”

Do not say

“twenty three forty five

sixty seven eight”

Calling to the following phone numbers

– 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)

– 7 digit numbers (Local phone num-

bers)

– 10 digit numbers (Area co de +

Local phone number)

– 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area

code + Local phone number)

. As the system cannot recognize

additional numbers, say the complete

number without stopping.

Calling to other phone numbers

3. Say

“Call”

or press the switch on

the steering wheel.

. When the system recognizes multi-

ple phone numbers, a phone number

candidate list will be displayed on the

screen. Pressing the

switch on the

steering wheel makes a call to the top

entry on the list. If the desired phone

number is not displayed on the top of

the screen, say the number of the

desired phone number from the candi-

date list to select a phone number from

the candidate list.

! Casual speech recognization

Due to natural language speech recogni-

tion technology, this system enables re-

cognition of a command when spoken

naturally. H owever, the system cannot

recognize every variation of each com-

mand. In some situations, it is possible to

omit the command for the procedure and

directly state the desired operation. Not all

voice commands are displayed in the

function menu.

5-106

NOTE

If the command cannot be recognized

completely, the command input screen

will be displayed. (Search results will

be shown based on the part of the

command that was recognized.)

! Expression examples for each

function

Command Expression examples

“Dial <phone num-

ber>”

Phone <phone num-

ber>.

Command list

Recognizable voice commands and their

actions are shown below.

. Frequently used commands are listed

in the following tables.

. For devices that are not installed in the

vehicle, the related commands will not be

displayed in the screen. Also, according to

conditions, other commands may not be

displayed in the screen.

. The functions available may vary ac-

cording to the system installed.

. Voi ce recognition language can be

changed. Refer to “Other settings” F5-11.

NOTE

. The no tations used in the com-

mands are as follows.

– [

]: Commands that need not

to be spoken

– <

>: Numbers, titles, or

names to be spoken

Basic command

Voice

command

Phrase Function

System back Back

Go back one

hierarchy or

cancel the

voice recogni-

tion (voice

command top

screen)

System help Help

Ask for help

with the cur-

rent task

System can-

cel (Close)

Cancel, Close

Cancel the

current task

Yes Yes

No No

Display OFF Display OFF

Turns the dis-

play off

Audio ON Audio ON

Turns the

audio system

Audio OFF Audio OFF

Turns the

audio system

off

STARLINK

mode change

STARLINK

Switch to

APPS mode

Audio/Command list

– CONTINUED –

5-107

Audio/Command list

Commands for changing the radio mode

Voice

command

Phrase Function

AM mode

change

Change to

Switch to AM

mode

Change to

AM1

Switch to AM

mode band 1

Change to

AM2

Switch to AM

mode band 2

FM mode

change

Change to

Switch to FM

mode

Change to

FM1

Switch to FM

mode band 1

Change to

FM2

Switch to FM

mode band 2

Change to

FM3

Switch to FM

mode band 3

XM radio

mode change

Change to

SiriusXM

Switch to XM

mode

Bluetooth

Audio mode

change

Change to BT

Audio

Switch to

Bluetooth

Audio mode

CD mode

change

Change to

Switch to CD

mode

USB mode

change

Change to

USB

Switch to

USB mode

iPod mode

change

Change to

iPod

Switch to iPod

mode

Aha radio

mode change

Change to

Aha

Switch to Aha

radio mode

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Pandora

mode change

Change to

Pandora

Switch to

Pandora

mode

AUX mode

change

Change to

AUX

Switch to

AUX mode

Commands for Hands Free

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Dial number

calling

Dial Number

? <0-9, +, *,

#> ? Change

number, Dial

Places a call

to the said

phone num-

ber

Dial <0-9, +,

*, #> ?

Change num-

ber, Dial

Contacts

(Phonebook)

Contacts,

Phonebook

? <Name>

? <1-5> ?

Dial

Make a call

by using the

phonebook

Call <Name>

? <1-5> ?

Dial

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Recent calls

Call History

? Incoming

call, Outgoing

call ? Next

(page), Pre-

vious (page)

? <1-5> ?

Dial

Make a call

by using the

call history

Incoming

calls

Incoming

Calls

Display the

call history

screen

Outgoing

calls

Outgoing

Calls

Display the

call history

screen

Redial Redial

Places a call

to the phone

number of the

latest out-

going call

Callback Callback

Places a call

to the phone

number of the

latest incom-

ing call

Select phone

Select Phone

? <1-5>

Display the

phone select

screen

Show phone

Phone Menu

Display the

hands free

top screen

5-108

Commands for Pandora

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Like Like

Mark “Like”

flag

Dislike Dislike

Mark “Dislike”

flag

Skip Skip, Next

Skip to the

next song

Commands for aha

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Thumbs up

Thumbs Up,

Heart, Like

Mark “Like”

flag

Thumbs

down

Thumbs

Down, Ban,

Dislike

Mark “Dislike”

flag

Update Refresh

Refresh the

selected sta-

tion to get the

latest infor-

mation

Content up Content Up

Playback next

Content

Content down

Content

Down

Playback pre-

vious Content

Commands for AM control

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Seek up Seek Up

Tunes in the

higher fre-

quency direc-

tion

Seek down Seek Down

Tunes in the

lower fre-

quency direc-

tion

Scan Scan

Switch to the

scan mode

Direct fre-

quency tuning

Tune to <Fre-

quency>

Designate the

frequency to

switch to a

specific radio

station

Preset num-

ber tuning

Preset <pre-

set number>

Designate the

preset chan-

nel to switch

to specific

radio station

Tag Tag

iTunes Tag-

ging for HD

Radio

Commands for SiriusXM radio control

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Preset num-

ber tuning

Preset <pre-

set number>

Designate the

preset chan-

nel to switch

to specific

radio station

Scan Scan

Switch to the

scan mode

Channel

number tun-

ing

Channel

<Channel

number>

Designate the

channel to

switch to spe-

cific radio sta-

tion

Category Category

Displays the

category list

screen

Audio/Command list

– CONTINUED –

5-109

Audio/Command list

Commands for CD control

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Track up,

next track

Track Up

Select the

next track

Track down,

previous track

Track Down

Select the

current track

Scan Scan

Switch to the

scan mode

1 Track Re-

peat

1 Track Re-

peat

Repeat single

track

Repeat All Repeat All

Repeat all

tracks

Shuffle Shuffle

Plays ran-

domly

Commands for MP3/WMA/AAC, USB

control

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Track up,

next track

Track Up

Select the

next track

Track down,

previous track

Track Down

Select the

current track

Folder up Folder Up

Plays from

the start of the

next folder

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Folder down Folder Down

Plays from

the start of the

folder

Scan Scan

Switch to the

scan mode

1 track repeat

1 Track Re-

peat

Repeat single

track

Repeat folder

Repeat

Folder

Repeat of the

folder

Repeat all Repeat All

Repeat all

tracks

Shuffle folder Shuffle Folder

Plays ran-

domly of the

folder

Shuffle all Shuffle All

Plays ran-

domly

Commands for HD Radio Control

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Track up,

next track

Track Up

Select the

next track

Track down,

previous track

Track Down

Select the

current track

Repeat one Repeat One

Repeat single

track

Repeat all Repeat All

Repeat all

tracks

Shuffle track Shuffle Track

Shuffle all

tracks

Shuffle album Shuffle Album

Shuffle all

tracks

Shuffle OFF Shuffle OFF

Turn off shuf-

fle

5-110

Commands for Bluetooth audio control

Voice

command

Phrase Function

Pause Pause Pause play

Track up,

next track

Track Up

Select the

next track

Track down,

previous track

Track Down

Select the

current track

1 Track re-

peat

1 Track Re-

peat

Repeat single

track

Repeat all Repeat All

Repeat all

tracks

Group repeat

Group Re-

peat

Repeat tracks

on group

Shuffle all Shuffle All

Shuffle all

tracks

Group shuffle Group Shuffle

Shuffle tracks

on group

Shuffle OFF Shuffle OFF

Turn off shuf-

fle

Appendix

& Certification

. Bluetooth

The Bluetooth word mark and logo are

registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and any use of such marks by Clarion

Co., Ltd. is under license.

. SiriusXM Satellite Radio

SiriusXM

and all related marks and

logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio

. Pandora

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and other

Pandora marks are trademarks or regis-

tered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc.,

or its subsidiaries worldwide.

If you have any issues with the Pandora

application on your mobile phone, please

direct them to

pandora-support@pandora.com.

. iPod

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”

mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to

iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been

certified by the developer to meet Apple

performance standards. Apple is not

responsible for the operation of this device

or its compliance with safety and regula-

tory standards. Please note that the use of

this accessory with iPod or iPhone may

affect wireless performance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,

iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

. How to get the source code using

the open source

This system implements software using

the open source. For customers who

would like to get the source code of the

software, it is available by downloading it

from the web site of Clarion Co., Ltd.

For details, refer to the following web site.

http://www.clarion.com/us/en/support/in-

dex.html

Audio/Appendix

– CONTINUED –

5-111

Audio/Appendix

& Certification for the Hands-

free system

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC

Rules and Industry Canada licence-ex-

empt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, includi ng interfere nce that may

cause undesired operation of this device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux la

partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appa-

reils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-

tion est autorisée aux deux conditions

suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas

produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur

de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage

radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage

est sus cept ible d’en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment and meets the

FCC radi o freque ncy (RF) Exposure

Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65

and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency

(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has

very low levels of RF energy that it

deemed to comply without maximum

permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées

pour un environnement non contrôlé et

respecte les règles les radioélectriques

(RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’expo-

sition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et

d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectri-

ques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipe-

ment émet une énergie RF très faible qui

est considérée conforme sans évaluation

de l’exposition maximale autorisée.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

This transmitter must not be co-located or

operated in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

& Certification for Mexico mod-

els

. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-250

Clarion PF-3547

. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-253

Clarion PF-3688

5-112

Interior light ......................................................... 6-2

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2

Map light............................................................. 6-2

Cargo area light (Outback)................................... 6-3

OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4

Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-5

Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5

Glove box ........................................................... 6-6

Center console.................................................... 6-6

Overhead console ............................................... 6-7

Pocket ................................................................ 6-7

Cup holder ........................................................... 6-7

Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-8

Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-8

Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9

Accessory power outlets.................................... 6-9

Ashtray (if equipped) ......................................... 6-11

Coat hook ........................................................... 6-12

Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-13

Legacy .............................................................. 6-13

Outback ............................................................ 6-13

Convenient grip (Outback) ................................ 6-14

Floor mat ............................................................ 6-14

Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)....... 6-15

Using the cover ................................................. 6-15

To install the front cover .................................... 6-15

To remove the front cover .................................. 6-16

To remove the cover housing............................. 6-16

Stowage of the cargo area cover........................ 6-16

To take out the stowed cover housing ................ 6-17

To install the cover housing ............................... 6-18

Convenient tie-down hooks (Outback)............. 6-18

Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-19

Rear view camera .............................................. 6-19

How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-21

Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-21

Help line............................................................ 6-22

Interior equipment

Interior equipment/Interior light

Interior light

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make

sure the light s are turned off to

avoid battery discharge.

& Dome light

1) ON

2) DOOR

3) OFF

The dome light switch has the following

positions:

ON: The light remains on continuously.

OFF: The light remains off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-

matically when an y of the doo rs (for

Outback, including the rear gate) is

opened. Several seconds after all of the

doors (including the rear gate) are closed,

the dome light gradually turns off. For

details, refer to “OFF delay timer” F6-3.

& Map light

To turn on the map light, press the switch.

To turn it off, press the switch again.

6-2

! Door interlock switch

1) Door interlock switch

The door interlock switch has the following

positions.

OFF: The map lights do not illuminate

automatically in conjunction with a door

opening. But, the lights can be turned on

manually by pressing the map light

switches.

DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-

matically when any of the doors (other

than the rear gate or trunk lid) is opened

even while the map light switches are in

the OFF position. Several seconds after

all of the doors (other than the rear gate or

trunk lid) are closed, the map lights

gradually turn off. For details, refer to

“OFF delay timer” F6-3.

& Cargo area light (Outback)

1) DOOR

2) OFF

3) ON

The cargo area light switch has the

following positions.

DOOR: The light illuminates only when

the rear gate is opened. The light gradu-

ally turns off several seconds after the rear

gate is closed. For derails, refer to “OFF

delay timer” F6-3.

OFF: The light remains off.

ON: The light remains on continuously.

& OFF delay timer

The following lights have an automatic

illumination function.

. dome light

. map light

. cargo area light (Outback)

After being illuminated automatically,

these lights remain on for several seconds

and then gradually turn off under the

following conditions.

. after the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position

. after any doors or the rear gate

(Outback) is closed (dome light)

. after all doors are closed (map light)

. after the rear gate is closed (cargo area

light)

. after the doors are unlocked using the

keyless access function (if equipped)

(dome light and map light)

. after the doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry system (dome light

and map light)

. when approaching with the access key

(if equipped) (dome light and map light)

While the lights are illuminated, if any of

the following operations is performed, the

lights turn off immediately.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

Interior equipment/Interior light

– CONTINUED –

6-3

Interior equipment/Sun visors

“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)

are locked using the keyless access

function (if equipped).

. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)

are locked using the remote keyless entry

system.

The setting for the period of time in which

the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can

be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also,

the setting can be changed by operating

the multi information display. For details,

refer to“Interior Light” F3-41.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can slide the sun visor

toward the rear to prevent glare through

the gap between the sun visor and center

pillar. To slide the sun visor, pull it toward

the rear of the vehicle. When you have

finished sliding it, push it toward the front

of the vehicle.

6-4

CAUTION

Do not slide the sun visor over the

windshield. The sli ded sun visor

woul d obstruct your view of the

rearview mirror.

& Vanity mirror with light

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being blinded by glare.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nate when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

Storage compartment

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden stops or an

accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in t he storage compart-

ment.

Interior equipment/Storage compartment

– CONTINUED –

6-5

Interior equipment/Storage compartment

& Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,

insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, use the me-

chanical key to lock or unlock the glove

box.

NOTE

The mechanical key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is

facing and insert it again.

& Center console

The center console box provides a sto-

rage space.

1) Coin tray

2) Accessory tray

The lid located inside the center console

can b e used as a coin tr ay or an

accessory tray for small items.

1) Pen holder

2) Card holder

When the lid inside the center console is

removed, you can use the center console

as a pen holder or a card holder.

The top of the console can be used as an

armrest.

6-6

& Overhead console

To open the console, push on the lid lightly

and it will automatically open.

CAUTION

. Before operating this vehicle,

ensure that the overhead console

is closed.

. When your vehicle is parked in

the sun or on a warm day, the

inside of the overhead console

heats up. Avoid storing plastic or

other heat-vulnerable or flam-

mable articles such as a lighter

in the overhead console.

& Pocket

CAUTION

. Do not use the pocket as an

ashtray or leave a lighted cigar-

ette in the pocket. This could

cause a fire.

. When your vehicle is parked in

the sun or on a warm day, the

inside of the pocket heats up.

Avoid storing plastic or other

heat-vulnerable or flammable ar-

ticles such as a lighter in the

pocket.

To use the pocket, push on the lid lightly

and it will automatically open.

Cup holder

CAUTION

. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-

erages, if hot, might burn you

and/or your passengers. Spilled

beverages may also damage up-

holstery or carpets.

. Take care not to spill a beverage

on the shift lever/select lever or

any switch(es) in the adjacent

area. If the beverage is spilled, it

may cause a malfunction of the

shift lever/select lever and/or

switch(es).

Interior equipment/Cup holder

– CONTINUED –

6-7

Interior equipment/Cup holder

& Front passenger’s cup holder

The dual cup holder is built into the center

console.

! Bottle stopper (CVT models)

The bottle stopper is equipped to stabilize

a small cup, bottle or can. Remove it if it is

not being used.

CAUTION

. Do not put a large size cup, bottle

or can against the bottle stopper.

Otherwise, the beverage could

spill while driving and, if the

beverage is hot, it could burn

you and/or your passengers.

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to a n

accident.

& Rear passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

CAUTION

When a cup containing a beverage

is in the cup holder, do not fold

down or recline any seat. Otherwise,

the beverage could spill while driv-

ing and, if the beverage is hot, it

could burn you and/or your passen-

gers.

6-8

Bottle holders

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could burn

you and/or your passengers.

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.

Accessory power outlets

Power outlet below the climate control

Power ou tlet in the center console (if

equipped)

Interior equipment/Bottle holders

– CONTINUED –

6-9

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets

Power outlet in the cargo area (Outback)

Accessory power outlets are provided

below the climate control, in the center

console and in the cargo area. Electrical

power (12V DC) from the battery is

available at any of the outlets when the

ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

Youcanuseanin-vehicleelectrical

appliance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120W.Do

not use an appliance which exceeds the

indicated wattage for each outlet.

When using appliances connected to two

or more outlets simultaneously, the total

power consumed by them must not

exceed 120W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlet.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not

in use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

is 120W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

When using appliances con-

nected to two or more outlets

simultaneously, the total power

consumed by them must not

exceed 120 W. Overloading the

accessory power outlet can

cause a short circuit. Do not use

double adapters or more than

one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plug s that fi t

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord

on your electrical appliance will

not interfere with your shifting

gears and operating the accel-

erator and brake pedals. If they

do, do not use the electrical

appliance while driving.

6-10

Upper compartment

Lower compartment

NOTE

When the lid of the center console is

closed, a g ap remains be tween the

center console and the lid to allow the

power outlet in the center console to be

used. Pass the cord of the electrical

appliance through this gap.

Ashtray (if equipped)

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This

could cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them

into the ashtray, and then close

the ashtray securely. If you keep

the ashtray open, the fire of the

cigarette may spread to another

cigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette

butts in the ashtray.

Interior equipment/Ashtray

– CONTINUED –

6-11

Interior equipment/Coat hook

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder. For the locations of the

cup holders, refer to “Cup holder” F6-7.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the

ashtray. When removing the ashtray from

a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards.

Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to

help reduce residual smoke.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or another narrow-ended

implement.

Coat hook

WARNING

Do not place hangers or other hard

objects on the coat hooks. If such

items were hanging on the coat

hooks during deployment of the

SRS curtain airbags, they could

cause serious injuries by coming

off the coat hooks and being thrown

through the cabin or by preventing

correct airbag deployment. Before

hanging clothing on the coat hooks,

make sure there are no pointed

objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-

ing directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

6-12

The coat hook is attached to each rear

passenger’s hand grip.

Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or

more.

& Legacy

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk

lid opening.

& Outback

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

To use the hook, push the upper portion

and the shopping bag hook will appear.

Store the hook after using it.

Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook

6-13

Interior equipment/Convenient grip (Outback)

Convenient grip (Outback)

CAUTION

. Do not hang items on the con-

venient grip that weigh 6 lbs (3

kg) or more. Depending on the

conditions of use (for example, in

low temperatures, etc.), the rear

gate may lower even with lighter

loads. However, this is not a

malfunction. Be careful not to

hit your head or other body parts.

. When using the convenient grip,

do not try to close the rear gate.

Doing so may cause the item on

the grip to be jammed in the rear

gate and damaged. Remove the

item from the grip before closing

the rear gate.

A convenient grip is attached to the rear

gate trim. When the rear gate is open, you

can hang a candle lantern, wet suit, etc.

on the grip.

Floor mat

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat designed with

grommets in the correct loca-

tions.

. Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed back in its proper

location and is correctly secured

on its retaining pins.

6-14

. Do not use more than one floor

mat.

Retaining pins are located on the driver’s

side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured

using the built-in grommets, by placing the

grommets over the pins and pushing them

downward.

Cargo area cover

(Outback – if equipped)

The cargo area cove r is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

& Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its

hooks into the ca tches as shown. To

rewind it, unhook it from the catches and

it will rewind automatically. You should

hold on to the cover and guide it back into

the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a sudden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to scratch the rear

gate stays while extending and

rewinding the cover. Scratches

on the stays could cause leakage

of gas from the stays, which may

result in their inability to hold the

rear gate open.

. When reclining the rear seatback,

move the front cover backward

so that the cover is not damaged.

& To install the front cover

CAUTION

When reclining the rear seatback,

move the front cover backward so

that the cover is not damaged.

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)

– CONTINUED –

6-15

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)

1. Align the right side of the front cover

with the triangle mark before fixing the

cover in place.

2. Push the front cover to the right side

and shorten the bar.

3. Align the left side of the front cover

with the triangle mark before fixing the

cover in place.

& To remove the front cover

1. Push the front cover to the right side

and shorten the bar.

2. Remove the front cover.

& To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Hold down the button on the right-

hand rear quarter panel and lift up the

right-hand cover housing.

3. Remove the cover housing.

& Stowage of the cargo area

cover

The cargo area cover can be stowed in

under the cargo floor.

1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.

2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook

(provided on the back of the lid) on the

rear edge of the roof.

6-16

3. Remove the left and right parts of the

cargo floor lid.

4. Turn the cover housing 180 degrees

toward the front.

5. Insert the left end of the cover housing

into the retainer.

6. Stow the cover housing in the cargo

area end.

& To take out the stowed cover

housing

1. Raise the ri ght side of the cover

housing.

2. Take out the cover housing by pulling it

toward you.

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)

– CONTINUED –

6-17

Interior equipment/Convenient tie–down hooks (Outback)

& To install the cover housing

1. Insert both ends of the cover housing

into the retainers.

2. Make sure to fix the front part of the

cargo area cover behind the rear seat.

Convenient tie-down hooks

(Outback)

CAUTION

The convenient tie-down hooks are

designed only for securing l ight

cargo. Never try to secure cargo

that exce eds the capacity of th e

hooks. The maximum load capacity

is 110 lbs (50 kg) per hook.

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a luggage net or ropes.

When using the tie-down hooks, turn them

down out of the storing recesses. When

not in use, put the hooks up into the

storing recesses.

6-18

Under-floor storage compart-

ment

The subfloor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the trunk or

cargo area and can be used to store small

items. To open the lid, pull the tab or

handle up.

NOTE

When storing a flat tire, put the sub-

floor storage in the trunk or cargo area.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the sub-

floor storage compartment

closed while driving to reduce

the risk of injury in the event of

sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the subfloor storage

compartment.

Legacy

Outback

For Outback, hang the hook provided on

the underside of the lid on the rear edge of

the roof to keep the lid open.

Rear view camera

Legacy

Outback

Interior equipment/Under–floor storage compartment

– CONTINUED –

6-19

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

A rear view camera is attached to the

trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback).

When the ignition switch is “ON” and the

shift lever (MT models) or select lever

(CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear view

camera automatically displays the rear

view image behind the vehicle on the

audio/navigation monitor.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera uses

a wide-angle lens, the image on

the monitor is different from the

actual view in terms of distance.

. Since the range of the image on

the monitor is limited, you should

always check the rear view and

the surrounding area with your

eyes and mirrors, and move

backward at a slow speed. Mov-

ing backward only by checking

the rear view image from the

camera could cause an accident.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

camera, switch or wiring. If

smoke comes out or you smell

a strange odor, stop using the

rear view camera immediately.

Contact your S UBARU deale r

for an inspection. Continued use

may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle is washed with a

high-pressure washer, do not

allow water to contact the camera

directly. Entry of water in the

camera lens may result in con-

densation, malfunction, fire or

electric shock.

. Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong

impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or is

frozen on the camera, you must

be very careful removing it .

Otherwise, damage done to the

camera may cause a fire or

electric shock. Pour water or

lukewarm water over the camera

to remove mud and ice, and wipe

it with a soft, dry cloth.

. Do not put a flame close to the

camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-

mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sure

to use a fuse with the specified

rating. Use of a fuse wit h a

different rating may result in a

malfunction.

. If the rear view camera is used for

a long time while the engine is

not operated, the battery may

become completely discharged.

NOTE

. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,

benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,

discoloration may occur. To remove

contamination, wipe the camera with a

cloth moistened with a diluted neutral

detergent and then wipe it with a soft,

dry cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the camera. If it

comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted

neutral detergent to remove the wax.

. The camera lens has hard coating to

help prevent scratches. However, when

washing the vehicle or cleaning the

camera lens, be careful not to scratch

the camera lens. Do not use a washing

brush directly on the camera lens. The

monitor screen may be adversely af-

fected.

. Strong light shined on the camera

lens may develop white light stripes

around the light source. This is not a

malfunction.

6-20

. Under fluorescent lighting, the dis-

play may flicker. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. The image of the rear view camera

may be slightly different from the

actual color of the objects.

& How to use the rear view

camera

When performing the following procedure,

the rear view camera automatically dis-

plays the rear view image from the

vehicle.

1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Set the shift lever or select lever to “R”.

When any of the following conditions

occur, the image before setting to “R” will

be displayed.

. Several seconds have passed since

the shift lever is set to a position other than

“R” (MT models) (off delay function).

. Several seconds have passed since

the select lever is set to a position other

than “P” or “R” (CVT models) (off delay

function).

. The vehicle speed is more than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

. The select lever is set to “P” (CVT

models).

NOTE

. For models with the genuine

SUBARU navigation system, the image

of the rear view camera has priority

over other screen displays. To operate

other screens, set the shift lever (MT

models) or select lever (CVT models) to

a position other than “R”.

. The image of the rear view camera is

horizontally reversed as is the case

with the vehicle rear view mirror or the

side view mirror.

. It may be difficult to see the image of

the rear view camera in the following

cases. This is not a malfunction of the

camera.

– The vehicle is in a dark place (at

night, in a tunnel, etc.).

– The vehicle is in an extremely hot

or cold place.

– An object (such as raindrops,

snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the

view of the rear view camera sticks

to the lens of the camera.

– Strong light shined directly on

the camera lens (occasionally, there

are vertical lines on the screen).

& Viewing range on the screen

Range of view

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

– CONTINUED –

6-21

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper and areas just under the bumper

cannot be viewed.

Also, the image from the rear view camera

looks shorter than the actual distance.

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is an object that has a

wide projection on its upper part such as a

sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-

tion cannot be seen on the screen.

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly.

& Help line

The help line (distance marker and vehicle

width line) is a guide to help you realize

the actual distance from the screen.

NOTE

If you shift to the “R” range shortly

after turning on the ignition switch, the

help line and warning message may

not be d isplayed. Wait for several

seconds or more after turning on the

ignition switch before shifting to the

“R” range. Then help line and warning

message will be displayed.

6-22

Help lines

1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

6) Vehicle centerline

When the shift lever or select lever is set

to position “R”, the monitor screen dis-

plays the help lines together with the rear

view image.

CAUTION

. When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes

without relying on the help lines.

. The actual position may be dif-

ferent from the indication of the

help lines.

. Differences may occur due to

number of passengers or loaded

cargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope or

when the vehicle is inclined

against the road, the indication

is different from the actual posi-

tion.

. Be sure to observe the displayed

warning message of “Check Sur-

roundings Before Backing Up”.

! Difference between screen and ac-

tual road

The distance markers show the distance

for a level road when the vehicle is not

loaded. It may be different from the actual

distance depending on the loading condi-

tions or road conditions.

! When there is an upward slope at

the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

– CONTINUED –

6-23

Interior equipment/Rear view camera

! When there is a downward slope

at the back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance as in an

upward slope.

! Feature of distance marker

1) 3 feet (1 m) line

2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line

3) 10 feet (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or other object

close behind, distance cannot be correctly

displayed.

6-24

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3

Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-4

State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7

Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8

Starting and stopping the engine (models

without push-button ignition switch) .............. 7-9

Starting engine.................................................... 7-9

Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11

Steering lock (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”) ........................ 7-11

Starting and stopping engine (models with

push-button start system) .............................. 7-12

Safety precautions ............................................. 7-12

Operating range for push-button start

system............................................................. 7-12

Starting engine................................................... 7-12

Stopping engine ................................................. 7-14

When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-14

Steering lock (models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”) ............................... 7-14

Remote engine start system (dealer

option).............................................................. 7-15

Models with “keyless access with push-button

start system” ................................................... 7-16

Models without “keyless access with push-button

start system” ................................................... 7-17

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote

start................................................................. 7-20

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start

shutdown......................................................... 7-20

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the

vehicle ............................................................ 7-20

Service mode (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”) ....................... 7-20

Remote transmitter program (models without

“keyless access with push-button start

system”).......................................................... 7-20

System maintenance.......................................... 7-21

Manual transmission ......................................... 7-23

Selecting reverse gear ....................................... 7-23

Shifting speeds.................................................. 7-23

Driving tips........................................................ 7-24

Continuously variable transmission ................. 7-25

Select lever ....................................................... 7-26

Shift lock function ............................................. 7-27

Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-29

Driving tips........................................................ 7-30

Power steering................................................... 7-31

Braking ............................................................... 7-32

Braking tips....................................................... 7-32

Brake system .................................................... 7-32

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-33

ABS (Ant i-lock Brake System).......................... 7-33

ABS self-check .................................................. 7-33

ABS warning light.............................................. 7-33

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ............................................................. 7-34

Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-34

Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-35

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-36

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-37

Starting and operating

X-mode (Outback CVT models)......................... 7-38

To activate/deactivate the X-mode....................... 7-39

Hill descent control function............................... 7-39

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if

equipped) ......................................................... 7-40

Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-42

Electronic parking brake..................................... 7-42

Parking tips ....................................................... 7-46

Hill start assist system (MT models) ................ 7-47

To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist

system............................................................. 7-48

Cruise control..................................................... 7-49

To set cruise control .......................................... 7-49

To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-50

To turn off the cruise control .............................. 7-51

To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-51

Cruise control indicator ..................................... 7-52

Cruise control set indicator................................ 7-52

Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD) (if

equipped) ........................................................ 7-52

System features................................................. 7-53

System operation............................................... 7-54

SRVD approach indicator light/warning

buzzer ............................................................. 7-55

SRVD warning indicator ..................................... 7-57

SRVD OFF switch .............................................. 7-58

Certification for the Subaru Rear Vehicle

Detection (SRVD) ............................................. 7-59

Handling of radar sensors.................................. 7-59

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel

additive may cause engine damage.

& Fuel requirements

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

! Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane a nd Motor Octane

numbers and is commonly referred to as

the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Using a gasoline with a lower octane

rating can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicle

sometimes knocks lightly when you drive

up a hill or when you accelerate. See your

dealer or a qualified service technician if

you use a fuel with the specified octane

rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently.

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! California fuel

If your vehicle was certified to California

Emission Standards as indicated on the

underhood tune-up label, it is designed to

optimize engine and emission control

system performance with gasoline that

meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-

fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in

any other state than California, your

vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting

Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-

side California is permitted to have higher

sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-

mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter

and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or

smell. SUBARU recommends that you try

a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service. The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light may also

turn on. If this occurs, return to your

authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.

If it is determined that the condition is

caused by the type of fuel used, repairs

may not be covered by your warranty.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not

be covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-

taining alcohol may cause paint

damage, which is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Yo ur use of ga soline with detergent

additives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

Starting and operating/Fuel

– CONTINUED –

7-3

Starting and operating/Fuel

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in

your vehicle, but should contain no more

than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the

proper operation of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 10% ethanol, including from

any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85

(which are only some examples of fuel

containing more than 10% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gaso lines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station

operators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line b efore seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system dama ge or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. Stop the vehicle and turn off the

engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever up. The lever is on the floor

at the left of the driver’s seat.

7-4

1) Legacy

2) Outback

3. Open the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar o bject to discharge any

static electricity that may be present

on your body. If your body is carry-

ing an electrostatic charge, there is

a possibility that an electric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

1) Open

2) Close

4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

first stop the engine and close all

vehicle doors and windows.

Make sure that there are no

lighted cigarettes, open flames

or electrical sparks in the adja-

cent area. Refueling must be

performed outside. Quickly wipe

up any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the

left. Do n ot remove the cap

quickly. Fuel may be under pres-

sure and spray out of the fuel

filler neck, especially in hot

weather. If you hear a hissing

sound while you are removing

the cap, wait for the sound to

stop and then slowly open the

cap to prevent fuel from spraying

out and creating a fire hazard.

5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

Starting and operating/Fuel

– CONTINUED –

7-5

Starting and operating/Fuel

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-

matic stop mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel.

7. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the painted

surface, rinse it off immediately.

Otherwise, the painted surface

could be damaged.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door (lid) is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning li ght/malfunction indicator

light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK

ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-

dicator light” F3-15.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could

occur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit, and

your fuel tank and emission con-

trol system may be damaged. It

could also lead to fuel spillage

and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

7-6

as a result of an empty tank

could cause damage to the en-

gine.

State emission testing (U.S.

only)

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model

must NEVER be performed on a

single two-wheel dynamometer. At-

tempting to do so will result in

uncontrolled vehicle movement and

may cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-

ber to tell your inspection or

service station in advance not to

place your SUBARU AWD vehicle

on a two-wheel dynamometer.

Otherwise, serious transmission

damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicle’s emission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle emis-

sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII

inspections apply to all 1996 model year

and newer passenger cars and trucks.

Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-

bia have implemented emission inspec-

tion of the OBDII system.

. The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-

function indicator light (MIL) and an

examination of the OBDII system with an

electronic scan tool.

. A vehicle

passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-

served, there are no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness

monitors are all complete.

Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)

– CONTINUED –

7-7

Starting and operating/Preparing to drive

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not

properly operating (light is illuminated or is

not working due to a burned out bulb) or

there is one or more diagnostic trouble

codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT

READY” is greater than on e. If the

vehicle’s battery has been recently re-

placed or disconnected, the OBDII system

inspection may indicate that the vehicle is

not ready for the emission test. Under this

condition, the vehicle driver should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few

days to reset the readiness monitors and

return for an emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection p rogram. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

one place. Prior to your vehicle being put

on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector

not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

program have EXEMP TED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer. There are some states that

use four-wheel dynamometers in their

testing program. When properly used, this

equipment should not damage a SUBARU

AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected for

state emission testing.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)

and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat.

6. Check the adjustment of the inside

and outside mirrors.

7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

8. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

10. Check that no small animals enter the

engine compartment.

7-8

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-

ing fan and belts of the engine may

result in a malfunction. Check that

no small animal enters the engine

compartment and under the vehicle

before starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

Starting and stopping the

engine (models without

push-button ignition switch)

& Starting engine

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the st arter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds or

more before trying again.

! General precautions when starting

engine

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out-

side the vehicle (except when

using the remote engine start

system). It may result in an

accident.

. Do not leave the engine running

in locations with poor ventilation,

such as a garage and indoors.

The exhaust gas may enter the

vehicle or indoors, and it may

result in carbon monoxide poi-

soning.

. Do not start the engine near dry

foliage, paper, or other flam-

mable substances. The exhaust

pipe and exhaust emissions can

create a f ire hazard at high

temperatures.

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped during

driving, the catalyst may over-

heat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure

to sit in the driver’s seat (except

when using the remote engine

start system).

NOTE

. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-

eration immediately after the engine

has started.

. For a short time after the engine has

started, the engine speed is kept high.

When the warm-up is completed, the

engine speed lowers automatically.

. On rare occasions, it may be difficult

to start the engine depending on the

fuel and the usage condition (repeated

driving of a distance in which t he

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button ignition switch)

– CONTINUED –

7-9

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button ignition switch)

engine has not warmed up sufficiently).

In such a case, it is recommended that

you change to a different brand of fuel.

. On rare occasions, transient knock-

ing may be heard from the engine when

the accelerator is operated rapidly

such as a rapid start-up and a rapid

acceleration. This is not a malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when

the headlights, air conditioner and rear

window defogger are turned off.

. After the engine starts, the engine

speed will be kept high until the engine

has warmed up sufficiently.

! MT models

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor

and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold

the clutch pedal to the floor while starting

the engine. The starter motor will only

operate when the clutch pedal is de-

pressed fully to the floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, perform the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is applied, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and w ait f or at leas t 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine sta rts, qui ckly re lease t he

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this does not start the engine,

turn the ignition switch again to the

“LOCK” position. After waiting for 10

seconds or longer, turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position without

depressing the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

! CVT models

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the select

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the select lever of a

moving vehicle into the “P” posi-

tion.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” posi tion). The

starter will only operate when the select

lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, perform the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

7-10

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is applied, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator peda l and turn the igni tion

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine s tarts, qu ickly r elease the

accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the select lever is at the “P” or

“N” position and that the parking brake is

applied.

& Stopping the engine

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK” position on the

ignition switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

& Steering lock (models with-

out “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

After stopping the engine and the key is

removed from ignition switch, the steering

wheel will be locked due to the steering

lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically canceled.

! When the steering lock cannot be

released

When you cannot restart the engine due to

the steering lock, perform the following

steps.

! MT models

1. Check that the parking brake is ap-

plied.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor

and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold

the clutch pedal to the floor while starting

the engine.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

5. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights.

6. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal.

7. Release the key immediately after the

engine has started.

If you cannot start the engine, there may

be a malfunction in the steering lock

function. Immediately contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button ignition switch)

– CONTINUED –

7-11

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

! CVT models

1. Check that the parking brake is ap-

plied.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

3. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

6. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights.

7. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal.

8. Release the key immediately after the

engine has started.

If you cannot start the engine, there may

be a malfunction in the steering lock

function. Immediately contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

Starting and stopping engine

(models with push-button

start system)

& Safety precautions

Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-10.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

Refer to “Operating range for push-button

start system” F3-5.

& Starting engine

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General precau-

tions when starting engine” F7-

. If the indicator on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in

green after the engine has

started, never drive the vehicle.

The steering is still locked, and it

may result in an accident.

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be

a malfunction with the vehicle.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately.

. If the indicator on the push-

button ignition switch is flashing

in green after the engine has

started, it means that the steering

is still locked. While moving the

steering wheel right and left,

depress the brake pedal, and

press the push-b utton ignition

switch.

. Do not conti nue pushing the

push-button ignition switch for

more than 10 seconds. Doing so

could cause a malfunction. If the

engine does not start, stop push-

ing the push-button ignition

switch and turn off the engine.

Wait 10 seconds, and then push

the push-button ignition switch

to start the engine.

7-12

NOTE

. Whe n the push-button ig nition

switch is pressed while depressing

the brake pedal, the engine starter

operates for a maximum of 10 seconds

and after starting the engine, the starter

stops automatically.

. Whe n the push-button ig nition

switch is pressed while depressing

the brake pedal, the engine can be

started regardless of the power status.

. If the security indicator light illumi-

nates when you attempt to start the

engine but the engine does not start,

press the push-button ignition switch

to switch the power to “OFF” and then

try to start the engine again.

. If the engine does not start, press

the push-button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to switch

the power to “OFF”. Then, while de-

pressing the brake pedal more force-

fully, press the push-button ignition

switch.

. The engine start procedures may

not function depending on the radio

wave conditions around the vehicle. In

such a case, refer to “Starting engine”

F9-19.

. If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the steering cannot be unlocked.

Charge the battery.

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is

pressed while depressing the brake pedal,

the engine will start. The starting proce-

dure for the engine is as follows.

1. Carry the access key, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Shift the select lever into the “P ”

position. The engine can also start when

the select lever is in the “N” position,

however, for safety reasons, start in the

“P” position.

4. Depress t he brake pedal until the

operation ind icator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green. When starting

with the select lever in the “N” position, the

indicator does not turn green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

. While pressing the select lever but-

ton in, the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch will not turn green even

when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

. In case the engine does not start by

the normal engine start procedure,

move the select lever to the “P” posi-

tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.

Depress the brake pedal, and press the

push-button ignition switch for at least

15 seconds. The engine may start. Only

use this engine start procedure in case

of emergency.

. When the engine is not started, the

brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a

case, depress the brake pedal more

forcefully than usual. Check that the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green, and press

the push-button ignition switch to start

the engine.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

– CONTINUED –

7-13

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)

& Stopping engine

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Mo ve the select lever to the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows,

the engine will stop.

– The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake

booster will not function. A great-

er foot pressure will be required

on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will

not operate either. A greater

force will be required to steer,

and it may result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving,

do not operate the push-button

ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous

because the steering lock may be

activated. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place, and contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

. Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. If the engine is stopped while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position, the power

will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is

left in this condition, the battery

may be discharged.

NOTE

Although you can stop the engine by

operating the push-button ignition

switch, do not stop the engine during

driving except in an emergency.

& When access key does not

operate properly

Refer to “Access key – if access key does

not operate properly” F9-18.

& Steering lock (models with

“keyless access with push-

button start system”)

After stopping the engine and the driver’s

door is open, the steering wheel will be

locked due to the steering lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically canceled.

! When the steering lock cannot be

released

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

When you cannot restart the engine due to

the steering lock, check the status of

operation indicator and perform the follow-

ing steps.

7-14

! Operation indicator flashing in

green

1. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position.

2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

while turning the steering wheel left and

right.

! Operation indicator flashing in

orange

There may be a malfunction in the

steering lock function. Immediately con-

tact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Remote engine start system

(dealer option)

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General precau-

tions when starting engine” F7-

. Do not remote start a vehicle in

an enclosed environment (e.g.

closed garage). Prolonged opera-

tion of a motor vehicle in an

enclosed environment can cause

a harmful build-up of Carbon

Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure

to high levels of Carbon Monox-

ide can cause headaches, dizzi-

ness or in extreme cases uncon-

sciousness and/or death.

. Before performing any servicing

of the vehicle, temporarily place

the remote engine start system in

service mode to prevent the

system from unexpectedly start-

ing the engine.

The remote engine start system allows

you to start the engine from outside the

vehicle. In addition, the remote engine

start system can activate the heater or air

conditioner, providing you with a comfor-

table cabin upon entry.

NOTE

Thelengthoftimeforwhichitis

acceptable to allow the engine to

remain idling may be bound by local

laws and regulations. Check the local

rules when using the remote engine

start system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

– CONTINUED –

7-15

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

& Models with “keyless access

with push-button start sys-

tem”

NOTE

For more details, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the remote

engine start system.

Access key

1) Lock button

An access key can be used as the remote

engine start transmitter. Operate the lock

button to start or stop the engine as

follows.

! Before starting the engine

Before using the remote engine start

system to start the engine, confirm the

following conditions.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

. All doors including the rear gate are

closed.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The push-button ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position.

! When starting the engine

To start the engine with remote engine

start system, briefly press the lock button

twice within 2 seconds, then press and

hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The

hazard warning flashers then flash once

and the keyless buzzer chirps once.

2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock

button briefly again. The hazard warning

flashers then flash once again, and the

keyless buzzer chirps once again.

3. After step 2, immediately press and

hold the lock button. The hazard warning

flashers then flash three times, and the

horn will honk once.

4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,

release the lock button. The engine will

then start successfully.

! When stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop the

engine with remote engine start system.

! Automatic engine shutdown

The remote engine start system will

automatically shut down or will not start

the engine under the following conditions.

. The total run-time has exceeded 20

minutes.

. Any door or the rear gate is opened.

. The select lever is moved to any

position other than “P”.

. The engine hood is opened.

. Thepush-buttonignitionswitchis

pressed.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or

more.

The time until the engine automatically

stops differs according to the setting.

To change the time until the engine

automatically stops, contact your

SUBARU dealer. However, local laws

and regulations may prohibit changing

this time.

7-16

& Models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system”

Remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

1) Fob button

! Starting the engine

NOTE

All vehicle doors (including rear gate/

trunk lid) and the engine hood must be

closed prior to activating the remote

engine start system. Any open entry

point will prevent starting or cause the

engine to stop.

The remote engine start system is acti-

vated by pressing the fob button on your

remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within

operating range of the system and the

start request is received, the following will

occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps once.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

If the fob is not within range (the user is

too far away from the vehicle), the fob will

indicate two long flashes without beeping.

The system will check certain safety

preconditions before starting, and if all

conditions are met, the engine will start

within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,

the following will occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps twice.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote

engine start system, the following will

occur.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights remain illuminated.

. The fob button flashes once every 3

seconds.

. The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start

(or starts and stalls) the remote engine

start system will power off and then

attempt to start the engine 3 additional

times. The system will not attempt to

restart the engine if it determines a vehicle

malfunction is preventing starting. If the

engine does not start after 3 additional

attempts, the remote engine start request

will be aborted.

! Stopping the engine

Press and hold the fob button for at least 2

seconds to stop the engine. The fob will

flash and beep three times, indicating the

engine has stopped. If the stop request is

not received (for example, if the user is too

far away from the vehicle), the fob will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds.

The system will automatically stop the

engine after 15 minutes.

! Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the

remote engine start system will prevent

starting (or stop the engine if running) and

sound the horn twice if any of the following

conditions is detected. In addition, the fob

will flash and beep 3 times.

. The brake pedal is depressed

. A key is in the ignition switch

. The engine hood is open

. The remote start system “Service

mode” is engaged

. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

– CONTINUED –

7-17

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

RPM

. The security alarm is triggered

. The select le ver is n ot in the “P”

position

If the system detects any door (including

the rear gate/trunk lid) open during opera-

tion, it will prevent starting or stop the

engine, and sound the horn and flash side

marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights

6 times.

In addition to the items above, if the

vehicle’s engine management system

determines there is a safety risk due to a

vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will

power down and the horn will sound 3

times.

NOTE

. If the alarm system is armed at the

time of remote engine starter activation

(the security indicator light on the

combination meter is flashing), the

alarm system will remain armed

throughout the remote start run cycle.

. If the alarm system is disarmed at

the time of remote engine starter

activation (the security indicator light

on the combination meter is not flash-

ing), the alarm system will remain

disarmed throughout the remote start

run cycle.

! Remote start operation - fob con-

firmation

Your remote engine starter fob is a

bidirectional transceiver that can confirm

system operation with several different

visual and audible indications. The fob’s

LED-backlit button and internal piezo

buzzer will indicate status of the system

using the following flash and beep se-

quences, provided the fob is within opera-

tional range of the system.

7-18

Precondition

Fob Indication

Meaning

Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed

Continuous while button is

held down

— The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fob

button twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started

2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)

Engine idling by remote engine start operation

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps

Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety

reasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and

holding fob button for at least 2 sec.

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

1 flash every 3 sec —

Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

– CONTINUED –

7-19

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

& Entering the vehicle while it

is running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless access function (if equipped) or

remote keyless entry system, then open

the door(s). If the vehicle’s doors are

unlocked manually using the key, the

vehicle’s alarm system will trigger when

a door is opened (if the alarm system is

armed prior to activating the remote

engine start system) and the engine will

turn off. Perform either of the following

procedures to disarm the alarm system.

Refer to “Alarm system” F2-27.

. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “ON” position (models

without “keyless access with push-

button start system”)

. Push the push-button ignition switch

to the “ACC” or “ON” position (models

with “keyless access with push-button

start system”)

. Press any button on the access key/

remote keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle.

3. The engine will shut down when any

door or rear gate is opened.

4. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”, insert the

key into the ignition switch and turn to the

“START” position to restart the engine. For

models with “keyless access with push-

button start system”, press the push-

button ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal to restart the engine.

& Entering the vehicle follow-

ing remote engine start shut-

down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by the remote keyless entry

system/keyless access function within a

few seconds immediately following remote

engine start shutdown.

& Pre-heating or pre-cooling

the interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-

perature controls to the desired setting

and operation. After the system starts the

engine, the heater or air conditioning will

activate and heat or cool the interior to

your setting.

& Service mode (models with-

out “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

In service mode, the remote engine start

function is temporarily disabled to prevent

the system from unexpectedly starting the

engine while being serviced.

To engage or disengage service mode:

1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle

doors and the rear gate/trunk lid.

2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P”

position (CVT models)

3. Depress and hold the brake pedal

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position

5. Press and release the remote engine

start transmitter “

” button three times.

The system will honk the vehicle ’s horn

each time the button is pressed.

6. The system will pause for 1 second

then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to

indicate that the service mode has been

engaged or honk one time to indicate that

the service mode has been disengaged.

NOTE

When taking your vehicle in for service,

it is recommended that you inform the

service personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with a remote engine start

system.

& Remote transmitter program

(models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system”)

New transmitters can be programmed to

the remote engine start system in the

7-20

event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,

damaged or additional transmitters are

desired (the system will accept up to eight

transmitters). New remote engine start

transmitters can be programmed accord-

ing to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain opened throughout the

entire process).

2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then

“LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, back

to “ ON” then “LOCK”, then back to “ON”

again and leave the ignition “ON” through-

out the programming process.

4. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn three times, indicating that

the system has entered the transmitter

learn mode.

5. Press and release the “

” button on

the transmitter that you want to program.

6. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn one time, indicating that the

system has learned the transmitter. Upon

successful programming, the remote start

confirmation transmitter button will flash

one time.

7. Repeat step 5 for any additional

transmitters (the system will accept up to

eight transmitters).

8. The system will exit the transmitter

learn mode if the key is turned to the

“LOCK” position, the door is closed or

after 2 minutes.

& System maintenance

NOTE

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

In the event that the vehicle’s battery is

replaced, discharged or disconnected,

it will be necessary to start the vehicle

a minimum of one time using the key

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. This is required to allow

the vehicle electronic systems to re-

synchronize.

! Changing the batteries

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the remote engine start

transmitter when replacing the

battery.

. Be careful n ot to damage the

printed circuit board in the re-

mote engine start transmitter

when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts ; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if

an incorrect replacement battery

is used. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of bat-

tery.

. Batteries should not be exposed

to excessive heat such as sun-

shine, fire or the like.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system:

Perform the procedure described in “Re-

placing battery of access key” F11-49.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-

2032) supplied in your remote engine start

transmitter should last approximately one

year, depending on usage. When the

battery begins to weaken, you will notice

a decrease in range (distance from the

vehicle that your remote control operates).

Follow the instructions below to change

the remote engine start transmitter battery.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

– CONTINUED –

7-21

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-

cated on the back side of the transmitter.

2. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small flat-

head screwdriver.

3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove the

battery and replace with a new one. Be

sure to observe the (+) sign on the old

battery before removing it to ensure that

the new battery is i nserted properly

(battery “+” should be pointed away from

the transmitter circuit board on the bat-

tery).

4. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, reinstall the phillips screw and

test the remote engine start system.

NOTE

. This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment and void warranty.

. To comply with the FCC RF expo-

sure compliance requirements, no

change to the antenna or the device is

permitted. Any change to the antenna

or the device could result in the device

exceeding the RF exposure require-

ments and void user’s authority to

operate the device.

7-22

Manual transmission

WARNING

. Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or

with the shift lever in the neutral

position. Engine braking has no

effect in either of these condi-

tions and the risk of an accident

is consequently increased.

. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,

release the clutch pedal) sud-

denly when starting the vehicle.

By doing so the vehicle might

unexpectedly accelerate or the

transmission could malfunction.

The manual transmission is a full synchro-

mesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-reverse-

speed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift

lever knob.

& Selecting reverse gear

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse when

the vehicle is moving.

1) Slider

You must raise the slider and hold it in that

position before you can move the shift

lever to the “R” position.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch

pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually

let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during

normal driving is ensured by shifting up

at the speeds listed in the following table.

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

– CONTINUED –

7-23

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th

50 (80)

! Maximum allowable speeds

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

engine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

The following table shows the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will

enter the red area if these speeds are

exceeded.

With the exception of cases where sudden

acceleration is required, the vehicle

should not be driven with the tachometer’s

needle inside the red area. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

excessive engine wear and poor fuel

economy.

mph (km/h)

Gear Legacy Outback

1st 30 (49) 30 (48)

2nd 57 (92) 56 (90)

3rd

Legal speed limit

(Posted limit speed)

4th

5th

6th

NOTE

Never exceed posted speed limits.

& Driving tips

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an

upgrade. Either of those actions may

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear

as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock

when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or

rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This

phenomenon does not indicate a problem.

7-24

Continuously variable trans-

mission

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to lurch forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is applied or

when chocks are used in the

wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Do not shift from the “D” position

into the “R” position or vice

versa until the vehicle has com-

pletely stopped. Such shifting

may cause damage to the trans-

mission.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P” position. Do not park for

a long time with the select lever

in any other position as doing so

could result in a dead battery.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, the transmission will

upshift to higher engine speeds than

when the coolant temperature is suffi-

ciently high in order to shorten the

warm-up time and improve driveability.

The gearshift timing will automatically

shift to the normal timing after the

engine has warmed up.

. Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the

transmission operation is somewhat

unusual. This results from invalidation

of data which the on-board computer

has collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

. When driving under continuous hea-

vy load conditions such as towing a

camper or climbing a long, steep hill,

the engine speed or the vehicle speed

may automatically be reduced. This is

not a malfunction. This phenomenon

results from the engine control func-

tion maintaining the cooling perfor-

mance of the vehicle. The engine and

vehicle speed will return to a normal

speed when the engine is able to

maintain the optimum cooling perfor-

mance after the heavy load decreases.

Driving under a heavy load must be

performed with extreme care. Do not

try to pass a vehicle in front when

driving on an uphill slope while towing.

. The continuously variable transmis-

sion is a chain type system that

provides superior transmission effi-

ciency for maximum fuel economy. At

times, depending on varying driving

conditions, a chain operating noise

may be heard that is characteristic of

this type of system.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

– CONTINUED –

7-25

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

& Select lever

1) Select lever button

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in

: Shift without pressing the select lever

button

The select lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate

for using the manual mode.

NOTE

For some models, to protect the engine

while the select lever is in the “P ” or

“N” position, the engine is controlled

so that the engine speed ma y not

become too high even if the accelerator

pedal is depressed hard.

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine. In this position, the

transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmis-

sion.

To shift the select lever from the “P” to any

other position, you should depress the

brake pedal fully then move the select

lever. Thi s prevents the vehi cle from

lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

the “R” position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement

of the select lever from the “N” to “R”

position is possible for a limited time

period by depressing the brake pedal,

and then it becomes impossible. For

details, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-27.

7-26

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine. In this position, the transmission is

neutral, meaning that the wheels and

transmission are not locked. Therefore,

the vehicle will roll freely, even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

select lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

NOTE

If the select lever is in the “N” position

when you stop the engine for parking,

you may not subsequently be able to

move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If

this happens, turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position. You will then be able

to move the select lever to the “P”

position.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require. Also, while driving up and

down a hill, the transmission assists and

controls the driving performance and

engine braking while corresponding to

the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in “D”

position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift.

In this case, the transmission will operate

like a conventional automatic transmis-

sion. When you release the pedal, the

transmission will return to the original gear

position.

To use the manual mode, move the lever

from this position into the manual gate.

! While climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is

prevented from taking place when the

accelerator is released. This minimizes

the chance of subsequent downshifting to

a lower gear when accelerating again.

This prevents repeated upshifting and

downshifting resulting in a smoother op-

eration of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift, de-

pending on the way the accelerator

pedal is depressed to accelerate the

vehicle again.

& Shift lock function

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

. The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

. The select lever cannot be moved from

the “P” position to any other position

before the brake pedal is depressed.

Depress the brake pedal first, and then

operate the select lever.

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the key from the “ACC” position to the

“LOCK” position and remove the key from

the ignition key cylinder (models without

“keyless access with push-button start

system”).

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the push-button ignition switch to the

“OFF” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select

lever is in the “N” position, the select lever

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

– CONTINUED –

7-27

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

may not be moved to the “P” position after

a period of time. Therefore, move the

select lever to the “ P” position with the

brake pedal depressed soon after the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

! Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn

the ignition switch back to the “ON”

position then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the select lever button

pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, perform

the following steps.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P” to “N”:

Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion” F7-28.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:

Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-

tion switch in the “ACC” position, move the

select lever to the “ P” position with the

select lever button pressed and brake

pedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure,

the shift lock system (or the vehicle control

system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon

as possible.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, refer to

“Shift lock release using the shift lock

release portion” F7-28.

! Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion

Perform the following procedure to release

the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and stop the

engine.

2. Open the lid of the pocket.

1) Hole

3. Turn over the inner trim of the pocket.

4. Remove the grip portion of the screw-

driver.

7-28

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert the screwdriver into the hole, press

the shift lock release portion using the

screwdriver, and then move the select

lever.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection

as soon as possible.

& Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M” position to select the

manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator on the

combination meter illuminate. The gear

position indicator shows the currently

selected gear in the 1st-to-6th gear range.

The upshift and downshift indicators show

when a gearshift is possible. When the

upshift indicator “

” is on, upshifting is

possible. When the downshift indicator

“

” is on, downshifting is possible. When

both indicators are on, upshifting and

downshifting are both possible. When the

vehicle stops (for exampl e, at traffic

signals), the downshift indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

– CONTINUED –

7-29

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated

on it. To downshift to the next lower gear

position, pull the shift paddle that has “– ”

indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the

select lever to the “D” position from the “M ”

position.

While driving with the select lever in the

“D ” position, if you change gears by

operating the shift paddle, the gear posi-

tion indicator light illuminates and shows

the current gear condition.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on

the shift paddles. Doing so may

result in accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when

the engine speed is too high, i.e., when

a downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-

sion.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the transmis-

sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT

OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and let the engine idle until the

warning light turns off.

& Driving tips

. On a road surface where there is a risk

of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or

gravel-covered road), you can pull away

from a standstill safely and easily by first

selecting the 2nd gear of the manual

mode.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Always apply the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D” position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

malfunction.

. A slight reduction in output torque may

occur in the models with a 3.6 L engine

before the engine warms up.

7-30

Power steering

Power steering warning light

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

power steering warning light on the

combination meter illuminates to inform

the driver that the warning system is

functioning properly. Then, if the engine

started, the warning light turns off to inform

the driver that the steering power assist is

operational.

CAUTION

While the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period

of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur t oo fre-

quently, this may result in a malfunc-

tion of the power steering control

system.

Starting and operating/Power steering

7-31

Starting and operating/Braking

Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing

the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To

help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to

get stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle ha s a dual circuit brake

system. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. Do not

turn off the engine while driving because

that will turn off the brake booster, result-

ing in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, however, you

will have to depress the pedal much

harder than normal and the braking dis-

tance will increase.

! Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the

brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the following

phenomena occur. However, even

though these occur, they do not indi-

7-32

cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal

is applied by lighter force and gener-

ates a greater braking force.

. You might hear the sound of ABS

operating from the engine compart-

ment.

& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle inspected by

the nearest SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

youaredrivingwithanABS

equipped vehicle could easily lead

to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy road, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. When driving under

these conditions, therefore, re-

duce your speed and leave ample

distance from other vehicles.

. When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintain constant

brake pedal pressure. Do not

pump the brake p edal since

doing so may defeat the opera-

tion of the ABS.

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when

the ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10

km/h).

& ABS self-check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating noise of the

ABS from the engine compartment just

after the vehicle is started. This is caused

by an automatic functional test of the ABS

being carried out and does not indicate

any abnormal condition.

& ABS warning light

Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-18.

Starting and operating/ABS (Anti–lock Brake System)

7-33

Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

function fails, the EBD system also stops

working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD system

malfunctions

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehi-

cle’s motion may therefore become some-

what harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,

flat location.

2. Apply the parking brake and turn off

the engine.

3. Restart the engine.

4. Release the parking brake.

If both warning lights turn off:

The EBD system may be malfunctioning.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

If both warning lights illuminate again

and remain illuminated after restarting

the engine:

1. Turn off the engine again.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Check the brake fluid level. For details

about checking the brake fluid level, refer

to “Checking the fluid level” F11-19.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Dri ve carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.

Instead, have the vehicle towed to the

7-34

nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether

the brakes are operating prop-

erly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the

nearest SUBARU dealer for re-

pair.

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system equipped

vehicle could easily lead to a ser-

ious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be

used when driving on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having a

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control s ystem is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle equipped with the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, have

an inspection of that system

performed by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly.

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all

four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

– Use only the specified tem-

porary spare tire to replace a

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

– CONTINUED –

7-35

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

flat tire. With a temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness

of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol syst em is reduced and

this should be taken into ac-

count when driving the vehi-

cle in such a condition.

. If non-matching tires are used,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system may not operate cor-

rectly.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

NOTE

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.

– The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

– An operating noise from the en-

gine compartment is heard briefly

when starting the engine and when

driving off after starting the engine.

– The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the

engine.

. In the following circumstances, the

vehicle may be less stable than it feels

to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control System may therefore operate.

Such operation does not indicate a

system malfunction.

– on gravel-covered or rutted

roads

– on unfinished roads

– when the vehicle is towing a

trailer

– when the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if the vehicle is equipped with

Vehicle Dynamics Control.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire as failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light” F3-22 and “Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3-

23.

7-36

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch

Pressingtheswitchtodeactivatethe

Vehicle Dyn amics Control system can

facilitate the following operations.

. a standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. extrication of t he vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during engine

operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light on the combination

meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will be deactivated. When

the switch is pressed again to reactivate

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light turns off.

You should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

the above-mentioned situations.

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem helps prevent unstable vehicle

motion such as skidding using con-

trol of the brakes and engine power.

Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system unless it is abso-

lutely necessary. If you must turn off

the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem, drive very carefully based on

the road surface condition.

NOTE

. When the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system automatically reacti-

vates itself the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position and the engine is restarted.

. If the switch is held down for 30

seconds or longer, the indicator light

turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is activated, and the system

ignores any fur ther pressing of the

switch. To make the switch usable

again, turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the

engine.

. Whentheswitchispressedto

deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system, the vehicle’s running per-

formance is comparable with that of a

vehicle that does not have a Vehicle

Dynamics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system except when absolutely neces-

sary.

. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is deactivated, compo-

nents of the brake control system may

still activate. When the brake control

system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator

light illuminates.

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

7-37

Starting and operating/X–mode (Outback CVT models)

X-mode (Outback CVT mod-

els)

WARNING

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with X-mode could easily lead to

a serious accident.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with hill descent control function

could easily lead to a serious

accident. Be especially careful,

and depress the brake pedal if

necessary when driving on ex-

tremely steep downhill, frozen,

muddy or sandy roads. Failure

to con trol the vehicle’s speed

may cause a loss of control and

result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with X-mode, winter tires should

be used when driving on snow-

covered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having X-

mode does not guarantee that

the vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activating the X-mode should be

done when you encounter a very

slippery surface at low speed.

However, having X-mode is no

guarantee that full vehicle con-

trol will be maintained at all times

and under all conditions. When

activating X-mode, the speed of

the vehicle should be reduced

considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an ax le are removed from a

vehicle, ha ve the system in-

spected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the X-mode is operating

properly:

– Al l four wheel s should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all

four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

label attached to the vehicle’s

door pillar.

– Use only the special tempor-

ary spare tire to replace a flat

tire. With a normal temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness of

the X-mode is reduced and

this should be taken into ac-

count when driving the vehi-

cle in such a condition.

. If the hill descent control function

has operated continuously for a

long time, the temperature of the

brake disc may increase and the

hill descent control function may

be temporarily disabled. In this

case, the hill descent control

indicator will disappear. When

the hill descent control indicator

disappears, the hill descent con-

trol function is disabled.

X-mode is the integrated control system of

the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, etc. for driving with bad

road conditions. Using X-mode, you can

drive more comfortably even in slippery

road conditions including uphill and down-

hill.

X-mode has the following functions.

7-38

. Hill descent control function:

Using the hill descent control function, you

can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed

driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is

likely to increase, the brake control system

will be activated to adjust the vehicle

speed.

. Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hi ll-climbing

ability and driving ability as well as

enabling smooth application of torque for

easier control of the steering wheel.

& To activate/deactivate the X-

mode

X-mode switch

X-mode indicator

To activate:

Press the X-mode switch. While the X-

mode is activated, the X-mode indicator

appears.

To deactivate:

Press the X-mode switch again. The X-

mode indicator will disappear when the X-

mode is deactivated.

NOTE

. Even if you try to activate the X-

mode by pressing the X-mode switch

when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20

km/h) or more, the X-mode will not be

activated. At this time, a buzzer will

sound twice.

. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph

(40 km/h) or more while the X-mode is

activated, a buzzer will sound once and

the X-mode will be deactivated.

. While the engine is running, if either

of the following conditions is met, the

X-mode will be dea ctiv ated. In thi s

case, it is not possible to activate the

X-mode.

– The CHECK ENGIN E warning

light/malfunction indicator light illu-

minates.

– The AT OIL TEMP warning light

flashes.

– The ABS warning light illumi-

nates.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light illuminates.

. If there is a possibility that the

engine could overheat because of a

temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it is not possible to activate

the X-mode. Even while the X-mode is

activated, the X-mode will be deacti-

vated when the engine coolant tem-

perature increases.

& Hill descent control function

The hill descent control function will be in

standby mode when the X-mode is acti-

vated and the vehicle speed is less than

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

Starting and operating/X–mode (Outback CVT models)

– CONTINUED –

7-39

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

The function will operate when the vehicle

speed is less than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less

than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is

depressed.

NOTE

. Even while the hill descent control

function is operating, you can vary the

vehicle speed by using the brake pedal

or accelerator pedal.

. During braking by the hill descent

control function, the hill descent con-

trol indicator will flash.

. The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradient of

the road.

. The hill descent control function

may be considered normal when the

following conditions occur.

– An operating sound is heard

briefly from the engine compart-

ment while the hill descent control

function is operating.

– The sensation of depressing the

brake pedal is different, (harder

than usual etc.) when the brake

pedal is depressed during hill des-

cent control function operation.

! Hill descent control indicator

This indicator appears w hile the hill

descent control function is in the standby

mode. It flashes whi le the function is

operating. It wil l disappe ar when the

function is in the disabled mode. When

this function is changed from operational

to non-operational, it will disappear when

the vehicle speed re aches more than

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out cause d by running over a

sharp object).

7-40

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the C OLD tire pressure

shown on the vehicle placard

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures in-

crease accordingly. Be sure to

let the tires cool thoroughly be-

fore adjusting their pressures to

the standard values shown on

the tire placard. Refer to “Tires

and wheels” F11-24. The tire

pressure monitoring system

does not function when the ve-

hicle is stationary. After adjusting

the tire pressures, increase the

vehicle speed to at least 20 mph

(32 km /h) to start the TPMS

rechecking of the tire inflation

pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning lig ht sho uld

turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the TPMS is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitt er when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off. Do not inject any tire

liquid or aerosol tire sealant into

the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors. If the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for ap-

proximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system in-

spected.

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

– CONTINUED –

7-41

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts under the driver’s seat. This

may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the tire pressure monitor-

ing system will not function prop-

erly.

FCC ID: CWTWD1U848

NOTE

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Parking your vehicle

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

. Do not park t he vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If

engine exhaust gas enters the

passenger compartment, occu-

pants in the vehicle could die

from carbon monoxide (CO) con-

tained in the exhaust gas.

& Electronic parking brake

1) Parking brake switch

2) Indicator light

3) Release the electronic parking brake

4) Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

. Before exiting the vehicle, make

sure that you turn off the engine.

Otherwise, the p arking brake

may be released and an accident

may occur.

. If the brake system warning light

flashes, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunc-

tioning. Immediately stop your

vehicle in a safe location, use

tire stops under the tires to

7-42

prevent the vehicle from moving

and contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

. If the electronic parking brake is

operated when the brake is over-

heated or the vehicle is on a

steep slope, the brake system

warning light may flash. In this

case, the vehicle may start to

move and i t may lead to an

accident. Always use the tire

stops.

CAUTION

. When the electronic parking

brake system has a malfunction

and the parking brake cannot be

applied, contact your SUBARU

dealer immediately for an inspec-

tion. If you have to park your

vehicle in such conditions, per-

form the following procedure.

– Stop your vehicle in a flat

location.

– Shift the shift lever in the “1”

or reverse position (MT mod-

els).

– Shift the select lever in the “P”

position (CVT models). When

the select lever cannot be

shifted into the “P” position,

you must release shift lock.

Refer to “Shift lock function”

F7-27.

– Use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from

moving.

. Never drive while the parking

brake is applied because this will

cause unnecessary wear on the

brake linings. Before starting to

drive, always make sure that the

parking brake has been released

and the brake system warning

light has turned off.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

parking brake. You can apply/release the

parking brake by operating the parking

brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and

pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake

switch firmly while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

When the parking brake is applied while

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the brake system warning light and the

indicator light on the parking brake switch

illuminate. Refer to “Brake system warning

light” F3-19.

NOTE

. If the parking br ake swi tch i s

pressed with the ignition switch in the

“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the

parking brake is not released.

. If the parking br ake swi tch i s

pressed without depressing the brake

pedal (all models) and/or clutch pedal

(MT models), the parking brake is not

released.

. The electronic parking brake system

uses motors to appl y the parking

brake. Therefore, operating sounds

from the motors will be heard when

applying or releasing the parking

brake. Make sure that the motor

sounds are heard when applying or

releasing the parking brake.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction or the elec-

tronic parking brake operation is pro-

hibited temporarily, if the parking brake

switch is operated, a chirp sound is

heard and the brake system warning

light flashes.

. When you cannot release the park-

ing brake due to, for example, a system

malfunction, contact your SUBARU

dealer and have your SUBARU dealer

release the parking brake.

. If the operation of the electronic

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

7-43

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

parking brake switch is stopped mid-

way or performed extremely slowly, the

system may detect an error and flash

the brake system warning light. How-

ever, this does not indicate a malfunc-

tion if the warning light turns off after

operating the switch.

. When the electronic parking brake

has not been used for a long period of

time, the electronic parking brake may

operate automatically after the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position. This occurs due to checking

the proper operation of the electronic

parking brake and does not indicate a

malfunction.

. If the electronic parking brake

switch is malfunctioning and the elec-

tronic parking brake cannot be re-

leased, refer to the instructions de-

scribed in “Automatic release function

by accelerator pedal” F7-44.

After activating the EPB, you may hear

a short sound several minutes after the

indicator lamp illuminates as the sys-

tem confirms proper engagement. This

sound is different from the apply and

release sound.

This can occur:

– If the brakes are extremely hot.

– If the car is parked on a steep

incline.

– If the electronic parking brake is

applied after the ignition switch is

turned OFF.

This is a normal operating sound under

any of these conditions.

! Automatic release function by ac-

celerator pedal

The electronic parking brake system has

an automatic release function. The park-

ing brake will be automatically released by

depressing the accelerator pedal. How-

ever, the automatic release function does

not operate under the following conditions.

. Any door (other than the trunk lid or

rear gate) is open.

. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

. The clutch pedal is released from the

fully depressed position to partially en-

gaged position (MT models).

If the parking brake i s auto matically

released, the brake system warning light

and the indicator light on the parking brake

switch turn off.

NOTE

Even if you have applied the parking

brake, the parking brake will be auto-

matically released when the accelera-

tor pedal is depressed.

! Hill Holder function

The electronic parking brake system has a

Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder

function is activated, the parking brake

will be automatically applied when stop-

ping on an uphill slope with the brake

pedal depressed. In this case, the brake

system warning light and the indicator light

on the parking brake switch illuminate.

NOTE

. The Hill Holder function may not

activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this

case, manually apply the electronic

parking brake.

. If you do not depress the brake

pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder func-

tion may not operate properly. How-

ever, this is not a malfunction. When

stopping on an uphill slope, depress

the brake pedal firmly and release it

after the brake system warning light

illuminates.

. Depending on the condition of the

road surface and braking force, the

brakes operate temporarily and feel

different than usual.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction while the Hill

Holder function is activated, a chirp

sound is heard, the Hill Holder indica-

tor light turns off and the brake system

warning light flashes.

7-44

. When the hill holder activates on a

slope, the electronic parking brake is

engaged. The electronic parking brake

will release when you accelerate from

the stop. If you manually release the

electronic parking brake while the hill

holder is acti vated, the hill holder

function is cancelled and will not re-

engage until the vehicle has moved

some distance. In that case, you will

need to manually engage the electronic

parking brake if needed.

! Hill Holder switch

WARNING

When stopping on an uphill slope

with the Hill Holder function acti-

vated, release the brake pedal after

the brake system warning light has

illuminated. Otherwise, the Hill

Holder function may not operate

properly and an accident may occur.

You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder

function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.

To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.

To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder

switch again.

Deactivate the Hill Holder function under

the following conditions.

. When towing a trailer

. When carrying a heavy load

. When you do not frequently use the

parking brake when stopping on an uphill

slope

NOTE

. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed

for mo re than 30 seconds, the Hill

Holder indicator light turns off, the

brake system warning light flashes

and the system ignores any further

pressing of the switch. To activate the

switch again, turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart

the engine.

. When the Hill Hol der function is

deactivated while the Hill Holder func-

tion has a malfunction, if you press the

Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.

! Hill Holder indicator light

When the Hill Holder function is activated,

the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.

Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light” F3-21.

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

7-45

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

! Emergency brake

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in

case of an emergency. If the emer-

gency brake is excessively used,

the brake parts will wear down

faster or the brake may not work

sufficiently due to brake overheat-

ing.

NOTE

. While using the emergency brake,

the brake system warning light and the

indicator light on the parking brake

switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.

. While using the emergency brake, a

sound may be heard from the engine

compartment. This is the operating

sound of the brake that is activated by

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,

and does not indicate a malfunction.

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you

can stop the vehicle by pulling the parking

brake switch continuously.

While applying the emergency brake, the

brake system warning light and the in-

dicator light on the parking brake switch

illuminate and a chirp sounds.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

CAUTION

If the brake system warning light

flashes, the electronic parking brake

system may be malfunctioning. Im-

mediately stop your vehicle in the

nearest safe location and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

parking brake system, the brake system

warning light flashes. Refer to “Electronic

parking brake system warning” F3-20.

& Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

. Apply the parking brake.

. For MT models, place the shift lever in

the “1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse)

for a downgrade.

. For CVT models, place the select lever

in the “P” (Park) position.

Never rely on the transmission alone to

hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel as described here. When

the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front

wheels should be turned away from the

curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

7-46

should be turned into the curb.

Hill start assist system (MT

models)

WARNING

. The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver

to START the vehicle on an uphill

grade. To prevent accidents

when the vehicle is parked on a

slope, be sure to firmly set the

parking brake. When setting the

parking brake, make sure that the

vehicle remains stationary when

the clutch pedal and brake pedal

are released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the Hill start assist system is

operating. The Hill start assist

system will be deactivated, caus-

ing an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations

easier.

1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill

In both these cases, when the clutc h

pedal is depressed while the brake pedal

is also depressed, braking power is

maintained temporarily by the Hill start

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (MT models)

– CONTINUED –

7-47

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (MT models)

assist system when the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to

start the vehicle the same way as on a

level grade, just using the clutch and

accelerator pedal.

If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake pedal

is released, apply more braking power by

depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not

operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill

start assist system does not operate in the

following cases.

. when starting backward facing uphill

. when starting forward facing downhill

. while the parking brake is applied

. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “LOCK”/“OFF” position

. while the Hill Holder indicator light is

OFF

When using the Hill start assist system, a

braking effect may be felt even after the

brake pedal has been released. However,

this braking effect should disappear once

the clutch pedal is released.

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the

vehicle begins to move forward after

being reversed.

& To activate/deactivate the Hill

start assist system

When activating/deactivation the Hill

Holder function, the Hill start assist system

will also be activated/deactivated. For

details about activating/deactivating the

Hill Holder function, refer to “Hill Holder

switch” F7-45.

7-48

Cruise control

NOTE

For models with EyeSight syste m:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 25

mph (40 km/h) or more.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions.

These may cause loss of vehicle

control.

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on slippery or winding

roads

. driving in heavy traffic

. towing a trailer

NOTE

Make sure the cruise control system is

turned off when the cruise control is

not in use to avoid unintentionally

setting of the cruise control.

& To set cruise control

Cruise control main button

1. Press the cruise control main button.

Cruise control indicator

The cruise control indicator on the combi-

nation meter will appear.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the

“SET” side and release it. Then release

the accelerator pedal.

Starting and operating/Cruise control

– CONTINUED –

7-49

Starting and operating/Cruise control

Cruise control set indicator

1) When setti ng the displayed unit as

“MPH”.

2) When setti ng the displayed unit as

“km/h”.

At this time, the cruise control set indicator

appears in the combination meter. The set

speed will be shown on the combination

meter. You can change the displayed unit

by operating the multi information display.

For details, refer to “Units” F3-40.

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise

control activated. Simply depress t he

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the vehicle will return to and

maintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

The cruise control can be temporarily

canceled in the following ways.

. Press the “CANCEL” button.

. Press the X-mode switch to activate

the X-mode (models with X-mode).

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).

WARNING

For CVT models, do not place the

select lever in the “N” position while

driving. If the select lever is shifted

into the “N” position, cruise control

can be canceled but the engine

brake will no longer work. This

could result in an accident.

The cruise control set indicator in the

combination meter disappears when the

cruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32

km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES” side to return to the

original cruising speed automatically.

The cruise control set indicator in the

combination meter will automatically ap-

pear at this time.

7-50

& To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

. Press the cruise control main button

again.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or

“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the

vehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by the “RES/

SET” switch)

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

When s etting the displayed unit as

“MPH”:

The set speed can be increased 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the

“RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side.

When s etting the displayed unit as

“km/h”:

The set speed can be increased 1 km/h

each time by pressing the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES” side.

! To increase the speed (by accel-

erator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to

accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.

2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the

“SET” side once. Now the desired speed

is set and the vehicle will keep running at

that speed without depressing the accel-

erator pedal.

! To decrease the speed (by the

“RES/SET” switch)

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

When setting the displayed u nit as

“MPH”:

The set speed can be decreased 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the

“RES/SET” switch to the “SET” side.

Starting and operating/Cruise control

– CONTINUED –

7-51

Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

When setting the displayed unit as

“km/h”:

The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h

each time by pressing the “ RES/SET”

switch to the “SET” side.

! To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the

desired spee d, press the “RE S/SET”

switch to the “SET” side once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without de-

pressing the accelerator pedal.

& Cruise control indicator

Refer to “Cruise control indicator” F3-29.

& Cruise control set indicator

Refer to “Cruise control set indicator ” F3-

29.

Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-

tion (SRVD) (if equipped)

The Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection

(SRVD) consists of rear radar with Blind

Spot Detection, Lane Change Assist, and

Rear Cross Traffic Alert.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

changing lanes or reversing the

vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver by monitoring the rear and

side areas of the vehicle during a

lane change or reversing. However,

you cannot rely on this system

alone in assuring the safety during

a lane change or reversing. Over-

confidence in this system could

result in an accident and lead to

serious injury or death. Since the

system operation has various limita-

tions, the flashing or illumination of

the SRVD approach indicator light

may be delayed or it may not

operate at all even when a vehicle

is present in a neighboring lane or

approaching from either side.

7-52

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas

of the vehicle.

& System features

NOTE

The SRVD radar sensor has been

certified by the radio wave related laws

of the U.S. and Canada. When driving

in other countries, certification of the

country where the vehicle is driven

must be obtained. For certification in

the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-

tion for the Subaru Rear Vehicle Detec-

tion (SRVD)” F7-59.

The system uses radar sensors for the

following features.

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

existing in the blind area. If the system

detects a vehicle existing in the blind area,

it warns the driver of dangers by illuminat-

ing the SRVD approach indicator light(s)

on the outside mirror(s). If the driver

operates the turn signal l ever in the

direction where the SRVD approach in-

dicator light is illuminating, the system

warns the driver of dangers by flashing the

SRVD approach indicator light.

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

approaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes. If the system detects

a vehicle approaching at a high speed in

the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver

of dangers by illuminating the SRVD

approach indicator light(s) on the outside

mirror(s). If the driver operates the turn

signal lever in the direction where the

SRVD approach indicator light is illuminat-

ing, the system warns the driver of

dangers by flashing the SRVD approach

indicator light.

Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

– CONTINUED –

7-53

Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-

ing from either side while moving back-

ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the

following way.

. The SRVD approach indicator light(s)

on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

. A warning buzzer sounds.

. An icon appears on the rear view

camera screen (if equipped)

& System operation

! Operating conditions

The SRVD will operate when all of the

following conditions are met.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The SRVD warning indicator and

SRVD OFF indicator are turned off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above

8 mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).

. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”

position (when reversing).

The SRVD will not operate in the following

situations.

. The SRVD OFF indicator appears.

. The vehicle speed is below 8 mph (12

km/h) even when the SRVD OFF indicator

does not appear (except when reversing).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the SRVD will

stop operating and the SRVD warning

indicator will appe ar. If the SRVD

warning indicator appears, have your

vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

– When a malfunction occurs in the

system, including the SRVD ap-

proach indicator light

– When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the or-

ientation of the radar sensor is

shi fted for any reason, readjust -

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

. In the following cases, the SRVD will

temporarily stop operating (or may

stop operating) and the SRVD warning

indicator will appear. The SRVD will

resume operation once these condi-

tions are corrected, and the SRVD

warning indicator will disappear. How-

ever, if the SRVD warning indicator has

appeared for a prolonged time, have

the system inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

– When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-

face around the radar sensors

– When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an envir-

onment in whic h the re are no

objects around (such as desert) for

a long time

– When the temperature around

the radar sensors increased exces-

sively due to long driving on uphill

grades in summer, etc.

– When the temperature around

the radar sensors becomes extre-

mely low

– When the vehicle battery voltage

7-54

lowers

– When the vehicle battery be-

comes overvoltage

. The detectability of the radar sen-

sors is restricted. The SRVD detection

may be impaired and the system may

not operate properly under the follow-

ing conditions.

– When the rear bumper around

the radar sensors is distorted

– When ice, snow or mud adheres

to the rear bumper surface around

the radar sensors

– When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper

– During adverse weather condi-

tions such as rain, snow or fog

– When driving on wet roads such

as snow-covered roads and pud-

dles

. The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the fol-

lowing vehicles and objects.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

destrians and stationary objects on

the road or road side

– Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehicles

with lower body height such as a

trailer with no cargo and sp orts

cars)

– Vehicles that are not approach-

ing your vehicle even though they

are in the detection area (either on a

neighboring lane to the rear or

beside your vehicle when rever-

sing) (The system determines the

presence of approaching vehicles

based on data detected by the radar

sensors.)

– Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

– Vehicles driving in parallel at

almo st the same speed as your

vehicle for a prolonged time

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed that you are

trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehicles

driving in a lane next to the neighbor-

ing lane.

& SRVD approach indicator

light/warning buzzer

When the SRVD is active, the SRVD

approach indicator light and warning

buzzer will operate to alert the driver to

the presence of the following vehicles.

. Vehicles in the neighboring lanes

. Vehicles approaching from the left or

right rear side when reversing

! SRVD approach indicator light

SRVD approach indicator light

It is mounted in each side of the outside

mirrors and will illuminate when a vehicle

approaching from behind is detected. If a

light illuminates and the turn signal lever is

operated toward the side in which this light

turned on, the indicator light flashes to

warn the driver of dangers. When rever-

sing the vehicle, the indicator light flashes

when the system detects a vehicle ap-

proaching from either side.

Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

– CONTINUED –

7-55

Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

! SRVD approach indicator light

dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the SRVD approach indica-

tor light will be reduced.

NOTE

. When affected by direct sunlight,

you may have difficulty recogn izing

the SRVD approach indicator light.

. When affected by the headlight

beams from the vehicles behind, you

may have difficulty recognizing the

SRVD approach indicator light.

! SRVD approach warning buzzer

(only when reversing)

A warning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the SRVD approach indicator

light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the multi

information display. For details, refer to

“SRVD (Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection)”

F3-41.

! Safety tips regarding the SRVD

approach indicator light/warning

buzzer

. In the following cases, operation of the

SRVD approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings.

– Whenavehiclemovestothe

neighboring lane from a lane next to

the neighboring lane

– When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and downhill

grades

– When going beyond a pass

– When both your vehi cle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring lane

are driving on the far side of each lane.

– When several narrowly-spaced ve-

hicles are approaching in a row

– In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersection)

– When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neighbor-

ing lane

– Immediately after the SRVD is

activated by pressing the SRVD OFF

switch

– Immediately after the shift lever/

select lever is shifted to the “R”

position

– When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the trunk or cargo area

. Dur ing reversi ng, opera tion o f the

SRVD approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings

under the following conditions.

– When backing out of an angled

parking space

– When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

– When reversing on sloped roads

– When reversing at a high speed

. The SRVD appr oach indicator li ght

may illuminate when driving close to solid

objects on the road or road side (such as

guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).

. When turning at an intersection in

urban areas, the SRVD approach indica-

tor light may flash.

. If a building or a wall exists in the

reversing direction, the SRVD approach

indicator light may flash and the warning

buzzer may sound.

. In the following cases, the system may

7-56

detect a vehicle driving two lanes away

from your vehicle.

– When your vehicle drives on the

near side of its lane from the corre-

sponding vehicle

– When the vehicle driving two lanes

away drives on the near side of its lane

from your vehicle

& SRVD warning indicator

! System temporary stop indicator

System temporary stop indicator

This indicator appears when the system is

used at extremely high or low tempera-

tures or when abnormal voltage exists.

Once these conditions are corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop conditi on and the i ndicator wil l

disappear. If the indicator remains dis-

played for a prolonged time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System temporary stop indicator

due to reduced radar sensitivity

System temporary stop indicator due to

reduced radar sensitivity

This indicator appears when the detect-

ability of the radar sensors is reduced.

Once the condition is corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop conditio n and the ind icator wi ll

disappear. If the indicator remains dis-

played for a prolonged time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

– CONTINUED –

7-57

Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

! System malfunction indicator

System malfunction indicator

1) At first, this message will appear

2) Then this message will appear

This indicator appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

& SRVD OFF switch

SRVD OFF switch

SRVD OFF indicator

If the SRVD OFF switch is pressed, the

SRVD OFF indicator appears on the multi

information display of the combination

meter, and the SRVD is deactivated.

Press the switch again to activate the

SRVD. The SRVD OFF indicator disap-

pears.

NOTE

. In the following cases, press the

SRVD OFF switch to deactivate the

system. The system may not operate

properly due to blocked radar waves.

– When towing a trailer

– When a bicycle carrier or other

item is fitted to the rear of the

vehicle

– When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

– When ru nning the engine and

making t he whe els rota te wh ile

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known

status of the system is maintained. For

example, if the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

SRVD deactivated, the SRVD remains

deactivated the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

. If the vehicle battery is disconnected

due to situations such as battery

terminal or fuse replacement, after the

battery is reconnected, the SRVD will

be activated.

7-58

& Certification for the Subaru

Rear Vehicle Detection

(SRVD)

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: OAYSRR2A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

Canada 310

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard

(s). Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

& Handling of radar sensors

Radar sensors (Legacy)

Radar sensors (Outback)

The radar sensors, one on each side of

the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

To ensure correct operation of the SRVD,

observe the following precautions.

. Always keep the bumper surface near

the radar sensors clean.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the bumper surface near the radar

sensors.

. Do not modify the bumper near the

radar sensors.

. Do not paint the bumper near the radar

sensors.

. Do not expose the bumper near the

rad ar sensors to strong impacts. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

malfunction may occur, including the

inability to detect vehicles entering the

detection areas. If any strong shock is

applied to the bumper, be sure to contact

your SUBARU dealer for inspection.

. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area

around the rad ar sensors r equires

repair, paintwork or replacement, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-

tance.

Starting and operating/Subaru Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)

7-59

————————————————————————————————————————

New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 mile s (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2

Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3

Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4

Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5

Off road driving ................................................... 8-6

Legacy................................................................ 8-6

Outback .............................................................. 8-6

Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8

Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8

Driving on snowy and icy roads ......................... 8-10

Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-11

Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11

Tire chains......................................................... 8-11

Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-12

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12

Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-14

Roof rails with integrated crossbars

(Outback) ........................................................ 8-14

Trailer hitch (Outb ack — if equipped) .............. 8-18

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-19

If not towing a trailer.......................................... 8-20

Trailer towing (Legacy)...................................... 8-21

Trailer towing (Outback).................................... 8-21

Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-21

Maximum load limits.......................................... 8-21

Trailer Hitches ................................................... 8-25

Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-25

Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-26

Driving tips

Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

New vehicle break-in driving

– the first 1,000 miles (1,600

km)

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm

except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

. Avoi d star ting suddenly and rapid

acceleration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, exce pt in an

emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to a newly installed or overhauled

engine or when brake pads or brake

linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save

your fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the

driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the f ront and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

. The indication of the ECO ga uge

shows a reference for saving fuel. For

details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-11.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxi de, a c olorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from enter-

ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked

vehicle for a long time while the

engine is running. If that is

unavoidable, then use the venti-

lation fan to force fresh air into

the vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

8-2

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, d rive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or

rear gate (Outback) closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

2.5 L models

3.6 L models

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust

gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-

ter:

. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a

small amount of leaded gasoline will

damage the catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or in complete combustion), have

Driving tips/Catalytic converter

– CONTINUED –

8-3

Driving tips/Periodic inspections

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance B ooklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.

. Comply with all regulations and re-

quirements of each country.

8-4

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installing tire

(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specificati on that i s

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), it may lead to

serious mechanical damage to

the drive train of your car and

affect the following factors.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored

in the vehicle. Using other sizes may

result in severe mechanical damage

to the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.

By shifting power between the front and

rear whee ls, SUBARU AWD can also

provide added traction during accelera-

tion, and added engine braking force

during deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the

following tips in mind:

. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD vehicles

– CONTINUED –

8-5

Driving tips/Off road driving

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handlin g,

however, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an

ample distance from other vehicles.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on the

tire placard, which is located on the door

pillar on the driver’s side.

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detailed information, refer to “Towing”

F9-13.

Off road driving

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you ar e driv ing an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

& Legacy

Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven-

tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain

vehicle. It is a passenger car designed

primarily for on-road use. The AWD

feature gives it some limited off-road

capabilities in situations in which the

driving surface is relatively level, obstruc-

tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road

driving conditions. Operating it under other

than those conditions could subject the

vehicle to excessive stress which might

result in damage not eligible for repair

under war ranty. If you do take your

SUBARU off road, you should review the

common sense precautions in the next

section (applicable to the Outback) for

genera l guidance. But please keep in

mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabil-

ities are more limited than those of the

Outback.

Never attempt to drive through pools and

puddles, or roads flooded with water.

Water entering the engine air intake or

the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto

electrical parts may damage your vehicle

and may cause it to stall.

& Outback

CAUTION

Frequent driving of an AWD model

under hard-driving conditions such

as rough roads or off roads will

necessitate more frequent replace-

ment of the following items than that

specified in the maintenance sche-

dule described in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

. Engine oil

. Brake fluid

. Manual t ransmission oil (MT

models)

8-6

. Continuously variable transmis-

sion fluid (CVT models)

. Front differential gear oil (CVT

models)

Remember that damage done to

your SUBARU while operating i t

off-road and not using common

sense precautions such as those

listed above is not eligible for war-

ranty coverage.

Because of the AWD feature and higher

ground clearance, you can drive your

SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.

But please keep in mind that an AWD

SUBARU is a passenger car and is

neither a conventional off-road vehicle

nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take

your SUBARU off-road, certain common

sense precautions such as those in the

following list should be taken.

! Before driving

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not

piled higher than the seatbacks. During

sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo

could be thrown around in the vehicle and

cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on

the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity and make it more prone

to tip over.

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this manual.

! During driving

General precautions:

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much

more easily tip over sideways than it can

end over end. Avoid driving straight up or

down slopes that are too steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead,

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or

fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after the

engine stops. This could create a fire

hazard.

Precautions when driving under espe-

cially dangerous situations:

. If driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and completely through the stream. The

water should be shallow enough that it

does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-

riage. Water entering the engine air intake

or the exhaust pipe or water splashing

onto electrical parts may damage your

vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never

attempt to drive through rushing water;

regardless of its depth, it can wash away

the ground from under your tires, resulting

in possible loss of t raction and even

vehicle rollover.

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelerator

pedal slightly and move the shift lever/

select lever back and forth between “1”/

“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

Driving tips/Off road driving

– CONTINUED –

8-7

Driving tips/Winter driving

avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

. When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT). For

CVT models, refer to “Selection of manual

mode” F7-29.

! After driving

. Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat

that process several times to dry out the

brake discs and brake pads.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there

is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,

sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

need to be washed thoroughly.

Winter driving

& Operation during cold

weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand,

flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check th e battery and cables. Col d

temperatures r educe batte ry capaci ty.

The battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine

in very cold weather conditions. Use an

engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity

for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil

will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen,

use hot water to melt the ice, and after-

wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Washer Fluid Con-

centration

Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100%

−498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outsid e

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

8-8

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstru ct you r

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer f luids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection withou t damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and

driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away i ce an d sn ow t hat has

accumulated under the fenders to avoid

making steering difficult. During severe

winter driving, stop when and where it is

safe to do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake

when parking for long periods in

cold weather since it could freeze

in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in

snow or when it snows, raise the

wiper blades off the glass to

prevent damage to them.

. When the vehicle has been left

parked after use on roads heavily

covered with snow, or has been

left parked during a snowstorm,

icing may develop on the brake

system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow

or ice buildup on the suspension,

disc brakes and brake hoses

underneath the vehicle. If there

is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the

disc brakes and brake hoses and

ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold

weather, you should observe the following

tips.

1. For MT models, place the shift lever in

the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models,

place the select lever in the “P” position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed fo r this purpose. When an

antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used

for an extended period, it is best to have

the fuel tank filled to capacity.

Driving tips/Winter driving

– CONTINUED –

8-9

Driving tips/Winter driving

& Driving on snowy and icy

roads

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of

vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s i ntake s ystem and may

hinder the airflow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. For

information about braking on sli ppery

surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System)” F7-33 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control system” F7-35.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blades are not frozen to the

windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the

windshield or rear window, perform the

following procedure.

. To thaw the windshield wiper blades,

use the defroster with the airflow selection

in “

” and the temperature set for

maximum warmth until the wiper blades

are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate

control” F4-1.

. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog-

ger and deicer” F3-52.

. To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the

rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger

and deicer” F3-52.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow selection in “

” and the

temperature set for maximum warmth.

After the windshield gets warmed enough

to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away

using the windshield washer. Refer to

“Windshield washer” F3-51.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-7.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and freez-

ing temperatures. Blades of this type give

superior wiping performance in snowy

conditions. Be sure to use blades that

are suitable for your vehicle.

8-10

CAUTION

During high-speed d riving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protection

Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.

& Snow tires

WARNING

. When replacing or installing win-

ter tire(s), all four tires must be

the same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specificati on that i s

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), it may lead to

serious mechanical damage to

the drive train of your car and

affect the following factors.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” which are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving. In winter, it may be possible to

enhance performance through use of tires

designed specifically for winter driving

conditions.

If you choose to install winter tires on your

vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size

and type. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, construction,

brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

& Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of

clearance between the tires and

vehicle body.

Driving tips/Winter driving

– CONTINUED –

8-11

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use

of another type of traction device (such

as spring chains) may be acceptable if

use on your vehicle is recommended

by the device manufacturer, taking into

account tire size and road conditions.

Follow the device manufacturer’s in-

structions, especially regarding max-

imum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle,

and do not spin your wheels. Damage

caused to your vehicle by use of a

traction device is not covered under

warranty.

Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and

use it on the front wheels only. Always

use the utmost care when driving with

a traction device. Overconfidence be-

cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the shift

lever/select lever back and forth between

“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

When th e road surfac e is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (for MT and CVT).

For information on holding the transmis-

sion in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of

manual mode” F7-29.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

Never allow passengers to ride on a

folded rear seatback, in the trunk or

in the cargo area. Doing so may

result in serious injury.

WARNING

. Never s tack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

8-12

possible.

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure long items proper ly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the rear

shelf behind the rear seatback

(Legacy) or the extended cargo

area cover (Outback – if

equipped). Such items could

tumble forward in the event of a

sudden stop or a collision. This

could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

The load capacity of your vehicl e is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

8-13

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross

Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a

vehicle scale, found at a commercial

weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof rails with integrated

crossbars (Outback)

1) Integrated crossbars

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

bars must be used as crossbars

and be used together with the

genuine SUB ARU carryi ng at-

tachment. The bars must never

be used alone to carry cargo.

Otherwise, damage to the roof or

paint or a dangerous road hazard

due to loss of cargo could result.

. When using the bars as cross-

bars, make sure that the total

weight of the carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

8-14

the maximum load limit. Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

The bars can be used as crossbars.

Cargo can be carried after setting the

bars as crossbars and installing the

genuine SUBARU carrying attachment.

When you carry cargo on the roof using

the crossbars and a carrying attachment,

never exceed the maximum load limit

explained in the following. You should

also be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). For information

on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,

refer to “Loading your vehicle” F8-12. The

maximum load limit of the cargo and

carrying attachment must not exceed the

allowable load limit described in the Own-

er’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carry-

ing attachment. Place the heaviest load at

the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly

distribute the cargo. Alw ays properly

secure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments on

the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment

such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak

carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-

bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment is

securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only

attachments designed specifically for the

crossbars. A set of the crossbars is

designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-

ment) of not more than the allowable load

limit described in the Owner’s Manual of a

genuine SUBARU carrying attachment.

Before operating the vehicle, make sure

that the cargo is properly secured on the

attachment.

NOTE

. Remember that the vehicle’s center

of gravity is altered with the weight of

the load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics. Drive carefully,

avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and

abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be

increased.

. Restore t he bars to the original

position when the bars are not used

as crossbars.

! How to use as crossbars

CAUTION

. Do not raise the bar higher than

necessary. The base of the bar

may be damaged.

. Be careful not to contact the bars

while sliding them. Otherwise,

the bars may be scratched or

the latch portions may be da-

maged.

. Do not slide the bar more than

necessary when sliding the bar.

The base of the bar may be

damaged.

. Do not allow the bar to fall on or

contact the roof panel or the

moonroof when sliding the bar.

Otherwise the roof panel may be

dented or the glass of the moon-

roof may be damaged.

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

8-15

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from

the roof rail holders by pulling up the

covers.

2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in

the illustration.

3. Install the bars into the holders.

4. Make sure that the latches are fitted

securely.

! How to change the position of the

crossbar

WARNING

Carefully read the warning l abel

attached to the roof rail.

You can change the position of the rear

crossbar. To change the position, perform

the following procedure.

1. Take out the torque wrench from the

under-floor storage compartment.

2. Undo the cap of the roof rail holder by

using the torque wrench.

3. Undo the bolt of the crossbar by using

the torque wrench.

8-16

4. Pull out the crossbar from the roof rail

holder by pulling up the cover.

5. Install the crossbar into the other

holder.

6. Tighten the bolt of the crossbar by

using the torque wrench. The tightening

torque is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12

+ 3.0 N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).

7. Tighten the cap of the holder by using

the torque wrench. The tightening torque

is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12 + 3.0

N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).

! How to re-stow bars

CAUTION

Do not use the bars as roof rails

when the bars are stowed.

1. Check that the rear crossbar is stowed

in the front side holder.

2. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail

holders by pulling up the covers.

3. Slide the bars in the direction shown in

the illustration.

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

– CONTINUED –

8-17

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped)

4. Install the bars into the holders.

5. Make sure that the latches are fitted

securely.

! Rope hook (attached to the roof rail)

Rope hook

CAUTION

. When you use the rope hooks,

always secure the rope at all four

hook points.

. Do not tighten the rope exces-

sively. Otherwise, it may lead to

damage to the vehicle body or

cargo.

. Check that the rope is not loose

before driving the vehicle.

. When you use the rope hooks,

never exceed the maximum load

limit.

Load limit:

Observe the load limit that is indicated on

the rope hook.

Trailer hitch (Outback — if

equipped)

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. For possible recommenda-

tions and limitations, refer to

“Trailer towing (Outback)” F8-

21.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000

lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer

has safety chains and that each

chain will hold the trailer’s max-

imum gross weight. Towing trai-

lers without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if

the trailer separates from the

hitch due to coupling damage or

hitch ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin

and safety pin for positive lock-

ing placement before towing a

trailer. If the ball mount comes off

8-18

the hitch receiver, the trailer

could get loose and create a

traffic safety hazard.

. Use only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight

distributing hitch.

The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-

cated in the following table.

Maximum

gross trailer

weight

Maximum

gross tongue

weight

3.6 L models

3,000 lbs

(1,360 kg)

200 lbs

(90 kg)

2.5 L models

2,700 lbs

(1,224 kg)

When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

towing (Outback)” F8-21.

& Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the

hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball

mount into the hitch receiver tube.

2. Insert the hi tch pin into the hole

located on the hitch receiver tube so that

the pin passes through the ball mount.

3. Insert the s afety pin through the

provided hole on the hitch pin securely.

4. Check the ball mount assembly by

pulling on it to make sure it does not come

off the hitch receiver.

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped)

– CONTINUED –

8-19

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped)

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The

hitch ball must be securely installed on the

ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight. The chains

should cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping onto the

ground in case it should disconnect from

the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight turn situations into

account; however, be careful not to let

them drag on the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any

part of the vehicle other than the

safety chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing

trailer’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating the

brake, stop and turn signal lights on the

trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

& If not towing a trailer

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver cover

onto the hitch receiver tube.

. Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch wire harness to

protect against possible damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using terminal grease.

8-20

Trailer towing (Legacy)

Your vehicle is neither designed nor

intended to be used for trailer towing.

Therefore, never tow a trailer with your

vehicle.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that may result

from trailer towing, from any trailer towing

equipment or from any errors or omissions

in the instructions accompanying such

equipment. SUBARU warranties do not

apply to vehicle damage or malfunction

caused by trailer towing.

Trailer towing (Outback)

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in

purchasing a hitch and other necessary

towing equipment appropriate for your

vehicle. Do not use towing equipment

other than genuine SUBARU towing

equipment. In addition, be sure to follow

the instructions on correct installation and

use provided by SUBARU.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, o r from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

Regularly check that the hitch mounting

bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

& Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused

by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to

tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance

will be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer

be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle

with any new powertrain component (en-

gine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving.

& Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

Driving tips/Trailer towing (Legacy)

– CONTINUED –

8-21

Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are accepta-

ble.

! Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum total trailer weight. The max-

imum total trailer weight is indicated in the

following tables.

3.6 L models

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an

outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

1,500 lbs (680 kg)

2.5 L models

Model Conditions

Maximum total trailer

weight

MT models

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)

CVT models

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill

grade continuously for over 5 miles (8

km) with an outside temperature of

1048F (408C) or above.

1,350 lbs (612 kg)

8-22

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the

combined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment install ed o n your vehicle .

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

The GVWR of your vehicle that is set by

SUBARU is shown on the certification

label located on the driver’s door of your

vehicle.

Certification label

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWs can be adjusted by r elocati ng

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR of your

vehicle that are set by SUBARU are also

shown on the certification label.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)

– CONTINUED –

8-23

Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)

! Tongue load

Tongue load

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight

and does not exceed the maximum value

of 200 lbs (90 kg).

NOTE

For vehicles with trailer brakes, the

trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90

kg) when calculated at 8% of the

maximum total trailer weight.

Even in this case, the maximum value

is 200 lbs (90 kg).

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the following

illustration. When weighing the tongue

load, be sure to position the towing

coupler at the height at which it would be

during actual towing, using a jack as

shown.

F: Front

The tongue l oad can be adjusted by

proper distribution of the load in the trailer.

Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front; approximately

60 percent of the trailer load should be in

the front and approximately 40 percent in

the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly

as possible on both the left and right

sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

8-24

& Trailer Hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing

equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Do not use a tra iler hitch other than

genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

& Connecting a trailer

! Trailer brakes

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are

recommended, and must be install ed

properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

! Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Two chains should be used in

total, one to the right side and the other to

the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains

crossing each other under the trail er

tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping

onto the ground in case the trailer tongue

shoul d disconnect from the hitch ball.

Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking

tight turn situations into account; however,

be careful not to let them drag on the

Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)

– CONTINUED –

8-25

Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)

ground.

! Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct spli cing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehi cle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system requires modifica-

tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to

increase its capacity and accommodate

wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights

are connected properly, please consult

your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper

operation of the turn signals and the stop

lights each time you connect a trailer to

your vehicle.

! Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tem-

porary spare tire is used. The tem-

porary spare tire is not designed to

sustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towing

can result in failure of the spare tire

and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-

9 and in “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at

the end of this manual.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service representive or professional

to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare

tire is firmly secured.

& Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

. When towing a trailer, press the

SRVD (Subaru Rear Vehicle De-

tection) OFF switch to deactivate

the system (if equipped). The

system may not operate properly

due to the blocked radar waves.

For details about the SRVD OFF

switch, refer to “ SRVD OFF

switch” F7-58.

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer i n hilly

country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent when compared to normal

operation. You should never

drive at excessive speeds but

always employ extr a cauti on

8-26

when towing a trailer. You should

also keep the following tips in

mind.

! Before starting out on a trip

. Check the towing regulations for trailer

or caravan vehicles that vary by state/

region. Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only compromise

your safety, but will also negate your

insurance coverage and/or may violate

the state road and traffic acts and regula-

tions.

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-

tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle

is tipped sharply up at the front and down

at the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution

are acceptable.

. Check that the tire pressures are

correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that

– the trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’s stop lights

illuminate when the vehicle’s brake

pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s

turn signal lights flash when the

vehicle’s turn signal lever is operated.

– the safety chains are connected

properly.

– all cargo in the trailer is secured

safely in position.

– the side mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a sig-

nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

. You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of

control.

. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-

erations. For MT models, always start out

in first gear and release the clutch pedal at

moderate engine revolution.

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

longer than normal turning radius because

the trailer wheels will be closer than the

vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In

a tight turn, the traile r could hit your

vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and promptly begin

decelerating your vehicle at a gradual

pace.

. When passing other vehicles, consid-

erable distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn

2) Right turn

. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and

Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)

– CONTINUED –

8-27

Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)

takes practice. When backing up with a

trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.

When turning back, grip the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand and turn it to

the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right

for a right turn.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed

immediately by your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

! Driving on grades

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather,

because the engine and transmission are

relatively prone to overheating, pay atten-

tion to the following items.

– Temperature gauge

– AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT

models)

. If any of the following conditions occur,

immediately turn off the air conditioner and

stop the vehicle in the nearest safe

location. Refer to “If you park your vehicle

in an emergency” F9-2 and “Engi ne

overheating” F9-13.

– Temperature gauge needle ap-

proaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer

to “Temperature gauge” F3-11.

– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-

nates (CVT models). Refer to “AT OIL

TEMP warning light (CVT models)”

F3-16.

. For CVT models, do not use the

accelerator pedal to stay stationary on

an uphill slope inste ad of using the

parking brake or foot brake. That may

cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

! Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake. You should not park on

a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope

cannot be avoided, you should take the

following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT

models) or “P” (CVT models) and shut

off the engine.

8-28

If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2

Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3

Legacy................................................................ 9-4

Outback .............................................................. 9-5

Flat tires............................................................... 9-5

Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-5

Storing a flat tire ................................................. 9-8

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if

equipped)......................................................... 9-10

Jump starting ..................................................... 9-11

How to jump start............................................... 9-11

Engine overheating ............................................ 9-13

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment.................................................... 9-13

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment.................................................... 9-13

Towing................................................................. 9-13

Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes............. 9-14

Using a flat-bed truck ......................................... 9-16

Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17

Electronic parking brake – if the electronic

parking brake cannot be released................. 9-17

Access key – if access key does not

operate properly ............................................. 9-18

Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-18

Switching power ................................................ 9-18

Starting engine .................................................. 9-19

Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot

be opened ....................................................... 9-19

Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate

cannot be opened........................................... 9-20

Power rear gate - if power rear gate does

not operate properly....................................... 9-21

When the power rear gate is deactivated ............ 9-21

When the rear gate cannot be opened ................ 9-22

When the rear gate cannot be closed ................. 9-22

If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-22

In case of emergency

In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in an emergency

If you park your vehicle in an

emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pressing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pressing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used.

The temporary spare tire is not

designed to sustain the towing

load. Use of the temporary spare

tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or

less stability of the vehicle and

may lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

9-2

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drive train of your

vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is stored under

the under-floor storage compartment.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. The correct pressure is

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following precautions.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,

a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools.

. Jack

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt) (Outback)

. Wheel nut wrench

. Torque wrench (Outback)

CAUTION

The torque wrench is designed to be

used only when changing the posi-

tion of the crossbar. Do not use the

torque wrench in other cases. Other-

wise, the torque wrench may be

deformed.

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

– CONTINUED –

9-3

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

NOTE

To use the jack handle, insert the jack

handle into the hole of the wheel nut

wrench.

& Legacy

1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer

to “Under-floor storage compartment”

F6-19.)

2) Wheel nut wrench

3) Screwdriver

4) Jack handle

5) Jack

The maintenance tools are stored in the

under-floor storage compartment.

For the method to use the jack, refer to

“Flat tires” F9-5.

9-4

& Outback

1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer

to “Under-floor storage compartment”

F6-19.)

2) Jack handle

3) Wheel nut wrench

4) Jack

5) Torque wrench

6) Towing hook (eye bolt)

7) Screwdriver

8) Tire fixing band

9) Tire bag

The maintenance tools are stored in the

under-floor storage compartment.

For the method to use the jack, refer to

“Flat tires” F9-5.

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in a

serious accident.

. Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get

under the vehicle while support-

ing the vehicle with this jack.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

– CONTINUED –

9-5

In case of emergency/Flat tires

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out

of the jacking point due to a jolt

and this can result in a serious

accident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Apply the parking brake and shift the

shift lever in reverse (MT models) or the

select lever in the “P” (Park) position (CVT

models).

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher

and have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

The tools and the spare tire are stored

under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the

cargo area (Outback). Refer to “Mainte-

nance tools” F 9-3.

NOTE

Make sure that the jack is well lubri-

cated before using it.

6. Take out the under-floor storage com-

partment and turn the attaching bolt

counterclockwise, then take the spare tire

out.

NOTE

Carefully read “Temporary spare tire”

F9-2 and strictly follow the instruc-

tions.

1) Notch

2) Valve hole

7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert

a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on

the opposite side of the valve hole and pry

the wheel cover to remove it.

9-6

8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

9. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

10. Insert the jack handle into the hole of

the wheel nut wrench.

11. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

12. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

13. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and hub

with a cloth.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

– CONTINUED –

9-7

In case of emergency/Flat tires

14. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts when the spare

tire is installed. This could cause the

nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

15. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

16. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in the

illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer

to “Tires” F12-9. Never use your foot on

the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension

on the wrench because you may exceed

the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.

17. Store the flat tire. For details, refer to

“Storing a flat tire” F9-8. Also store the

jack and jack handle in their storage

locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

& Storing a flat tire

! Storing in the spare tire compart-

ment (Legacy)

Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Put the spacer and tighten

the attaching bolt firmly.

9-8

! Storing with the tire bag (Outback)

1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, keep

the wheel cover removed.

2. Take out the tire bag and tire fixing

band from the under-floor storage com-

partment. For details, refer to “Outback”

F9-5.

1) Tire bag

3. Place the flat tire in the tire bag.

1) Rear seatback

2) Tire bag

4. Place the tire bag against the rear

seatback.

1) Convenient tie-down hook

2) Tire fixing band

3) Center of the wheels

5. Pass the tire fixing band through the

center of the wheels and the convenient

tie-down hooks.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

– CONTINUED –

9-9

In case of emergency/Flat tires

6. Fasten the tire fixing band to secure

the tire bag.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicat ed by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel

when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused running over

a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the vehicle placard

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the TPMS is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitt er when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the sys-

tem inspected.

9-10

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you,

thoroughly flush the exposed

area with water immediately. Get

medical help if the fluid has

entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around

a battery, always wear suitable

eye protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

. Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing ring s, watches and

ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

In case of emergency/Jump starting

– CONTINUED –

9-11

In case of emergency/Jump starting

A) Booster battery

B) Strut mounting nut

1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive

(+) terminal on the discharged battery.

2) Connect the other end of the jumper

cable to the positive (+) terminal of the

booster battery.

3) Connect one end of the other cable to the

negative (−) terminal of the booster

battery.

4) Connect the other end of the cable to the

strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

9-12

Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has fully cooled down.

When the engine is hot, the coolant

is under pressure. Removing the

cap while the engi ne is still hot

could release a spray of boiling hot

coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

If the engine overheats, pull off the road

safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment

NOTE

For details about how to check the

coolant level or how to add coolant,

refer to “Engine coolant” F11-14.

1. Ke ep the en gine running at id ling

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment. Refer to “Engine hood”

F11-7.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact your authorized

dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays in the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill the

radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

Towing

WARNING

Never tow AWD vehicles with the

front wheels raised off the ground

while the rear wheels are on the

ground, or with the rear wheels

raised off the ground while the front

wheels are on the ground. This will

cause the vehicle to spin away due

to the operation or deterioration of

the center differential.

If towing is necessary, SUBARU recom-

mends it be done by your SUBARU dealer

or a commercial towing service.

In case of emergency/Engine overheating

– CONTINUED –

9-13

In case of emergency/Towing

& Towing hooks and tie-down

hooks/holes

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle

from mud, sand or snow).

A towing hook is supplied with Outback

only. Legacy is not supplied with a towing

hook (it is available as an accessory). On

Legacy, the towing access cover is on the

rear bumper only.

SUBARU recommends towing be done

by your SUBARU dealer or a commer-

cial towing service.

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing

hooks and tie-down hooks/holes.

Never use suspension parts or

other parts of the body for towing

or tie-down purposes.

. Never use the tie-down hole clo-

sest to the muffler under the

vehicle for towing purposes.

. To prevent deformation to the

bumper and the towing hook, do

not apply excessive lateral load

to the towing hooks.

Front towing hook (Outback):

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,

wheel nut wrench and jack handle from

the under-floor storage compartment.

2. Pry off the towing access cover on the

front bumper using a screwdriver, and you

will find a threaded hole for attaching the

towing hook.

3. Screw t he towing hook i nto the

threaded hole until the threads can no

longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle and wheel nut

wrench.

9-14

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor

storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towi ng hook

except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

Rear towing hook (Outback):

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,

wheel nut wrench and jack handle from

the under-floor storage compartment.

2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a

threaded hole for attaching the towing

hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the

threaded hole until its thread can no

longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle and wheel nut

wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor

storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

Do not use the towing hook except

when towing your vehicle.

In case of emergency/Towing

– CONTINUED –

9-15

In case of emergency/Towing

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

Front Tie-down Hooks are for tying down

the vehicle. They are

not for towing.

Rear tie-down holes:

1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove

the plugs. After using the rear tie-down

holes, return the plugs to their original

places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip out

of the holes, possibly causing a

dangerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. For CVT models, shift the select lever

into the “P” position. For MT models, shift

9-16

the shift lever into the “1st” position.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and

care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

& Towing with all wheels on the

ground

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the vehicle is being towed be-

cause the steering wheel and the

direction of the wheels will be

locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the e ngine is not

running. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. For CVT models, the traveling

speed must be limited to less

than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the

traveling distance to less than 31

miles (50 km). For greater speeds

and distances, transport your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

2. The ignition switch should be in the

“ON” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

Electronic parking brake – if

the electronic parking brake

cannot be released

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have

your SUBARU dealer release the electro-

nic parking brake.

In case of emergency/Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released

9-17

In case of emergency/Access key – if access key does not operate properly

Access key – if access key

does not operate properly

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, m agnetic

sources and signal t ransmitters

away from the area betw een the

access key and the push-button

ignition switch. They may interfere

with the communication between

the access key and the push-button

ignition switch.

If the locking/unlocking procedures, power

switch procedures or engine start proce-

dures cannot be operated because of

strong radio signals in the surrounding

area or a low battery condition of the

access key, perform the following proce-

dure. When the battery of the access key

is discharged, replace it with a new one.

Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”

F11-49.

& Locking and unlocking

1) Release button

2) Mechanical key

While pressing the release button of the

access key, take out the mechanical key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

mechanical key in the procedure de-

scribed in “Locking and unlocking from

the outside” F2-6.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

attach the mechanical key back to the

access key.

& Switching power

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the select lever into the “P ”

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key with the buttons

facing you, and touch the push-button

ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key and the vehicle is completed,

a chime (ding) will sound. At the same

time, the status of the push-button ignition

switch changes to either of the following.

. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated:

“ACC”

. Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated, press

the push-button ignition switch with the

brake pedal released. The status of the

push-button ignition switch then changes

9-18

to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Starting engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key with the buttons

facing you, and touch the push-button

ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key and the vehicle is completed,

a chime (ding) will sound. At the same

time, the push-button ignition switch turns

to the “ACC” or “ON” position.

5. After the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while

depressing the brake pedal, press the

push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the

trunk lid cannot be opened

NOTE

If you open the trunk lid with a key

while the alarm system is armed, the

alarm system is triggered and the

vehicle’s horn sounds. In this case,

perform any of the following opera-

tions.

. Press any button on the remote

transmitter.

. Insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

For details about the alarm system,

refer to “Alarm system” F2-27.

The trunk lid can also be opened using the

key.

In case of emergency/Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be opened

– CONTINUED –

9-19

In case of emergency/Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be opened

To open the trunk lid, insert the key into

the key cylinder and turn it clockwise.

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The mechanical key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is

facing and insert it again.

Rear gate (Outback) – if the

rear gate cannot be opened

In the event that you cannot open the rear

gate by pressing the rear gate opener

button (all models) or using the power rear

gate (if equipped), you can open it from

inside the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim using

flat-head screwdriver.

2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel.

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate lock

release lever with your fingers be-

cause doing so may cause an injury.

Always use a flat-head screwdriver

or a similar tool.

Models without power rear gate

Models with power rear gate

3. Turn the lever to the right position

9-20

using a flat-head screwdriver or a similar

tool. Then the rear gate will open.

Power rear gate - if power

rear gate does not operate

properly

& When the power rear gate is

deactivated

NOTE

While the power rear gate is tempora-

rily deactivated, if it is struck by body

parts or objects and sustains a strong

impact, the temporary deactivation

may be canceled. The purpose of this

is to absorb the impact of the collision

and it is not a malfunction. In this case,

the rear gate will not open or close

automatically.

If the power rear gate senses a malfunc-

tion, an electronic chirp will sound and the

rear gate will stop opening or closing.

In order for the rear gate to open and close

automatically, carry out the following

operation. If the rear gate does not open

and close automatically after carrying out

this operation, we recommend that you

have the vehicle checked at a SUBARU

dealer.

! When the rear gate is closed

1. Press and hold the rear gate opener

button. If the rear gate does not open,

perform the procedure described in “Rear

gate (Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be

opened” F9-20.

2. Gently close the rear gate by hand

until it reaches the half-shut position.

3. Operate the power rear gate to confirm

it is recovered.

! When the rear gate is stuck at the

fully open position or does not fully

1. Gently close the rear gate by hand

until it reaches the half-shut position. If the

rear gate does not close, perform the

procedure described in “Rear gate

In case of emergency/Power rear gate – if power rear gate does not operate properly

– CONTINUED –

9-21

In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident

(Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be

opened” F9-20.

2. Operate the power rear gate to confirm

it is recovered.

& When the rear gate cannot be

opened

Perform the procedure described in “Rear

gate (Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be

opened” F9-20.

& When the rear gate cannot be

closed

CAUTION

. On areas which are not flat, such

as hills, do not conduct any of

the following actions. The rear

gate may close suddenly and hit

someone’s head, face or catch

fingers and body parts in it,

resulting in injury.

. Even while conducting the fol-

lowing actions on a flat surface,

be careful not to be injured by

getting caught in or hit by the

rear gate.

. After closing the rear gate by the

following methods, we recom-

mend that you have the vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer.

If the rear gate cannot be closed due to a

flat battery, etc., while the rear gate is

stopped midway, it can be closed by hand.

1. Gently close the rear gate by hand

until it reaches the half-shut position. If the

rear gate does not close, perform the

procedure described in “Rear g ate

(Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be

opened” F9-20.

2. Operate the power rear gate to confirm

it is recovered.

If your vehicle is involved in

an accident

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to i nspect the

ground under the vehicle before

restarting the engine. If you find that

fuel has leaked on the ground, do

not try to restart the engine. The fuel

system has been damaged and is in

need of repair. Immediately contact

the nearest automotive service facil-

ity. We recommend that you consult

your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. To minimize the risk of fire due to

fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an

airbag inflates upon collision, the system

stops supplying fuel to the engine.

Perform the following procedures to re-

start the engine after the system is

activated.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

or “ACC” position.

2. Restart the engine.

9-22

Models with “keyless acc ess w ith

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

2. Restart the engine.

In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident

9-23

————————————————————————————————————————

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2

Washing............................................................. 10-2

Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3

Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3

Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4

Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4

To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5

Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5

Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, switches, combination

meter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-6

Monitor (if equipped).......................................... 10-6

Appearance care

Appearance care/Exterior care

Exterior care

& Washing

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes,

drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and areas adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air in-

take, electrical parts or the power

steering fluid reservoir, it will

cause engine trouble or a mal-

function of the power steering.

. Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if

a detergent with organic solvents

is used to wash the cover sur-

face, completely rinse off the

detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-

maged.

. Outback: Since your vehicle is

equipped with a rear wiper, auto-

matic car-wash brushes could

become tangled around it, dama-

ging the wiper arm and other

components. Ask the automatic

car-wash operator not to let the

brushes touch the wiper arm or

to fix the wiper arm on the rear

window glass with adhesive tape

before operating the machine.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car wash is of

suitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree

sap, and bird droppings should be washed

off by using a light detergent, as required.

If you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth.

! Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake

cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-

pension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-

side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold

water at frequent intervals to reduce the

harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-r oad or on mu ddy or

sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off

the underbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to

mud and sand buildup. Do not use a

sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor harnesses, and

10-2

other parts when washing sus-

pension components.

. Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

cause damage of some electrical

parts.

! Using a warm water washer

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are

of the high temperature, high pressure

type, and they can damage or deform the

resin parts such as mouldings, or cause

water to leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the

surface with a fine-grained compound.

Never polish just the affected area, but

include the surrounding area as well.

Always polish in only one direction. A

No. 2000 grain compound is recom-

mended. Never use a coarse-grained

compound. Coarser grained compounds

have a smaller grain-size number and

could damage the paint. After polishing

with a compound, coat with wax to restore

the original luster. Frequent polishing with

acompoundoranincorrectpolishing

technique will result in removing the paint

layer and exposing the undercoat. When

in doubt, it is always best to contact your

SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-

list.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax with organic solvents is

applied to the cover surface, com-

pletely wipe off the polish or wax.

Otherwise, the cover surface may be

damaged.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

& Cleaning aluminum wheels

. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels

clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt

is left on too long, it may be difficult to

clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to

clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-

num whe els) with water as soon as

possible when it has been splashed with

sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or other

agents.

Appearance care/Exterior care

10-3

Appearance care/Corrosion protection

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most common causes of

corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas where

there is more salt in the air, or in areas

where there is considerable industrial

pollution.

. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

& To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of t he

following surfaces.

. roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. mud, sand, or gravel

. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion.

Occasionally check under the mats to

make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated

garage. In such a garage, corrosion can

be caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle

into the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

10-4

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

& Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface w ith a tightly

wrung cloth and dry the s eat fabric

thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe

using a solution of mild soap and luke-

warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially available fabric cleaner. Use

the cleaner on a hidden place and make

sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.

Use the cleaner according to its instruc-

tions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove

difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrinkles, which is characteristic of

genuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as

solvents, paint thinners, window

cleaner or gasoline must never be

used on leather or synthetic interior

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

– CONTINUED –

10-5

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel,

console panel, switches,

combination meter, and other

plastic surface

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or gasoline, or

strong cleaning agents that con-

tain those solvents. Doing so

could damage the surface and

cause the color to deteriorate.

. Do not use chemical solvents

that contain silicone on the vehi-

cle audio system, electrical com-

ponents of the air-conditioner or

any switches. If silicone adheres

to these p arts, it may cause

damage to electrical compo-

nents.

& Monitor (if equipped)

To clean the audio/navigation monitor,

wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft

cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,

clean it with a soft cloth moistened with

neutral detergent then carefully wipe off

any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the monitor. Doing

so could damage the monitor’s

components.

. Do not wipe the monitor with a

hard cloth. Doing so could

scratch the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, gasoline, or any

other volatile substance. Such

cleaning fluid could erase the

lettering on the switches at the

bottom of the monitor.

10-6

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment.................................................... 11-4

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment (2.5 L models) ............................. 11-5

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5

Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-5

Removing and reinstalling clips .......................... 11-5

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-7

Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-9

2.5 L models ...................................................... 11-9

3.6 L models .................................................... 11-10

Engine oil.......................................................... 11-11

Engine oil consumption.................................... 11-11

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-11

Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-13

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-13

Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-13

Cooling system ................................................ 11-14

Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-14

Engine coolant ................................................. 11-14

Air cleane r element .......................................... 11-15

Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-15

Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-18

Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-18

Drive belts ........................................................ 11-18

Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-18

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-18

Continuously variable transmission fluid ...... 11-19

Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and

rear differential gear oil................................ 11-19

Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-19

Brake fluid........................................................ 11-19

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-19

Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-20

Clutch fluid (MT models)................................. 11-20

Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-20

Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-21

Brake booster .................................................. 11-21

Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-22

Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-22

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-22

Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-22

Checking the clutch function............................ 11-22

Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-23

Replacement of brake pad .............................. 11-23

Breaking-in of new brake pads ......................... 11-23

Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-24

Types of tires................................................... 11-24

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if

equipped) ...................................................... 11-24

Tire inspection................................................. 11-26

Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-26

Wheel balance ................................................. 11-28

Wear indicators ............................................... 11-28

Tire rotation direction mark.............................. 11-28

Tire rotation..................................................... 11-29

Tire replacement.............................................. 11-29

Maintenance and service

Wheel replacement........................................... 11-30

Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-31

Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-31

Replacement of wiper blades.......................... 11-32

Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-33

Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-33

Rear window wiper blade assembly

(Outback) ....................................................... 11-34

Rear window wiper blade rubber (Outback) ....... 11-35

Battery. .............................................................. 11-36

Fuses ................................................................ 11-37

Installation of accessories............................... 11-39

Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-39

HID headlights (if equipped) ............................. 11-39

Halogen headlights .......................................... 11-39

Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-41

Front side marker light..................................... 11-41

Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-41

Rear combination lights ................................... 11-42

Backup light .................................................... 11-44

License plate light ........................................... 11-46

Dome light....................................................... 11-47

Map light ......................................................... 11-47

Door step light................................................. 11-47

Cargo area light (Outback) ............................... 11-48

Trunk light (Legacy) ......................................... 11-48

Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-48

Replacing battery............................................. 11-48

Replacing battery of access key....................... 11-49

Replacing battery of transmitter ....................... 11-50

Maintenance schedule

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

For details about your maintenance sche-

dule, read the separate “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and

service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle must NEVER be per-

formed on a single two-wheel

dynamometer or similar appara-

tus. Attempting to do so will

result in transmission damage

and in uncontrolled vehicle

movement and may cause an

accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or all ow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule

– CONTINUED –

11-3

Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes , thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. NEVER use a circuit

tester for these wiring. If your

SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-

sioner needs service, consult

your nearest SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a

SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-

proved flushing systems use chemi-

cals and/or solvents which have not

been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any

part of the vehicle which is damaged by

adding or applying chemicals and/or

solvents other than those approved or

recommended by SUBARU.

& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and apply

the parking brake to prevent the

vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after

the engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position, the cooling fan

may operate suddenly even

when the engine is stopped. If

your body or clothes come into

contact with a rotating fan, that

could result in serious injury. To

avoid risk of injury, perform the

following precautions.

– Models with push-button start

system:

Always turn the push-button

ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and confirm that the

operation indicator on the

switch is turned off. Then take

the access key out from the

vehicle.

– Models without push-button

start system:

Always remove the key from

the ignition switch.

. Before performing any servicing

on a vehicle equipped with a

remote engine start system tem-

porarily place that system in the

service mode to prevent it from

unexpectedly starting the engine.

11-4

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

(2.5 L models)

CAUTION

. Do not contact the belt cover

while checking the components

in the engine compartment.

Doing so may cause your hand

to slip off the belt cover and

result in an unexpected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until the

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a

burn or other injury. Note that the

oil filter becomes very hot when

the engine is running and re-

mains hot for some time after

the engine has stopped.

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

while the engine is running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, belts and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

Maintenance tips

Some clips and fender linings must be

removed before replacing the air cleaner

elements or specific bulbs.

& Removing and reinstalling

clips

! Removing clips

There are several types of clips used for

your vehicle.

! Type A and D clips

Type A clips

Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips

– CONTINUED –

11-5

Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips

Type D clips

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center

portion of the clip is raised.

2.Removetheclipswithaflat-head

screwdriver using leverage.

! Type B clips

1. Pull out the center portion of the clip

using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in

the illustration.

2. Pull the protruded center portion to

remove the entire body of the clip.

! Type C clips

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a

Phillips screwdriver until the center portion

of the clip is raised.

2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

11-6

! Reinstalling clips

Type A clips

Type B clips

Type C clips

Type D clips

Insert the clip without the center portion

first and then push the center portion of

the clip into the hole.

Engine hood

CAUTION

. When you open the engine hood,

do not stand the wiper blades up.

Furthermore, while the hood is

open, do not operate the wind-

shield wipers. Doing so could

result in damage to the engine

hood and wiper blades.

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to

close it. It could deform the

metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the

engine hood when the wind is

strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing

injuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories other

than genuine SUBARU parts to

the engine hood. If the engine

hood becomes too heavy, the

stay may not be able to support

holding it open.

Maintenance and service/Engine hood

– CONTINUED –

11-7

Maintenance and service/Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

positions.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front

grille and the hood toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-

mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed

position and then throw it down.

2. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always ch eck that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

11-8

Engine compartment overview

& 2.5 L models

1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

(MT) (page 11-19)

2) Fuse box (page 11-37)

3) Windshield washer tank (page 11-31)

4) Battery (page 11-36)

5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)

6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)

7) Radiator cap (page 11-14)

8) Engine oil filter (page 11-13)

9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)

10) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)

Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview

– CONTINUED –

11-9

Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview

& 3.6 L models

1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-19)

2) Fuse box (page 11-37)

3) Windshield washer tank (page 11-31)

4) Battery (page 11-36)

5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)

6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)

7) Radiator cap (page 11-14)

8) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)

9) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)

11-10

Engine oil

CAUTION

. If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then pull it out. Other-

wise, you may be injured acci-

dentally straining yourself.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

& Engine oil consumption

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and thus

require refilling between maintenance

intervals:

. When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

. When the engine oil is of lower quality

. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used

. When engine braking is employed

. When the engine is operated at high

engine speeds

. When the engine is operated under

heavy loads

. When towing a trailer

. When the engine idles for long periods

of time

. When the vehicle is operated in stop

and go and/or heavy traffic situations

. When the vehicle is used under severe

thermal conditions

. When the vehic le acc elerates and

decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil

more frequently. If your oil consumption

rate is greater than 1 quart every 1,200

miles or 1 liter every 2,000 kilometers,

contact your SUBARU dealer who may

perform a test under controlled conditions.

& Checking the oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine. If you check the oil level

just after stopping the engine, wait a few

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

pan before checking the level.

2.5 L models

1) Oil level gauge

2) Oil filler cap

3) Oil filter

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

– CONTINUED –

11-11

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

3.6 L models

1) Oil level gauge

2) Oil filler cap

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

2.5 L models

1) Full level

2) Low level

3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

3.6 L models

1) Full level

2) Low level

3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. 2.5 L models:

Check the oil levels on both sides of the

level gauge. The engine oil level must be

judged by the lowest of the two levels. If

the oil level is below the low level mark,

add oil so that the full level is reached.

3.6 L models:

Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil

level is below the low level mark, add oil

so that the full level is reached.

11-12

CAUTION

. For 2.5 L models, be careful not

to touch the engine oil filter when

removing the oil filler cap. Doing

so may resul t in a burn, a

pinched finger, or may cause

some other injury.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

. If the level gauge cannot be

pulled out easily, twist the level

gauge right and left, then gently

pull it out. Otherwise, you may be

injured by accidentally straining

yourself.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowl y pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm tha t the oil level is

correct.

NOTE

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do

not add any additional oil above the full

level when the engine is cold.

& Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE

. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-trained

expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for changing the engine oil and oil filter.

Fully trained mechanics are on standby

at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the

special tools, spare parts and recom-

mended oil for this work, and also,

used oils are properly disposed of.

. If performing oil replacement your-

self, observe the local regulations and

dispose of waste oil properly.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

provide better fuel economy. However,

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the en-

gine.

& Synthetic oil

You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When usi ng

synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine

oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil

and filter changing intervals shown in the

Warranty and Maintenance booklet.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine

performance. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

11-13

Maintenance and service/Cooling system

Cooling system

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled do wn

completely. Since the coolant is

under pressure, you may suffer

serious burns from a spray of boil-

ing hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU Super Coolant that

does not require the first change

for 11 years/137,500 miles (11

years/220,000 km). This coolant

should not be mixed with any

other brand or type of coolant

during this period. Mixing with a

different coolant will reduce the

life of the coolant. Should it be

necessary to top off the coolant

for any reason, use only

SUBARU Super Coolant.

If the SUBARU Super Coolant is

diluted with another brand or

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Cooling fan, hose and con-

nections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Refer to “Temperature gauge”

F3-11.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

Refer to “Fuses” F11-37 and “Fuses and

circuits” F12-10. If the fuse is not blown,

have the cooling system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-

sary, there may be a leak in the engine

cooling system. It is recommended that

the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

as required.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the caps and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

11-14

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner el ement not only filters

intake air but also stops flames if

the engine backfires. If the air

cleaner element is not installed

when the engine backfires, you

could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the element is perfo-

rated or removed, engine wear will be

excessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is

unnecessary to clean or wash the ele-

ment.

& Replacing the air cleaner

element

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-

der extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

! 2.5 L models

1) Clip

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

– CONTINUED –

11-15

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

2. Open the air cleaner case.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.

CAUTION

If the inside of the air cleaner case is

extremely soiled (for example, by

sand), contact a SUBARU dealer

and have the air cleaner case

cleaned.

4. If you find large foreign objects such

as leaves inside the air cleaner case,

remove the foreign objects.

5. Install a new air cleaner element in the

way the longitudinal side and the trans-

verse side face as shown in the illustra-

tion.

6. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the

air cleaner case (front).

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

11-16

! 3.6 L models

1) Clips

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).

2. Open the air cleaner case and remove

the air cleaner element.

CAUTION

If the inside of the air cleaner case is

extremely soiled (for example, by

sand), contact a SUBARU dealer

and have the air cleaner case

cleaned.

3. If you find large foreign objects such

as leaves inside the air cleaner case,

remove the foreign objects.

4. Install a new air cleaner element in the

way the longitudinal side and the trans-

verse side face as shown in the illustra-

tion.

5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the

air cleaner case (front).

6. Install the removed parts in the reverse

order of removal.

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

11-17

Maintenance and service/Spark plugs

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be repl aced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

& Recommended spark plugs

Refer to “Electrical system” F12-9.

Drive belts

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of

the drive belt periodically because your

engine is equipped with an automatic belt

tension adjuster. However, replacement of

the belt should be done according to the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If the belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

Manual transmission oil

It is unnecessary to check the manual

transmission oil level. However, if neces-

sary, consult your SUBARU dealer for

inspection.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual transmission, front differential

and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.

11-18

Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid

There is no fluid level gauge. It is

unnecessary to check the continuously

variable transmission fluid level. However,

if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer

for inspection.

Front differential gear oil

(CVT models) and rear differ-

ential gear oil

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed according

to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Mainten ance Boo klet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual tra nsmis sion, fro nt differenti al

and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other

than the specified oil may cause

occurrences of rattling noises while

idling and poor fuel consumption.

Brake fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Maintenance and service/Continuously variable transmission fluid

– CONTINUED –

11-19

Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line

A) The brake fluid level must be checked in

this area.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level

for the brake system at the front part of

the reservoir (shaded area in the illustra-

tion). For MT models, this reservoir is

used for both the brak e and clut ch

systems and has chambers for each

system. If the fluid level is below “MIN”,

add the recomme nded brake fluid to

“MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed

container.

& Recommended brake fluid

Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

Clutch fluid (MT models)

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately flush

them thoroughly with clean water.

For safety, when p erforming this

work, wearing eye protection is

advisable.

CAUTION

. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause improper clutch

operation.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

. When clutch fluid is added, be

careful not to allow any dirt into

the tank.

. Never splash the clutch fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

11-20

Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

. The fluid level for the clutch

system must be checked at the

inboard side of the reservoir. It

cannot be checked at the out-

board side of the reservoir.

1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line

A) The clutch fluid level must be checked in

this area.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Because this reservoir is used

for both the brake and clutch systems and

has chambers for each system, be sure to

check the fluid level for the clutch system

at the inboard side of the reservoir

(shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid

level is bel ow “MIN”, add the recom-

mended clutch fluid to “MAX”.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed

container.

& Recommended clutch fluid

Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of clutch

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following procedure, have

it checked by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same

pedal force each time. The distance the

pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine . The pedal should move

slightly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for

approximately 1 minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the brake booster. The brake

booster operates properly if the pedal

stroke decreases with each depression.

Maintenance and service/Brake booster

11-21

Maintenance and service/Brake pedal

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the brake pedal

free play

1) 0.02 – 0.11 in (0.5 – 2.7 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the

brake pedal up with one finger to check

the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf

(10 N, 1 kgf).

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

& Checking the brake pedal

reserve distance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

Clutch pedal (MT models)

Check the clutch pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disen-

gagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there

are no abnormal noises when the clutch

pedal is depressed, and that shifting into

1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal

slowly to check t hat the engine and

transmission smoothly couple without

any sign of slippage.

11-22

& Checking the clutch pedal

free play

1) 0.19 – 0.44 in (5 – 11 mm)

Lightly press the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and

check the free play.

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

Replacement of brake pad

CAUTION

. If you continue to drive despite

the scraping noise from the audi-

ble brake pad wear indicator, it

will result in the need for costly

brake rotor repair or replace-

ment.

. It is recommended that you dis-

connect the vehicle battery be-

fore replacing the brake pad.

However, it is dangerous to dis-

connect the vehicle battery. We

recommend that you have your

SUBARU dealer replace the

brake pad.

The disc brakes have audible wear

indicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indica tor mak es a ve ry aud ible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads

When replacing the brake pad, use only

genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-

ment, the new parts must be broken in as

follows:

! Brake pad

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40

mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake

pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more

times. Also, apply and release the electro-

nic parking brake five or more times.

Maintenance and service/Replacement of brake pad

11-23

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

Tires and wheels

& Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! All season tires

The factory-installed tires on your new

vehicle are all season tires.

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-

covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may

not react immediately to a sudden drop in

tire pressure (for example, a blow-out

caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on the

tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an

extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for

every difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and the

temperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: 225/55R17 97V, 225/50R18 95H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front

Rear

308F(−18C)

36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F(−128C)

38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)

−108F(−238C) 40 (280, 2.8)

39 (270, 2.7)

Example:

Tire size: 225/65R17 102H, 225/60R18

100H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

11-24

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front

Rear

308F(−18C)

38 (265, 2.65) 36 (250, 2.5)

108F(−128C)

40 (280, 2.8) 38 (265, 2.65)

−108F(−238C) 42 (295, 2.95)

40 (280, 2.8)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not go off, the

tire pressure monitoring system may not

be functioning normally. In this event, go

to a SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by

an increase in the outside air temperature

or by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to go off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a

switch to snow tires) and new TPMS

valves are installed on the newly fitted

wheels. Have this work performed by a

SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-

ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

in the instrument panel wi ll illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned ON or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

– CONTINUED –

11-25

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

illuminates steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute, promptly

contact a SUBARU dealer to have

the system inspected.

& Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from serious damage, nails, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not

to drive over curbs, potholes or on

other rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less, and

approach the curbs as squarely as

possible. Also, make sure the tires are

not pressed against the curb when you

park the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the

vehicle in a straight line, one of the

tires and/or wheels may be damaged.

Drive slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

& Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’ service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month (for example,

during a fuel stop) and before any long

journey.

Tire placard

Check the tire pressures when the tires

are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust

the tire pressures to the values shown on

the tire placard. The tire placard is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the

vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to

increase. Be careful not to mistakenly

release air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm

) when the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

3 hours or has been driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will result

in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

11-26

trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.

. Correct tire pressure (tread worn

evenly)

Roadholding is good, a nd steering is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so

fuel consumption is also lower.

. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road surface

bumps and dips, possibly resulting in

vehicle damage.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

– CONTINUED –

11-27

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

& Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes

the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not

correctly balanced, have them checked

and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire repairs

and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel alignment

causes the tires to wear on one side

and reduces the vehicle’s running

stability. Contact your SUBARU

dealer if you notice abnormal tire

wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is designed to

hold each wheel at a certain alignment

(relative to the other wheels and to the

road) for optimum straight-line stability

and cornering performance.

& Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorpor ates a tread wear

indicator, which bec omes visible when

the depth of the tread grooves decreases

to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be

replaced when the tread wear indicator

appears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn

beyond the acceptable limit and

must be replaced immediately. With

a tire in this condition, driving at

high speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydroplane.

The resulting loss of vehicle control

can lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-

ularly and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visible.

& Tire rotation direction mark

Example of tire rotation direction mark

1) Front

If the tire has a rotation direction specifica-

tion, the tire rotation direction mark is

placed on its sidewall.

When you install a tire that has the tire

rotation direction mark, install the tire with

11-28

the direction mark facing forward.

& Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-

tional tires

1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel.

Move the tires to the positions shown in

the illustration each time they are rotated.

For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tire at the time of rotation. After tire

rotation, adjust the tire pressures an d

make sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened.

After driving approximatel y 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

& Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design;

they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The

tires fitted as standard equipment are

optimally matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and were selected to give

the best possible combination of running

performance, ride comfort, and service

life. It is essential for every tire to have a

size and construction matching those

shown on the tire placard and to have a

speed symbol and load index matching

those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at

the same time.

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

– CONTINUED –

11-29

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

WARNING

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), it may lead to

serious mechanical damage to

the drive train of your car and

affect the following factors.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously r e-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

11-30

Aluminum wheels

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and

damaged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels is removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change

a flat, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for aluminum wheels.

Windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

Windshield washer fluid warning indicator

When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid remaining, the windshield

washer fluid warning indicator will appear.

When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as

follows.

1) “FULL” mark

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark

on the tank.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailabl e use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it

is diluted, as indicated in the following

table.

Maintenance and service/Aluminum wheels

– CONTINUED –

11-31

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30%

10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100% −498F(−458C)

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in

the table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

thepipingistoolowfortheoutside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or l ocal regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other materials

on the win dshield or the wiper blade

results in jerky wiper operation and streak-

ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the

streaks after operating the windshi eld

washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,

clean the outer surface of the windshield

(or rear window) and the wiper blades

using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield is

clean if beads do not form when you rinse

the windshield with water.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

. When you wish to raise the

passenger-side wiper arm, first

raise the driver-side wiper arm.

Otherwise, the passenger-side

wiper assembly and driver-side

wiper assembly will touch each

other, possibly resulting in

scratches.

11-32

. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper

arm to its original position.

Otherwise, the passenger-side

wiper assembly and driver-side

wiper assembly will touch each

other, possibly resulting in

scratches.

. When returning the raised wipers

to the original positions, return

the wipers slowly on the wind-

shield by hand. Returning the

wipers from the detached posi-

tions by the spring operation

might change the shape of the

wiper arm or scratch the wind-

shield.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

& Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

NOTE

Do not lower the wiper arm while the

wiper blade assembly is removed.

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

First raise the driver’s side wiper arm and

then raise the front passenger’s side wiper

arm.

1) Open the cover

2) Pull down the wiper blade

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

opening the cover and pulling it down in

the direction shown in the illustration.

3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it into position. First lower the front

passenger’s side wiper arm and then

lower the driver’s side wiper arm.

& Windshield wiper blade rub-

ber

1) Support

1. Grasp the locked end of the blade

rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the

stoppers on the rubber are free of the

support.

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

– CONTINUED –

11-33

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

3. Align the claws of the support with the

grooves in the rubber and slide the blade

rubber assembly into the support until it

locks.

1) Claw

2) Stopper

4. Be sure to position the claws at the

end of the support between the stoppers

on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is

not retained properly, the wiper blade may

scratch the windshield.

& Rear window wiper blade

assembly (Outback)

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

11-34

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

& Rear window wiper blade

rubber (Outback)

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and

install them in the new blade rubber.

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

– CONTINUED –

11-35

Maintenance and service/Battery

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window

glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

Battery

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when work-

ing near any battery. Never lean

over a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. To le ssen the r isk of sparks,

11-36

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals, and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material

other than a fuse because serious

damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

Maintenance and service/Fuses

– CONTINUED –

11-37

Maintenance and service/Fuses

The other one (main fuse box) is housed

in the engine compartment.

1) Spare fuses

The spare fuses are stored in the main

fuse box cover in the engine compart-

ment.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and turn off all electrical

accessories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”

F12-10.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect t he fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

11-38

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle. We recommend that you

install only genuine SUBARU accessories

on your vehicle.

Replacing bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is

the risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire. For the specified

wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb

chart” F12-14. For replacement,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

& HID headlights (if equipped)

WARNING

High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs

are used for the low beams of the

headlights. These HID bulbs use an

extremely high voltage. To avoid the

risk of an electric shock that could

result in serious injury, observe the

following precautions.

. Do not replace any headlight

bulbs (both low beam and high

beam) by yourself.

. Do not remove/restore the head-

light assemblies by yourself.

. Do not remove any headlight-

assembly components by your-

self.

For replacement, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

& Halogen headlights

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bulbs become

very hot while in use. If you touch

the bulb surface with bare hands or

greasy gloves, fingerprints or

grease on the bulb surface will

develop into hot spots, causing the

bulb to break. If there are finger

prints or grease on the bulb surface,

wipe them away with a soft cloth

moistened with alcohol.

Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories

– CONTINUED –

11-39

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

NOTE

. If headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

. It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Perform the following steps to replace the

bulbs.

Low beam headlight (if equipped)

1) Electrical connector

2) Clip

High beam headlight

1. Disconnect the e lectrical connector

from the bulb. When replacing the low

beam headlight bulb, remove the electrical

connector from the clip before disconnect-

ing the connector.

Low beam headlight (if equipped)

High beam headlight

2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Replace the bulb with new one. At this

time , use care not to touch t he bulb

11-40

surface.

4. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

5. Reconnect the electrical connector.

& Front turn signal light

1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and

pull it out.

2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and

replace the bulb with a new one.

& Front side marker light

1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and

pull it out.

2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and

replace the bulb with a new one.

& Front fog light (if equipped)

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

1. Remove the clips.

2. Turn over the mud guard.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

– CONTINUED –

11-41

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

Legacy Outback

4. Remove the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb with a new one.

6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the

mud guard.

& Rear combination lights

! Legacy

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

1. Turn the shopping bag hook 90 de-

grees counterclockwise and pull it out.

11-42

2. Turn over the trunk trim panel.

1) Rear side marker light

2) Rear turn signal light

3. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise. Use pliers if necessary.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and

replace it with a new one.

5. Set the bulb holder i nto th e rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

6. Securely reposition the trunk trim

panel.

7. Reattach the shopping bag hook.

! Outback

1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo

the clips, refer to “Type C clips” F11-6.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Remove the upper and lower screws.

4. Slide the rear combination light as-

sembly straight rearward and remove it

from the vehicle.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

– CONTINUED –

11-43

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

1) Rear turn signal light

2) Rear side marker light

5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and

replace it with a new one.

7. Set the bulb holder into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

8. Reinstall the rear combination light

assembly by sliding the two-pronged part

of the combination light assembly securely

to each holder of the vehicle side.

9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

10. Reinstall the side cover.

& Backup light

! Legacy

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the trunk trim lining by re-

moving the clips indicated in the illustra-

tion.

11-44

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

5. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.

! Outback

1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the

light cover as shown in the illustration, and

pry the light cover off from the rear gate

trim.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

4. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

– CONTINUED –

11-45

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& License plate light

! Legacy

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the trunk trim lining by re-

moving the clips indicated in the illustra-

tion.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

5. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.

! Outback

1. To remove the right-hand side license

plate light cover, insert a finger into the

right side of the cover, and then press

once to the left and pull it out. To remove

the left-hand side license plate light cover,

insert a finger into the left side of the

cover, and then press once to the right

and pull it out.

11-46

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall t he bulb socket and the

license plate light cover.

& Dome light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically.

3. Pull the bulb straight downward to

remove it.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the lens.

& Map light

CAUTION

Replacing the bul b could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Door step light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause a

short circuit. Have the bulb replaced

by your SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

– CONTINUED –

11-47

Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

& Cargo area light (Outback)

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

& Trunk light (Legacy)

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Other bulbs

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

Replacing battery

The access key / transmitter battery may

be discharged under the following condi-

tions.

. The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable

. The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable

. The transmitter does not operate prop-

erly when used within the standard dis-

tance

Replace the battery with a new one.

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key/transmitter

when replacing battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the ac-

cess key/transmitter when repla-

cing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts ; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only w ith the

11-48

same or equivalent type of the

battery.

. Batteries shall not be exposed to

excessive heat such as bright

sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

. Replace only with the s ame or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

. Dispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

. Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent flui d leakage.

Be careful not to bend the terminals. It

may result in a malfunction.

. It is recommended that the battery

should be replaced by a SUBARU

dealer.

. Use a new battery.

. After replacing the battery, confirm

that the access key/transmitter func-

tions properly.

& Replacing battery of access

key

CAUTION

When removing or fitting the access

key cover, make sure that the plastic

part does not come off or become

misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032

1) Release button

2) Mechanical key

1. Take out the mechanical key.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to

remove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

– CONTINUED –

11-49

Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key by

fitting the projections and recesses to-

gether.

& Replacing battery of trans-

mitter

1. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.

2. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace the old battery with a new

11-50

battery (Type CR1620 or equivalent)

making sure to install the new battery with

the negative (−) side facing up.

5. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on the case.

6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the

key head.

7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

remote keyless entry system’s control

unit. Press either the “

” or “ ” button

six times to synchronize the unit.

Maintenance and service/Replacing battery

11-51

————————————————————————————————————————

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2

Engine ............................................................... 12-3

Fuel ................................................................... 12-3

Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4

Engine oil filter................................................... 12-6

Manual transmission, front differential and rear

differential gear oil ........................................... 12-7

Fluids ................................................................ 12-8

Engine coolant ................................................... 12-8

Electrical system................................................ 12-9

Tires .................................................................. 12-9

Brake disc ......................................................... 12-9

Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-10

Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment ................................................. 12-10

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment ................................................. 12-12

Bulb chart......................................................... 12-14

Safety precautions ........................................... 12-14

Bulb chart ....................................................... 12-15

Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-18

Specifications

Specifications/Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

in (mm)

Item

Legacy Outback

2.5 L

3.6 L

2.5 L

3.6 L

Drive system

AWD

Transmission type

MT CVT CVT MT CVT CVT

Overall length

188.8 (4,796) 189.6 (4,817)

Overall width

72.4 (1,840) 72.4 (1,840)

Overall height

59.0 (1,500) 66.1 (1,680)

Wheelbase

108.3 (2,750) 108.1 (2,745)

Tread Front

62.2 (1,580) 61.8 (1,570)

Rear

62.8 (1,595) 62.2 (1,580)

Ground clearance

5.9 (150)

8.7 (220)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

MT: Manual transmission

CVT: Continuously variable transmission

AWD: All-Wheel Drive

12-2

& Engine

Engine model

FB25

(2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

EZ36

(3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,

4 stroke gasoline engine

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,

4 stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 152.4 (2,498) 221.5 (3,630)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.7 6 3.5 (94.0 6 90.0) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)

Compression ratio 10.3 : 1 10.5 : 1

Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4

1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4

& Fuel

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)

Specifications/Specifications

– CONTINUED –

12-3

Specifications/Specifications

& Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-11.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended

that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

! Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the

temperature and other factors.

. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower

viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the

engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.

. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity

as those recommended by SUBARU.

12-4

! 2.5 L models

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SM with the

words “ENERGY CONSER-

VING” or SN with the words

“RESOURCE CONSERVING”

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-4 or GF-5, which can be

identified with the ILSAC certifi-

cation mark (Starburst mark)

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil

for optimum engine performance and

protection. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may

be used if replenishment is needed but

should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic

oil at the next oil change.

– Adding the oil from low level to

full level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:

5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)

Specifications/Specifications

– CONTINUED –

12-5

Specifications/Specifications

! 3.6 L models

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SM with the

words “ENERGY CONSER-

VING” or SN with the words

“RESOURCE CONSERVING”

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-4 or GF-5, which can be

identified with the ILSAC certifi-

cation mark (Starburst mark)

Your vehicle is designed to use 5W-30

conventional motor oil, however 5W-30

synthetic may be used for optimum

engine performance.

If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,

10W-30 or 10W-40 conventional oil

may be used if replenishment is

needed but should be changed to 5W-

30 synthetic oil at the next oil change.

– Adding the oil from L to F level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:

6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)

& Engine oil filter

Model Oil filter color Part number Amount of rotation

2.5 L models Blue 15208AA15A 7/8 rotation

3.6 L models Black 15208AA031

3/4 rotation

12-6

& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil

Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil (CVT models) Rear differential gear oil

Oil grade

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity

No. and applic-

able tempera-

ture

—

. 75W/90*

. 90

*: recommended

Oil capacity*

3.5 US qt

(3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt)

2.5 L models: 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)

3.6 L models: 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)

0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Manual transmission

oil” F11-18

“Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and

rear differential gear oil” F11-19

“Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differ-

ential gear oil” F11-19

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of manual transmission oil/front differential gear oil.

*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil/front differential gear oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel

efficiency.

Specifications/Specifications

– CONTINUED –

12-7

Specifications/Specifications

& Fluids

Fluid

Fluid type*

Fluid capacity*

Remarks*

Continuously variable transmission

fluid (CVT models)

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

2.5 L models: 12.0 US qt (11.4 liters,

10.0 Imp qt)

3.6 L models: 13.4 US qt (12.7

liters, 11.2 Imp qt)

“Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid” F11-19

Brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

–

“Brake fluid” F11-19

Clutch fluid (MT models)

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

–

“Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

& Engine coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type

2.5 L models

MT models 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)

SUBARU Super CoolantCVT models 8.2 US qt (7.8 liters, 6.9 Imp qt)

3.6 L models

7.4 US qt (7.0 liters, 6.2 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-14.

12-8

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR)

2.5 L models 55D23R (12V-48AH)

3.6 L models

75D23R (12V-52AH)

Alternator

12V-130A

Spark plugs

2.5 L models SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)

3.6 L models

SILFR6C11 (NGK)

& Tires

Tire size

225/55R17

97V

225/50R18

95H

225/65R17

102H

225/60R18

100H

Wheel size

17 6 7 1/2J 18 6 7 1/2J 17 6 7J 18 6 7J

Pressure Front

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

)

Rear

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Temporary spare tire

Size T155/70 D17 T155/80 R17

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel

nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening

procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-5.

& Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.

Specifications/Specifications

12-9

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 7.5A START1

2 20A 12V SOCKET

3 7.5A IG1-1

4 15A AUDIO NAVI

5 15A UNIT IG2-2

6 20A P/W R.LH

7 10A CIGAR

8 15A A/C IG

9 7.5A ACC

10 7.5A UNIT IG2-1

11 30A P/W MAIN1

12 7.5A START2

13 Empty

14 7.5A UNIT+B

15 7.5A METER IG

16 20A P/W R.RH

17 7.5A MIR

18 7.5A LAMP IG

19 7.5A IG1-2

20 10A SRS AIR BAG

21 20A P/W PASS1

22 15A SEAT HTR R

12-10

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

23 10A DRL

24 20A P/W MAIN2

25 Empty

26 10A BACK UP

27 20A WIPER DEICER

28 20A TRAIL R.FOG

29 20A P/W PASS2

30 Empty

31 7.5A SMT

32 15A SEAT HTR F

33 7.5A KEY SW

34 7.5A D_OP+B

35 20A SUN ROOF

36 Empty

37 7.5A STOP

38 7.5A EYE SIGHT

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

– CONTINUED –

12-11

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A) Main fuse

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 7.5A HORN RH

2 7.5A

HORN LH

3 10A

ILLUMI

4 10A TAIL

5 15A H/L LO RH

6 15A H/L LO LH

7 10A H/L HI LH

8 15A D/L

9 10A H/L HI RH

10 7.5A ALT-S

11 20A FUEL

12 15A HAZARD

13 30A IG2

14 7.5A PU B/UP

15 7.5A OBD

16 20A

25A

O2 HTR

17 15A E/G2

18 15A ETC

19 15A E/G1

*1: 2.5 L models

*2: 3.6 L models

12-12

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

20 15A AVCS

21 15A INJ

22 7.5A CVT SSR

23 20A TCU

24 30A BACKUP

25 7.5A ACTGS

26 25A SUB FAN

27 25A MAIN FAN

28 30A ABS SOL

29 20A AUDIO

30 25A R.DEF

31 15A BLOWER

32 15A BLOWER

33 10A F.FOG RH

34 10A F.FOG LH

35 15A R.WIPER

36 15A F.WASH

37 30A F.WIPER

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

12-13

Specifications/Bulb chart

Bulb chart

& Safety precautions

WARNING

. Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing

bulbs, turn off the lights and wait

until the bulbs cool down. Other-

wise, there is a risk of sustaining

a burn injury.

. For models with HID low beam

headlights, observe the following

precautions. Not doing so carries

the risk of an electric shock that

could result in serious injury

because the HID bulbs use an

extremely high voltage.

– Do not replace any headlight

bulbs (both low beam and

high beam) by yourself.

– Do not remove/restore the

headlight assemblies by your-

self.

– Do not remove any headlight-

assembly components by

yourself.

For replacement, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

12-14

& Bulb chart

NOTE

Lights A, B, C, D, E and F are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

Specifications/Bulb chart

– CONTINUED –

12-15

Specifications/Bulb chart

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3

2) Low beam headlight

Models with HID headlights 12V-35W D4S

Models without HID headlights 12V-55W H11

3) Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W

4) Map light 12V-8W

5) Dome light 12V-8W

6) Door step light 12V-5W W5W

7) Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W

8) Front fog light

Legacy (models without steering responsive fog

lights system)

12V-19W H16

Legacy (models with steering responsive fog lights

system)

12V-55W H11

Outback 12V-55W H11

9) Vanity mirror light 14V-1.4W HTU

10) Cargo area light 12V-13W SAE #912

11) Licence plate light (Outback)

12V-5W W5W

12) Backup light (Outback) 12V-16W W16W

13)

Rear turn signal light (Outback) 12V-21W WY21W

14) Rear side marker light (Outback)

12V-5W W5W

15) Trunk light (Legacy) 12V-3.8W SAE #194

16)

License plate light (Legacy) 12V-5W W5W

17) Backup light (Legacy) 12V-16W W16W

12-16

Wattage Bulb No.

18)

Rear turn signal light (Legacy) 12V-21W

WY21W

19)

Rear side marker light (Legacy) 12V-5W

W5W

Parking light –

–

Side turn signal light (if equipped) –

–

C) High-mounted stop light (Outback) ––

D) Tail and stop light (Outback) ––

High-mounted stop light (Legacy) ––

Tail and stop light (Legacy) –

–

Specifications/Bulb chart

12-17

Specifications/Vehicle identification

Vehicle identification 1) Emission control label

2) Certification and bar code label

3) Tire inflation pressure label

4) Vehicle identification number plate

5) Model number label

6) Fuel label

7) Air conditioner label

12-18

For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2

Tire information .................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4

Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-9

Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

load capacities ............................................... 13-13

Adverse safety consequences of overloading

on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-13

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-13

Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-14

Treadwear ....................................................... 13-14

Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-14

Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15

Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-15

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.

For U.S.A.

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

Tire information

& Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These marking

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating De-

scriptions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

13-2

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs

(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600

kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise al tered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review

of the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) Manufacturer ’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

! Other markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inf lated. For example, “350 kPa

(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-3

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

! Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg

(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1

NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-

STER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “ Uniform tire

quality grading standards” F13-14.

& Recommended tire inflation

pressure

! Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressure

For the recommended cold tire

inflation pressure for your vehicle’s

tires, refer to “Tires” F12-9.

! Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

13-4

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

CAUTION

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to flex

severely and to rapidly be-

come hot. A sharp increase

in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure

of the tire(s). Possible result-

ing loss of vehicle control

could lead to an accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-

flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a

short distance warms up the tires

and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected

by the outside temperature. It is

best to check tire pressure out-

doors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-5

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

. Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

. Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

. Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than t he corresponding standard

tire.

. Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

. Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside sur-

face of a tubeless tire that contains

the inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has

a particular side that must al-

ways face outward when mount-

ing on a vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

. Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

. Max imum permis sible inflat ion

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

13-6

cle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the

end of this section.

. Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

. Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

. Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

. Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

. Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

. Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rub-

ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standard i tems

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special

trim.

. Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

. Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim width

Nominal distance betwee n rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-7

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

due to labeling, decoration , or

protective bands.

. Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

. Sidewall separation

The parting o f the rubber com-

pound from the cord material in

the sidewall.

. Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

. Tread

That portion of a tire that comes

into contact with the road.

. Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

. Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

. Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

. Vehicle capacity weigh t

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating capa-

city.

. Vehicle maximum load on the

tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accor-

dance with Table 1 that is ap-

pended to the end of this section)

and dividing by 2.

. Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

13-8

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3

2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

& Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’s tread wear

indicator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead t o an

accident.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-9

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Rotating the tires involves switch-

ing the front and rear tires on the

right-hand side of the vehicle and

similarly switching the front and

rear tires on the left-hand side of

the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept

on its original side of the vehicle.)

Replace any damaged or unevenly

worn tire at the time of rotation.

After tire rotation, adjust the tire

pressures and make sure the wheel

nuts are correctly tightened. For

information about the tightening

torque and tightening sequence

for the wheel nuts, refer to “Flat

tires” F9-5

& Vehicle load limit – how to

determine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown o n the

vehicle placard attached to the

driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the

statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on your vehicle’s placard.

Thevehicleplacardalsoshows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue

load of a trailer (if applicable))

For towing capacity information and

weight limits, refer to “Trailer towing

(Outback)” F8-21

! Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

13-10

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the

same vehicle (bringing the number

of occupants to two), the calcula-

tions are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-11

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

is indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a

trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).

10% of the trailer weight is applied

to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue

load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

13-12

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.

& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label affixed to

the driver’s door.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and

on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, vehicle

and tire as shown in the following.

This could lead to an accident and

possibly result in severe personal

injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other parts of the body could break

or experience accelerated wear

that will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occu pants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passenger s from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

– CONTINUED –

13-13

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount o f cargo a nd

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be

five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capa-

city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6

150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween t read shoulder and maxi-

mum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of the ir use, howev er, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

13-14

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accel-

eration, cornering, hydroplan-

ing, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

& Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire

that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or ex-

cessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possi-

ble tire failure.

Reporting safety defects

(USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which coul d cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Subaru of

America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehi-

cles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Subaru of

America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,

you may call the Vehicle Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (USA)

– CONTINUED –

13-15

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (USA)

New Jersey Avenue, SE, West

Building, Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

13-16

Index

14-2 Index

Abbreviation ................................................................... 2

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-33

Warning light ......................................................... 3-18

Access key ............................................................... 2-10

Warning indicator ................................................... 3-24

Accessories....................................................... 5-2, 11-39

Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-9

Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control system ............................... 4-5

Manual climate control system................................... 4-6

Air filtration system..................................................... 4-10

Airflow selection........................................................... 4-6

Alarm system ............................................................ 2-27

All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-21

Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-31

Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3

Antenna system........................................................... 5-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-33

Arming the system ..................................................... 2-28

Armrest..................................................................... 1-15

Ashtray..................................................................... 6-11

AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-16

Audio

Antenna system....................................................... 5-2

Set......................................................................... 5-3

Auto on/off headlights ................................................. 3-42

Sensor.................................................................. 3-44

Auto-dimming mirror ................................................... 3-54

Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-5

Automatic headlight beam leveler

Warning light.......................................................... 3-29

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-17

Battery

Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-8

Jump starting ......................................................... 9-11

Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-49

Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-21

Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-50

Vehicle battery ..................................................... 11-36

Booster seat .............................................................. 1-34

Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-9

Brake

Assist.................................................................... 7-32

Booster ....................................................... 7-32, 11-21

Disc ...................................................................... 12-9

Fluid ........................................................... 11-19, 12-8

Pad .................................................................... 11-23

Parking ................................................................. 7-42

Pedal .................................................................. 11-22

System.................................................................. 7-32

Brake pedal

Free play............................................................. 11-22

Reserve distance.................................................. 11-22

Brake system............................................................. 7-32

Warning light.......................................................... 3-19

Braking ..................................................................... 7-32

Tips ...................................................................... 7-32

Breaking-in of new brake pads ................................... 11-23

Bulb

Chart.................................................................. 12-14

Replacing............................................................. 11-39

Cargo area

Cover ................................................................... 6-15

Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-48

Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-18

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3

Center

Console .................................................................. 6-6

Changing

Coolant................................................................ 11-15

Flat tire ................................................................... 9-5

Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-13

Charge warning light .................................................. 3-15

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

light....................................................................... 3-15

Checking

Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-22

Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-22

Clutch function...................................................... 11-22

Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-23

Coolant level ........................................................ 11-14

Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-19

Fluid level (clutch fluid) .......................................... 11-20

Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-31

Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-11

Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-27

Installation of a booster seat.................................... 1-34

Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-30

Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-35

Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-38

Child safety ................................................................... 4

Locks.................................................................... 2-32

Chime

Key........................................................................ 3-4

Light ..................................................................... 3-42

Seatbelt................................................................. 3-12

Cleaning

Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3

Interior .................................................................. 10-5

Ventilation grille ....................................................... 4-9

Climate control system ................................................. 4-3

Automatic ............................................................... 4-5

Manual................................................................... 4-6

Clock ........................................................................ 3-31

Clutch

Fluid ........................................................... 11-20, 12-8

Pedal .................................................................. 11-22

Coat hook.................................................................. 6-12

Console ..................................................................... 6-6

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)...................... 7-25

Fluid ........................................................... 11-19, 12-8

Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-16

Coolant ........................................................... 11-14, 12-8

Cooling system ........................................................ 11-14

Corrosion protection.................................................... 10-4

Crossbars.................................................................. 8-14

Cruise control ............................................................ 7-49

Indicator ................................................................ 3-29

Index 14-3

14-4 Index

Set indicator .......................................................... 3-29

Cup holder .................................................................. 6-7

Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-8

Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-8

Daytime running light system....................................... 3-45

Defogger................................................................... 3-52

Defrosting ................................................................... 4-9

Deicer ...................................................................... 3-52

Differential gear oil

Front ........................................................... 11-19, 12-7

Rear............................................................ 11-19, 12-7

Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2

Disarming the alarm system ........................................ 2-31

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators........................ 7-33

Dome light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-47

Door

Locks ..................................................................... 2-6

Open indicator light ................................................ 3-21

Step light ............................................................. 11-47

Double trip meter ......................................................... 3-9

Drive belts................................................................ 11-18

Driving

All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-21

AWD vehicles .......................................................... 8-5

Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 6

Drinking ..................................................................... 5

Drugs ........................................................................ 6

Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4

Off road .................................................................. 8-6

Pets.......................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads .............................................. 8-10

Tips ................................................. 7-24, 7-30, 8-2, 8-5

Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 6

Winter .................................................................... 8-8

ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-11

Electrical system ........................................................ 12-9

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system........... 7-34

Warning ................................................................ 3-20

Electronic parking brake .............................................. 7-42

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal ......... 7-44

Hill Holder ............................................................. 7-44

Warning ........................................................ 3-20, 7-46

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................. 1-17

Engine

Compartment overview............................................ 11-9

Coolant ....................................................... 11-14, 12-8

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................. 5, 8-2

Hood .................................................................... 11-7

Low oil level warning indicator.................................. 3-16

Oil .............................................................. 11-11, 12-4

Overheating ........................................................... 9-13

Starting & stopping .......................................... 7-9, 7-12

Event data recorder ........................................................ 8

Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2

Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-5

Floor mat................................................................... 6-14

Fluid level

Brake .................................................................. 11-19

Clutch.................................................................. 11-20

Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-19

Fog light

Bulb .......................................................... 11-41, 12-14

Indicator light......................................................... 3-30

Steering responsive fog lights system ....................... 3-47

Switch .................................................................. 3-47

Front

Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-19, 12-7

Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-24

Side marker light................................................... 11-41

Turn signal light .................................................... 11-41

Front seats.................................................................. 1-2

Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-4

Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-8

Memory function ...................................................... 1-5

Power seat.............................................................. 1-5

Reclining................................................................. 1-4

Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ......................... 1-4

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3

Consumption indicator ............................................ 3-35

Economy hints......................................................... 8-2

Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-4

Gauge .................................................................. 3-10

Requirements .................................................. 7-3, 12-3

Fuses ...................................................................... 11-37

Fuses and circuits.................................................... 12-10

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-14

Glove box................................................................... 6-6

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-14

Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-7, 9-2

Head restraint adjustment

Front seat............................................................... 1-8

Rear seat .............................................................. 1-14

Headlight................................................................... 3-42

Beam leveler.......................................................... 3-45

Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-14

Control switch ........................................................ 3-42

Flasher.................................................................. 3-44

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30

Welcome lighting function ........................................ 3-43

High beam indicator light ............................................. 3-29

High/low beam change (dimmer) .................................. 3-44

Hill descent control ..................................................... 7-39

Indicator ................................................................ 3-30

Hill Holder ................................................................. 7-44

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-21

Switch................................................................... 7-45

Hill start assist ........................................................... 7-47

To activate/deactivate.............................................. 7-48

HomeLink

................................................................. 3-54

Hook

Coat ..................................................................... 6-12

Convenient ............................................................ 6-14

Convenient tie-down ............................................... 6-18

Index 14-5

14-6 Index

Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-13

Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-14

Horn......................................................................... 3-67

Hose and connections ............................................... 11-14

Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3

Light....................................................................... 3-4

Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-46

Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-4

Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-28

Indicator light

Cruise control ........................................................ 3-29

Cruise control set................................................... 3-29

Door open............................................................. 3-21

Front fog light ........................................................ 3-30

Headlight .............................................................. 3-30

High beam ............................................................ 3-29

Hill descent control................................................. 3-30

Hill Holder ............................................................. 3-21

Immobilizer............................................................ 3-28

Security ................................................................ 3-28

Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-29

Steering responsive fog lights OFF........................... 3-30

Turn signal ............................................................ 3-29

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ................................ 3-23

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ......................... 3-23

X-mode................................................................. 3-30

Information display ..................................................... 3-31

Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-54

Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2

Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-38

Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-5

Jump starting ............................................................. 9-11

Key............................................................................ 2-3

Number .................................................................. 2-3

Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-4

Replacement........................................................... 2-5

Keyless access with push-button start system................ 2-10

Disabling keyless access functions ........................... 2-18

Locking and unlocking doors.................................... 2-13

Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-16

Opening trunk ........................................................ 2-16

Warning chimes and warning indicator ...................... 3-24

When access key does not operate properly.............. 9-18

Keyless entry system .................................................. 2-23

Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5

License plate light..................................................... 11-46

Light

Backup ............................................................... 11-44

Cargo area .................................................... 6-3, 11-48

Control switch ........................................................ 3-42

Daytime running ..................................................... 3-45

Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-47

Door step ............................................................ 11-47

Front fog ..................................................... 3-47, 11-41

Front side marker................................................... 3-42

Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-4

License plate........................................................ 11-46

Map ............................................................. 6-2, 11-47

Rear combination.................................................. 11-42

Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-42

Rear turn signal .................................................... 11-42

Trunk................................................................... 11-48

Turn signal ......................................... 3-46, 11-41, 11-42

Vanity mirror ............................................................ 6-5

Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12

Low fuel warning light................................................. 3-21

Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-17

Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-35

Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3

Schedule .............................................................. 11-3

Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-24

Tips...................................................................... 11-5

Tools ...................................................................... 9-3

Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ... 3-15

Manual

Climate control system ............................................. 4-6

Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................ 7-29

Seat ....................................................................... 1-4

Transmission ......................................................... 7-23

Transmission oil............................................ 11-18, 12-7

Map light........................................................... 6-2, 11-47

Maximum load limits................................................... 8-21

Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-7

Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-52

Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-54

Moonroof................................................................... 2-46

New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2

Odometer ................................................................... 3-8

Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6

Oil filter ........................................................... 11-13, 12-6

Oil level

Engine ................................................................ 11-11

Manual transmission ............................................. 11-18

Warning light.......................................................... 3-16

Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-16

Outside

Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-52

Mirrors .................................................................. 3-66

Temperature indicator.............................................. 3-32

Overhead console ....................................................... 6-7

Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13

Parking ..................................................................... 7-42

Brake.................................................................... 7-42

Tips ...................................................................... 7-46

Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4

Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-3

PIN Code Access ....................................................... 2-21

Index 14-7

14-8 Index

Pocket ........................................................................ 6-7

Power

Door locking switch .................................................. 2-9

Outlets.................................................................... 6-9

Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-66

Rear gate...................................................... 2-40, 9-21

Seat ....................................................................... 1-5

Steering................................................................ 7-31

Steering warning light ............................................. 3-22

Windows............................................................... 2-32

Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-27, 1-70

Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8

Printed antenna ........................................................... 5-2

Push-button

Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5

Starting and stopping engine ................................... 7-12

Rear

Combination lights................................................. 11-42

Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-19, 12-7

Gate..................................................................... 2-39

Turn signal light .................................................... 11-42

Rear seat.................................................................. 1-11

Armrest................................................................. 1-15

Folding down......................................................... 1-12

Head restraint adjustment ....................................... 1-14

Reclining............................................................... 1-11

Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-19

Rear window

Defogger............................................................... 3-52

Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-51

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-34

Recommended

Brake fluid ............................................................. 12-8

Clutch fluid ............................................................ 12-8

Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-8

Engine oil .............................................................. 12-4

Front differential gear oil.......................................... 12-7

Manual transmission oil ........................................... 12-7

Rear differential gear oil .......................................... 12-7

Spark plugs ........................................................... 12-9

Refueling.................................................................... 7-4

Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-15

Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-23

Replacement

Brake pad and lining............................................. 11-23

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-32

Replacing

Access key battery ............................................... 11-49

Air cleaner element............................................... 11-15

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-26

Remote engine start transmitter battery ..................... 7-21

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................. 11-50

Replacing bulbs ............................................. 11-39, 12-14

Backup light......................................................... 11-44

Cargo area light ................................................... 11-48

Dome light ........................................................... 11-47

Door step light ..................................................... 11-47

Front fog light....................................................... 11-41

Front side marker light .......................................... 11-41

Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-41

Halogen headlight ................................................. 11-39

HID headlight ....................................................... 11-39

License plate light ................................................. 11-46

Map light.............................................................. 11-47

Rear combination light ........................................... 11-42

Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-42

Rear turn signal light ............................................. 11-42

Trunk light............................................................ 11-48

Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-12

Roof rails with integrated cross bars............................. 8-14

Rope hook ................................................................ 8-18

Safety

Precautions when driving ............................................. 3

Symbol ...................................................................... 2

Warnings ................................................................... 2

Seat

Fabric................................................................... 10-5

Front ...................................................................... 1-2

Heater .................................................................... 1-9

Height adjustment .................................................... 1-4

Memory function ...................................................... 1-5

Power..................................................................... 1-5

Rear..................................................................... 1-11

Seatbelt ................................................................. 3, 1-16

Fastening.............................................................. 1-17

Maintenance.......................................................... 1-24

Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-24

Safety tips............................................................. 1-16

Warning light and chime ......................................... 3-12

Security

Alarm system ......................................................... 2-27

Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-4

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-28

Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-31

Select lever

Position indicator .................................................... 3-29

Shift lock function ................................................... 7-27

Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-31

Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-13

Snow tires ....................................................... 8-11, 11-24

Snowy and icy roads .................................................. 8-10

Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-18, 12-9

Specifications............................................................. 12-2

Speedometer .............................................................. 3-8

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 3, 1-41

SRS airbag system

Monitors ................................................................ 1-68

Servicing ............................................................... 1-69

Warning light.......................................................... 3-14

Starting & stopping engine.................................... 7-9, 7-12

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7

Steering responsive fog lights system ........................... 3-47

OFF indicator ......................................................... 3-30

Steering wheel

Power ................................................................... 7-31

Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-66

Stop light................................................................. 12-15

Storage compartment................................................... 6-5

SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection (SRVD)...................... 7-52

OFF switch ............................................................ 7-58

Index 14-9

14-10 Index

SRVD approach indicator light/warning buzzer........... 7-55

Warning indicator ........................................... 3-30, 7-57

Sun shade ................................................................ 2-48

Sun visors................................................................... 6-4

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-41

Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5

Tachometer ................................................................. 3-9

Temperature gauge .................................................... 3-11

Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-16

Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2

Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-35, 1-38

Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-14

Tire ................................................................. 11-24, 12-9

Chains.................................................................. 8-11

Inspection ............................................................ 11-26

Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-26

Replacement ........................................................ 11-29

Rotation............................................................... 11-29

Size and pressure.................................................. 12-9

Types .................................................................. 11-24

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..... 7-40, 9-10, 11-24

Warning light ......................................................... 3-17

Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-24

Tools .......................................................................... 9-3

Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-35, 1-38

Towing...................................................................... 9-13

All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17

Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-16

Hooks ................................................................... 9-14

Weight .................................................................. 8-21

Trailer

Connecting ............................................................ 8-19

Hitch (Outback) .............................................. 8-18, 8-25

Towing .................................................................. 8-21

Towing tips ............................................................ 8-26

Trip meter................................................................... 3-9

Trunk lid ............................................................ 2-37, 9-19

Release handle ...................................................... 2-38

Trunk light ............................................................... 11-48

Turn signal

Indicator lights........................................................ 3-29

Lever .................................................................... 3-46

Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-19

Valet mode ................................................................ 2-31

Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-5

Vehicle

Capacity weight...................................................... 8-13

Identification ........................................................ 12-18

Symbols .................................................................... 3

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-23

OFF switch ............................................................ 7-37

Operation indicator light........................................... 3-22

System.................................................................. 7-35

Warning light.......................................................... 3-22

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-12

Warning chimes

Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-24

Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-12

Warning light

ABS ..................................................................... 3-18

Access key ........................................................... 3-24

All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-21

AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-16

Automatic headlight beam leveler............................. 3-29

Brake system ........................................................ 3-19

Charge ................................................................. 3-15

CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-15

Engine low oil level ................................................ 3-16

Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-24

Low fuel................................................................ 3-21

Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-17

Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-16

Power steering ...................................................... 3-22

Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-12

SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-14

SUBARU Rear Vehicle Detection ............................. 3-30

Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-22

Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-21

Warranties ..................................................................... 1

Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-21

Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3

Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-28

Welcome lighting function ............................................ 3-43

Wheel

Aluminum ............................................................ 11-31

Balance............................................................... 11-28

Nut tightening torque............................................... 12-9

Replacement........................................................ 11-30

Windows ................................................................... 2-32

Windshield

Washer fluid......................................................... 11-31

Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-50

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-33

Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-52

Winter

Driving ................................................................... 8-8

Tires ........................................................... 8-11, 11-24

Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-49

Wiper deicer .............................................................. 3-52

X-mode ..................................................................... 7-38

Indicator ................................................................ 3-30

Index 14-11

————————————————————————————————————————

GAS STATION REFERENCE

& Fuel:

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

(90 RON) or higher.

& Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” F7-3.

& Fuel capacity:

18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)

& Engine oil:

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further

details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative

engine oil described as follows.

. API classification SM with the words “ENERGY CONSER-

VING” or SN with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”

. or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified with the

ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”

F12-4.

& Engine oil capacity:

2.5 L models: 5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)

3.6 L models: 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil

filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be

checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about

maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-11.

& Cold tire pressure:

Refer to “Tires” F12-9.

Subaru Outback 2015 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info